NZS4404 2010

NZS 4404:2010
Incorporating Amendment No. 1
New Zealand Standard
Land Development and

Subdivision Infrastructure
Superseding NZS 4404:2004
NZS 4404:2010
NZS 4404:2010
COMMITTEE REPRESENTATION
This Standard was prepared under the supervision of the P 4404 Committee the Standards
Council established under the Standards Act 1988.
*
The committee consisted of representatives of the following:
d
Nominating Organisation Committee Member
*On 23/09/2020 08:53 AM Total Ground Engineering purchased a single use licence to store this document on a single computer.
Association of Consulting Engineers New Zealand Brian Kouvelis
n
Ingenium Chris Pepper
Institution of Professional Engineers New Zealand Mark Apeldoorn
ala
Local Government New Zealand Dale Wills
Ministry for the Environment Yvonne Weeber
New Zealand Institute of Surveyors Brett Gawn (Chair)
New Zealand Planning Institute Keith Hall
Ze
New Zealand Transport Agency Bill Greenwood
New Zealand Utilities Advisory Group Ian Cox
Plastics New Zealand Frank O’Callaghan
Road Controlling Authorities Forum New Zealand Inc. Neil Johnstone
ew
Urban Design Forum Greg McBride
Total Ground Engineering may print and retain one copy only.
Water New Zealand John Palmer
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Standards New Zealand gratefully acknowledges the contribution of time and expertise
from all those involved in developing this Standard. Standards New Zealand also gratefully
sN
acknowledges the drawings provided by Waitakere City Council that formed the basis for
figures 3.6(A) to 3.6(C), Kapiti Coast District Council for figure 3.14, UK Department for
rd
Transport for figure 3.2, and Water Services Association of Australia for Appendices A and B.
Cover image courtesy Justin Borgueta and Harrison Grierson.

da
99954
118.92.13.10
COPYRIGHT
The copyright of this document is the property of the Standards Council. Except for the
an
schedules, and the standard construction drawings in Appendix B, which are copyright
waived, no part of the text may be reproduced by photocopying or by any other means
without the prior written approval of the Chief Executive Officer of Standards New Zealand
St
unless the circumstances are covered by Part III of the Copyright Act 1994.
Standards New Zealand will vigorously defend the copyright in this Standard. Every person
who breaches Standards New Zealand’s copyright may be liable to a fine not exceeding
$50,000 or to imprisonment for a term not to exceed 3 months. If there has been a flagrant
ht
breach of copyright, Standards New Zealand may also seek additional damages from the
infringing party, in addition to obtaining injunctive relief and an account of profits.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Published by Standards New Zealand, the trading arm of the Standards Council,
Private Bag 2439, Wellington 6140. Telephone (04) 498 5990, Fax (04) 498 5994, Website
http://www.standards.co.nz.
py
AMENDMENTS
No. Date of issue Description Entered by,
Co
and date
1 October 2010 Table 3.2 – replaced. Some images were
incorrectly shown. Each is now numbered.
Table 5.6 – Water mains column correction
to read 500 for minimum vertical clearance.
Appendix E – Figure E23 now shows correct
image; title to match table 3.2.
Update reference to Utilities Access Act 2010.
6.3.16 – clause numbers corrected.
Appendix B – CM-005 'Clearance' corrected.
2
Single User PDF Download Terms & Conditions
You have downloaded material which is subject to strict conditions of use. Copyright in this material is
owned by Standards New Zealand. Please read these terms and conditions carefully, as in addition to the
usual range of civil remedies available to Standards New Zealand for infringement of copyright, under New
*
Zealand law every person who infringes copyright may be liable to a fine not exceeding $50,000 or to
d
imprisonment for a term not to exceed three months.
You have purchased a single-user licence to store this non-reviseable Adobe Acrobat PDF file on your
n
personal computer. You may print out and retain ONE printed copy only.
ala
Standards New Zealand retains title and ownership of the copyright in this PDF file and the corresponding
permitted printed copy at all times.
Under this license use of both the PDF file and the single permitted printed copy of this PDF file you may
Ze
make are restricted to you. Under no circumstances are you permitted to sell, transfer or copy this PDF
file, the one permitted printed copy of this PDF file, or any part of either of them.
You undertake that you will not modify, adapt, translate, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or
ew
create derivative works based on any of the downloaded PDF file, nor will you merge it with any other
software or document, even for internal use within your organization.

Under no circumstances may this PDF file be placed on a network of any sort without the express
permission of Standards New Zealand. sN
You are solely responsible for the selection of this PDF file and any advice or recommendation given by
Standards New Zealand or its employees or agents about any aspect of this PDF file is intended for
rd
guidance only and is followed or acted upon entirely at your own risk.
Standards New Zealand is not aware of any inherent risk of viruses in this PDF file at the time that it is
da
downloaded. Standards New Zealand has exercised due diligence to ensure, so far as practicable, that this
99954
118.92.13.10
file does not contain such viruses.

an
No warranty of any form is given by Standards New Zealand or by any party associated with Standards
New Zealand with regard to this PDF file, and you accept and acknowledge that Standards New Zealand
will not be liable in any way to you or any to other person in respect of any loss or damage, however
St
caused which may be suffered or incurred or which may arise directly or indirectly through any use of this
PDF file.
Regardless of where you were when you downloaded this PDF file you accept and acknowledge that to the
ht
fullest extent possible you submit to New Zealand law with regard to this licence and to your use of this
PDF file.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
NOTES
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Superseding NZS 4404:2004
Ze
ala
n d
Land Development and
*
Subdivision Infrastructure
ISBN 978-1-86975-132-6
Incorporating Amendment No. 1
NZS 4404:2010
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
NOTES
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
NZS 4404:2010
Contents
Committee representation.................................................................................IFC
Acknowledgement..............................................................................................IFC
*
Copyright............................................................................................................IFC
d
Referenced documents........................................................................................ 11
n
Related documents.............................................................................................. 17
Latest revisions....................................................................................................19
ala
Review of Standards............................................................................................19
Foreword..............................................................................................................20
Outcome statement.............................................................................................. 21
Ze
Section
1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES................................23
ew
1.1 Scope ...........................................................................................23
1.2 Interpretation..................................................................................23
1.2.1 General..............................................................................23

1.2.2
1.2.3
sN
Definitions..........................................................................24
Abbreviations.....................................................................27
1.3 Context...........................................................................................30
rd
1.3.1 Resource Management Act...............................................30
1.3.2 Historic Places Act............................................................. 31
da
99954
118.92.13.10
1.3.3 Building Act........................................................................ 31
1.3.4 Other legislation................................................................. 31
1.4 Low impact design.........................................................................32
an
1.5 Climate change..............................................................................32

1.6 Urban design protocol....................................................................32
St
1.7 Requirements for design and construction....................................33

1.7.1 Investigation and design....................................................33
1.7.2 Construction......................................................................33
ht
1.8 Approval of design and construction.............................................33

1.8.1 Documents to be submitted for design approval...............33
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
1.8.2 Drawings............................................................................34
1.8.3 Design basis for documents submitted for approval.........35
py
1.8.4 Approval of design.............................................................36

1.8.5 Notification of contracts and phases of construction.........36
1.8.6 Supervision of construction............................................... 37
Co
1.8.7 Connecting to existing services......................................... 37

1.8.8 Testing............................................................................... 37
1.8.9 Maintenance......................................................................38
1.8.10 Completion documentation................................................38
1.8.11 Approval of uncompleted work..........................................38
1.9 Bonds and charges........................................................................39
1.9.1 Uncompleted works...........................................................39 ➤
3
NZS 4404:2010
2 EARTHWORKS AND GEOTECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS.....................45

2.1 Scope ...........................................................................................45
*
2.2 General..........................................................................................45
d
2.2.1 Objective............................................................................45
n
2.2.2 Referenced documents.....................................................46
2.2.3 Local authorities’ requirements..........................................46
ala
2.2.4 Geotechnical requirements................................................46
2.3 Design ........................................................................................... 47
2.3.1 Design factors.................................................................... 47
Ze
2.3.2 Preliminary site evaluation................................................. 47
2.3.3 Landform selection............................................................49
2.3.4 Stability criteria..................................................................50
ew
2.3.5 Special soil types...............................................................50
2.3.6 Compaction standards for fill material............................... 51

2.3.7 Erosion, sediment, and dust control.................................. 51

2.4
2.3.8 sN
Seismic considerations......................................................52
Approval of proposed works..........................................................52
2.5 Construction...................................................................................52
rd
2.6 Final documentation.......................................................................52
2.6.1 Geotechnical completion report........................................52
da
99954
118.92.13.10
2.6.2 As-built drawings for earthworks and subsoil drains.........53
3 ROADS ...........................................................................................56
an
3.1 Scope ...........................................................................................56

3.2 General..........................................................................................56
St
3.2.1 Objective............................................................................56
3.2.2 Related Standards and guidelines.....................................56
3.2.3 Road purpose....................................................................56
ht
3.2.4 Place and link context........................................................ 57

3.2.5 Network connectivity.........................................................60
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
3.2.6 Design and access statement........................................... 61

3.2.7 Road safety audit............................................................... 61
3.3 Design ...........................................................................................62
py
3.3.1 Design requirements.........................................................62

3.3.2 Road geometric design......................................................64
Co
3.3.3 Pavement structural design...............................................78

3.3.4 Safety barrier provisions....................................................80
3.3.5 Target operating speed......................................................80
3.3.6 Parking, passing, and loading........................................... 81
3.3.7 Intersection and alignment design..................................... 81
3.3.8 No-exit roads.....................................................................82
3.3.9 Bus stops...........................................................................82
3.3.10 Special road and footpath provisions near places
of assembly........................................................................82
4
NZS 4404:2010
3.3.11 Footpaths, accessways, cycle paths, and berms..............82

3.3.12 Traffic signs, marking, and road furniture..........................84
3.3.13 Trees and landscaping......................................................84
*
3.3.14 Road lighting......................................................................84
d
3.3.15 Bridges and culverts..........................................................85
3.3.16 Private ways, private roads, and other private accesses..85
n
3.3.17 Crossings...........................................................................89
ala
3.3.18 Fencing..............................................................................89
3.3.19 Road run-off.......................................................................90
3.4 Construction.................................................................................104
Ze
3.4.1 Introduction......................................................................104
3.4.2 Materials for flexible pavements......................................104
3.4.3 Road surfacing................................................................105
ew
3.4.4 Road surfacing materials.................................................106
3.4.5 Subgrade checking..........................................................108

3.4.6 Spreading and compaction of metal course aggregates...108

3.4.7
3.4.8
sN
Sub-base.........................................................................108
Basecourse......................................................................108
3.4.9 Maintenance of basecourse............................................109
rd
3.4.10 Basecourse preparation for surfacing.............................109
3.4.11 Deflection testing prior to surfacing.................................109
3.4.12 Surfacing specification.................................................... 110
da
3.4.13 Bitumen application rate.................................................. 110

99954
118.92.13.10
3.4.14 Footpaths and cycle paths............................................... 110

an
3.4.15 Kerb and channel..............................................................111

3.4.16 Berms and landscaping....................................................111
3.4.17 Surface finish and tolerances on kerbs, paths,
St
and accessways.............................................................. 112

3.4.18 Progress inspections....................................................... 112
3.4.19 Installation of traffic services, road furniture, benchmarks... 112
ht
3.4.20 As-built and completion documentation.......................... 112

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
4 STORMWATER....................................................................................... 113
4.1 Scope ......................................................................................... 113
4.2 General........................................................................................ 113
py
4.2.1 Objectives........................................................................ 113

4.2.2 Legislation and guidance manuals.................................. 113
Co
4.2.3 Local authorities’ requirements........................................ 114

4.2.4 Catchment management planning................................... 114
4.2.5 Effects of land use on receiving waters........................... 115
4.2.6 System components........................................................ 115
4.2.7 Catchments and off-site effects....................................... 115
4.2.8 Water quality.................................................................... 116
4.2.9 Climate change................................................................ 116
5
NZS 4404:2010
4.3 Design ......................................................................................... 116

4.3.1 Design life........................................................................ 116
4.3.2 Structure plan.................................................................. 116
*
4.3.3 Future development..........................................................117
d
4.3.4 System design..................................................................117
n
4.3.5 Design criteria...................................................................117
4.3.6 Stormwater pumping........................................................ 121
ala
4.3.7 Low impact design...........................................................122
4.3.8 Natural and constructed waterways................................126
4.3.9 Pipelines and culverts...................................................... 127
Ze
4.3.10 Manholes.........................................................................129
4.3.11 Connection to the public system..................................... 131
4.3.12 Connection of lateral pipelines to public mains............... 131
ew
4.4 Approval of proposed infrastructure.............................................132
4.4.1 Approval process.............................................................132

4.4.2 Information to be provided...............................................132

4.5
4.5.1
sN
Construction.................................................................................133
Pipeline construction.......................................................133
4.5.2 Trenching.........................................................................133
rd
4.5.3 Reinstatement..................................................................133
4.5.4 Inspection and acceptance.............................................133
da
99954
118.92.13.10
5 WASTEWATER.......................................................................................134
5.1 Scope .........................................................................................134
an
5.2 General........................................................................................134
5.2.1 Objectives........................................................................134
St
5.2.2 Referenced documents and relevant guidelines.............134

5.3 Design .........................................................................................135
5.3.1 Design life........................................................................135
ht
5.3.2 Structure plan..................................................................135

5.3.3 Future development.........................................................135
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
5.3.4 System design.................................................................135

5.3.5 Design criteria..................................................................136
5.3.6 Structural design..............................................................139
py
5.3.7 System layout.................................................................. 141

5.3.8 Maintenance structures...................................................144
5.3.9 Venting.............................................................................150
Co
5.3.10 Connections.....................................................................150
5.3.11 Pumping stations and pressure mains............................ 151
5.3.12 Pressure sewers and vacuum sewers............................. 151
5.3.13 On-site wastewater treatment and disposal.................... 151
6
NZS 4404:2010
5.5 Construction.................................................................................152
5.5.1 Pipeline construction.......................................................152
5.5.2 Trenching.........................................................................152
*
5.5.3 Reinstatement..................................................................152
d
5.5.4 Inspection and acceptance.............................................153
n
5.5.5 Leakage testing of gravity pipelines................................153
5.5.6 Leakage testing of pressurised sewers...........................153
ala
6 WATER SUPPLY.....................................................................................154
6.1 Scope .........................................................................................154
Ze
6.2 General requirements..................................................................154
6.2.1 Objectives........................................................................154
6.2.2 Referenced documents and relevant guidelines.............155
ew
6.3 Design .........................................................................................155
6.3.1 Design life........................................................................155

6.3.2 Structure plan..................................................................155

6.3.3
6.3.4
sN
Future development.........................................................155
System design.................................................................155
6.3.5 Design criteria..................................................................156
rd
6.3.6 Water quality....................................................................159
6.3.7 Flow velocities.................................................................160
da
99954
6.3.8 System layout..................................................................160
118.92.13.10
6.3.9 Clearances.......................................................................163
6.3.10 Pipe selection..................................................................164
an
6.3.11 Fire flow...........................................................................166

6.3.12 Structural design..............................................................166
6.3.13 Reservoirs and pumping stations....................................169
St
6.3.14 Valves..............................................................................169
6.3.15 Hydrants........................................................................... 175
6.3.16 Connections.....................................................................176
ht
6.3.17 Termination points...........................................................176

rig

09
29
80
80
00
16

py
6.5 Construction.................................................................................179
6.5.1 Excavation.......................................................................179
6.5.2 Embedment.....................................................................179
Co
6.5.3 Backfilling and reinstatement..........................................179

6.5.4 Pressure testing of water mains......................................180
6.5.5 Disinfection of water mains..............................................180
6.5.6 Discharge of testing water...............................................180
6.5.7 Water sampling................................................................180
7
NZS 4404:2010
7 LANDSCAPE ......................................................................................... 181

7.1 Scope ......................................................................................... 181
7.2 General........................................................................................ 181
*
7.2.1 Approval........................................................................... 181
d
7.2.2 Environmentally-responsive design................................. 181
n
7.2.3 Reserves and land protection covenants........................ 181
7.2.4 Ecological, functional, and aesthetic opportunities.........182
ala
7.2.5 Landscape and planting opportunities............................182
7.3 Design .........................................................................................183
7.3.1 Location...........................................................................183
Ze
7.3.2 Reserve location and layout............................................183
7.3.3 Existing vegetation and trees..........................................183
7.3.4 New trees and road geometry.........................................184
ew
7.3.5 Planted grass areas, berms, swales, or rain gardens.....184
7.3.6 Species selection.............................................................184

7.3.7 Quality control..................................................................184

7.3.8
7.3.9
sN
Landscaping structures...................................................185
Fencing of reserves.........................................................185
7.3.10 Planting period and irrigation...........................................185
rd
7.4 Construction and maintenance....................................................186
7.4.1 Introduction......................................................................186
da
99954
118.92.13.10
7.4.2 Soil and fertility................................................................186
7.4.3 Weeds and litter control...................................................186
7.4.4 Planting grass areas........................................................186
an
7.4.5 Mulch............................................................................... 187

7.4.6 Specimen tree planting....................................................188
7.4.7 General amenity planting.................................................189
St
7.4.8 Revegetation planting and existing vegetation................189

7.4.9 Swales, rain gardens, wetlands, and riparian
margins planting..............................................................189
ht
7.4.10 Pruning.............................................................................189
7.4.11 Maintenance....................................................................190
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
8 NETWORK UTILITY SERVICES............................................................ 191

py
8.1 Scope ......................................................................................... 191

8.2 General........................................................................................ 191
8.2.1 Legislation........................................................................ 191
Co
8.2.2 Definitions........................................................................ 191

8.2.3 Context............................................................................ 191
8.3 Design .........................................................................................192
8.3.1 Plans................................................................................192
8.3.2 Utilities above ground......................................................193
8.4 Construction.................................................................................193
8.4.1 Underground cabling.......................................................193
8.4.2 Materials..........................................................................193
8
NZS 4404:2010
8.4.3 Conversion to underground on existing roads.................193

8.4.4 Commercial and industrial subdivisions..........................193
8.4.5 Location of services.........................................................193
*
8.4.6 Trenches..........................................................................194
d
Appendices
n
A Acceptable pipe and fitting materials (Informative)......................195
ala
B Standard construction drawings (Informative).............................203
C Field testing of pipelines (Normative)...........................................223
D Water supply disinfection specification (Normative).................... 237
Ze
E Typical plan and cross section figures from table 3.2
(Informative).................................................................................240
ew
Tables
3.1 Land use and area type matrix describing typical place ..................
and transport context.....................................................................58
3.2
3.3
sN
Road design standards..................................................................66
Recommended surfacing standards............................................106
3.4 Benkelman beam standards........................................................106
4.1 Recommended AEP for design storms........................................ 118
rd
4.2 Guide to roughness coefficients for gravity stormwater pipes . ........
concentrically jointed and clean...................................................120
da
99954
118.92.13.10
4.3 Loss coefficients for bends.......................................................... 121
4.4 Spacing of bulkheads for pipes on steep grades.........................129
5.1 Commercial and industrial flows.................................................. 137
an
5.2 Guide to roughness coefficients for gravity sewer lines.............. 137

5.3 Minimum pipe sizes for wastewater reticulation and property
St
connections.................................................................................. 137
5.4 Minimum grades for wastewater pipes........................................138
5.5 Minimum grades for property connections and
ht
permanent ends...........................................................................138
5.6 Clearances between wastewater pipes and other
rig
underground services..................................................................143
09
29
80
80
00
16
5.7 Acceptable MH, MS, and TMS options for wastewater

reticulation....................................................................................145
py
5.8 Maximum allowable deflections through MHs............................. 147

5.9 Minimum internal fall through MH joining pipes of
same diameter............................................................................. 147
Co
6.1 Hydraulic roughness values......................................................... 157

6.2 Empirical guide for principal main sizing.....................................158
6.3 Empirical guide for sizing rider mains..........................................158
6.4 Clearances between water mains and underground services.....163
6.5 Minimum clearance from structures.............................................164
6.6 Valve spacing criteria...................................................................170
6.7 Minimum scour size..................................................................... 174
9
NZS 4404:2010
Figures
3.1 Parameter relationship...................................................................79
3.2 Influence of road geometry on speed............................................ 81
*
3.3 Dimensions of no-exit road turning areas...................................... 87
d
3.4 Turning areas for no-exit roads......................................................88
3.5 Subsoil drains................................................................................. 91
n
3.6(A) Typical swale detail (1)...................................................................92
ala
3.6(B) Typical swale detail (2)...................................................................93
3.6(C) Typical check dam detail................................................................94
3.7 Kerbs and dished channels............................................................96
Ze
3.8 Typical sump to driveway or right of way....................................... 97
3.9 Flat channel or yard sump.............................................................98
3.10 Hillside sump..................................................................................99
ew
3.11 Add-on to back-entry sump for hillside situations........................100
3.12 An alternative sump for hillside situations.................................... 101

3.13 Special entry to double sump in hillside channel.........................102
3.14
5.1
sN
Double back-entry sump for road low points...............................103
Multiple MSs between MH and ‘last’ MH/TMS............................146
5.2 Multiple MSs between consecutive MHs.....................................146
6.1 Branch valve adjacent to main..................................................... 171
rd
6.2 Valve and hydrant combinations for pressure zone
dividing valves.............................................................................. 172
da
99954
118.92.13.10
6.3 Secure connection....................................................................... 172

6.4 Elimination of termination points.................................................. 177
6.5 Looped and link principal mains.................................................. 177
an
Schedules
St
1A Design certificate – Land development/subdivision......................40

1B Contractor’s certificate upon completion of land development/
subdivision..................................................................................... 41
ht
1C Certification upon completion of land development/subdivision....42

1D As-built plans.................................................................................43
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
2A Statement of professional opinion on suitability of land

for building construction.................................................................54
py
Co
10
NZS 4404:2010
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
Reference is made in this document to the following:
*
NEW ZEALAND STANDARDS
d
NZS 1170:- - - - Structural design actions
n
Part 5:2004 Earthquake actions – New Zealand
ala
Part 5 Supp 1:2004 Earthquake actions – New Zealand – Commentary
NZS 3109:1997 Concrete construction
NZS 3114:1987 Specification for concrete surface finishes
Ze
NZS 3116:2002 Concrete segmental and flagstone paving
NZS 3604:XXXX Timber-framed buildings (in preparation)
ew
NZS 4402:- - - - Methods of testing soils for civil engineering purposes
Part 6:1986 Soil strength tests

NZS 4405:1986 Helical lock-seam corrugated steel pipes
sN
NZS 4406:1986 Helical lock-seam corrugated steel pipes – Design and installation
NZS 4431:1989 Code of practice for earth fill for residential development
NZS 4442:1988 Welded steel pipes and fittings for water, sewage and medium
rd
pressure gas
NZS 5828:2004 Playground equipment and surfacing
da
NZS/AS 1657:1992 Fixed platforms, walkways, stairways and ladders. Design,

99954
118.92.13.10
construction and installation

an
NZS/BS 750:1984 Specification for underground fire hydrants and surface box
frames and covers
SNZ HB 5828.1:2006 General playground equipment and surfacing handbook
St
SNZ PAS 4509:2008 New Zealand Fire Service firefighting water supplies code of
practice
ht
JOINT AUSTRALIAN/NEW ZEALAND STANDARDS

rig
3
09
AS/NZS 1158:- - - - Road lighting

29
80
80
00
16
Part 0:2005 Introduction

Part 1.1:2005 Vehicular traffic (category V) lighting – Performance and design
py
requirements
Part 1.3:1997 Vehicular traffic (category V) lighting – Guide to design, installation,
Co
operation and maintenance

Part 3.1:2005 Pedestrian area (category P) lighting – Performance and design
requirements
AS/NZS 1254:2010 PVC-U pipes and fittings for stormwater and surface water
applications
AS/NZS 1260:2009 PVC-U pipes and fittings for drain, waste and vent application
AS/NZS 1477:2006 PVC pipes and fittings for pressure applications ➤
11
NZS 4404:2010
AS/NZS 1546:- - - - On-site domestic wastewater treatment units

Part 1:2008 Septic tanks
AS/NZS 1547:XXXX On-site domestic wastewater management (in preparation)
*
AS/NZS 2032:2006 Installation of PVC pipe systems
d
AS/NZS 2033:2008 Installation of polyethylene pipe systems
n
AS/NZS 2041:1998 Buried corrugated metal structures
ala
AS/NZS 2280:2004 Ductile iron pipes and fittings
AS/NZS 2566:- - - - Buried flexible pipelines
Part 1:1998 Structural design
Ze
Part 1 Supp 1:1998 Structural design – Commentary
Part 2:2002 Installation
AS/NZS 3500:- - - - Plumbing and drainage
ew
Part 1:2003 Water services
AS/NZS 3518:2004 Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) compounds, pipes and

fittings for pressure applications
AS/NZS 3690:2009
AS/NZS 3725:2007
sN
Installation of ABS pipe systems
Design for installation of buried concrete pipes
AS/NZS 3845:1999 Road safety barrier systems
rd
AS/NZS 3879:2006 Solvent cements and priming fluids for PVC (PVC-U and PVC-M)
and ABS pipes and fittings
da
AS/NZS 4020:2005 Testing of products for use in contact with drinking water
99954
118.92.13.10
AS/NZS 4058:2007 Precast concrete pipes (pressure and non-pressure)

an
AS/NZS 4129:2008 Fittings for polyethylene (PE) pipes for pressure applications
AS/NZS 4130:2009 Polyethylene (PE) pipes for pressure applications
St
AS/NZS 4131:2010 Polyethylene (PE) compounds for pressure pipes and fittings
AS/NZS 4158:2003 Thermal-bonded polymeric coatings on valves and fittings for
water industry purposes
ht
AS/NZS 4441:2008 Oriented PVC (PVC-O) pipes for pressure applications

rig
AS/NZS 4765:2007 Modified PVC (PVC-M) pipes for pressure applications

3
09
29
80
80
00
16
AS/NZS 4793:2009 Mechanical tapping bands for waterworks purposes

AS/NZS 4998:2009 Bolted unrestrained mechanical couplings for waterworks
py
purposes
AS/NZS 5065:2005 Polyethylene and polypropylene pipes and fittings for drainage
Co
and sewerage applications
12
NZS 4404:2010
AUSTRALIAN STANDARDS
AS 1579:2001 Arc-welded steel pipes and fittings for water and waste-water
*
AS 1741:1991 Vitrified clay pipes and fittings with flexible joints – Sewer quality
AS 1906:- - - - Retroreflective materials and devices for road traffic control
d
purposes
n
Part 3:1992 Raised pavement markers (retroreflective and non-retroreflective)
ala
AS 2200:2006 Design charts for water supply and sewerage
AS 2638:- - - - Gate valves for waterworks purposes
Part 2:2006 Resilient seated
Ze
AS 2700:1996 Colour Standards for general purposes
AS 2870:1996 Residential slabs and footings – Construction
AS 2890:- - - - Parking facilities
ew
Part 5:1993 On-street parking
AS 3571:- - - - Plastics piping systems – Glass-reinforced thermoplastics (GRP)
sN
systems based on unsaturated polyester (UP) resin
Part 1:2009 Pressure and non-pressure drainage and sewerage
Part 2:2009 Pressure and non-pressure water supply
rd
AS 3681:2008 Application of polyethylene sleeving for ductile iron piping
AS 3996:2006 Access covers and grates
da
99954
118.92.13.10
BRITISH STANDARDS
BS EN 295:- - - - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and sewers
an
Part 1:1991 Requirements

Part 2:1991 Quality control and sampling
St
Part 3:1991 Test methods

Part 4:1995 Requirements for special fittings, adaptors and compatible
ht
accessories
Part 6:1996 Requirements for vitrified clay manholes
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Part 7:1996 Requirements for vitrified clay pipes and joints for pipe jacking
Part 10:2005 Performance requirements
py
BS EN 805:2000 Water supply – Requirements for systems and components outside

buildings
Co
13
NZS 4404:2010
OTHER PUBLICATIONS
GENERAL
*
Ministry for the Environment. New Zealand urban design protocol. Wellington: Ministry
for the Environment, 2005.
d
n
EARTHWORKS AND GEOTECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
ala
BRANZ. BRANZ Study Report 004, Assessment of slope stability at building sites. BRANZ
and Worley Consultants Ltd, 1987.
Cook, D, Pickens, G A, and MacDonald, G. ‘The role of peer review’, Report by Crawford
Ze
S A. NZ Geomechanics News (Dec 1995).
Crawford, S A, and Millar, P J. ‘The design of permanent slopes for residential building
development’, EQC Research Project 95/183, NZ Geomechanics News (June 1998).
ew
New Zealand Geotechnical Society Inc. Field description of soil and rock. New Zealand
Geotechnical Society Inc, 2005.

New Zealand Geotechnical Society Inc. ‘Geotechnical issues in land development’.
sN
Proceedings of New Zealand Geotechnical Society Symposium, Hamilton, 1996.
ROADS
rd
Auckland Regional Transport Authority (ARTA). Bus stop infrastructure design guidelines.
Auckland: ARTA, 2009.
da
Austroads codes and guides, 2009. (Subject to the relevant New Zealand supplement).
99954
118.92.13.10
Austroads. Guide to road design – Part 3: Geometric design. Austroads, 2009.

an
Austroads. Guide to traffic management – Part 8: Local area traffic management. Austroads,
2008.
St
Cement and Concrete Association of Australia. Guide to residential streets and paths.
Cement and Concrete Association of Australia, 2004.
New Zealand Transport Agency.

ht
Bridge manual. (SP/M/022) 2nd ed. Wellington: NZTA, 2003.
Cycle network and route planning guide. Wellington: Land Transport Safety Authority,
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
2004. Available at: http://www.nzta.govt.nz/resources/cycle-network-and-route-

planning/cycle-network.html
py
Pedestrian planning and design guide. Wellington: NZTA, 2009. Available at: http://www.
nzta.govt.nz/resources/pedestrian-planning-guide/docs/pedestrian-planning-guide.pdf
Road safety audit procedures for projects (Manual number TFM9). Wellington:
Co
Transfund New Zealand, 200
RTS 11: Urban roadside barriers and alternative treatments. Wellington: Land Transport
Safety Authority, 1995. Available at: http://www.nzta.govt.nz/resources/road-traffic-
standards/docs/rts-11.pdf
RTS 18: New Zealand on-road tracking curves for heavy vehicles. Wellington: Land
Transport New Zealand, 2007. Available at: http://www.nzta.govt.nz/resources/road-
traffic-standards/rts-18.html
Stormwater treatment standard for state highway infrastructure. Wellington: NZTA, 2010.
14
NZS 4404:2010
NZTA specifications (available at: http://www.nzta.govt.nz/resources/index.html)

B/2:2005 Construction of unbound granular pavement layers
*
F/2:2000 Pipe subsoil drain construction
F/2 notes:2000 Notes on pipe subsoil drain construction specification
d
M/1:2007 Roading bitumens
n
M/4:2006 Crushed basecourse aggregate
M/10:2005 Asphaltic concrete
ala
P/3:1995 First coat sealing
P/4:1995 Resealing
P/9:1975 Construction of asphaltic concrete paving
Ze
T/10:2002 Skid resistance deficiency investigation and treatment selection
United Kingdom Department for Transport. Manual for streets. London: Thomas Telford
Publishing, 2007.
ew
United Kingdom Transport Research Laboratory. TRL661 – The manual for streets:
evidence and research. TRL, 2007.
STORMWATER, WASTEWATER, AND WATER SUPPLY

sN
Auckland Regional Council
rd
Technical Publication No. 124 (TP124) Low impact design manual for the Auckland
region, 2000.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
Technical Report 2008-20 Application of low impact design to brownfield sites (in
preparation)
an
Technical Report 2009-83 Integration of low impact design, urban design and urban
form principles (in preparation)
Australasian Society for Trenchless Technology (ASTT). Guidelines for horizontal directional
St
drilling, pipe bursting, microtunnelling and pipe jacking. Greenwood, Western Australia:
ASTT, 2009.
Austroads. Guide to road design – Part 5: Drainage design. Austroads, 2008.

ht
Hicks, D M, and Mason, P D. Roughness characteristics of New Zealand rivers, Wellington:

Water Resources Survey, DSIR Marine and Freshwater, 1991.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Janson, Lars-Eric. Plastics pipes for water supply and sewage disposal. 2003.
Lamont, P. ‘Metrication: Hydraulic data and formulae.’ Water Services Volume 81, numbers
py
972/3/4 (Reprinted by Kent Meters Ltd, UK)

Ministry for the Environment.
Co
Coastal hazards and climate change – A guidance manual for local government in
New Zealand. Wellington: Ministry for the Environment, 2008.
Preparing for climate change – A guide for local government in New Zealand. Wellington:
Ministry for the Environment, 2008.
Preparing for coastal change – A guide for local government in New Zealand. Wellington:
Preparing for future flooding – A guide for local government in New Zealand. Wellington:
15
NZS 4404:2010
Tools for estimating the effects of climate change on flood flow – A guidance manual
for local government in New Zealand. Wellington: Ministry for the Environment, 2010.
Ministry of Health. Drinking-water standards for New Zealand 2005 (Revised 2008).
*
Wellington: Ministry of Health, 2008.
d
Najafi, M. Trenchless technology – Pipeline and utility design, construction, and renewal.
n
McGraw-Hill, 2005.
ala
New Zealand Transport Agency. Bridge manual. (SP/M/022) 2nd ed. Wellington: NZTA, 2003.
New Zealand Water and Wastes Association (Water New Zealand). New Zealand pipe
inspection manual. Wellington: New Zealand Water and Wastes Association, 2006.
Ze
Stein, D. Trenchless technology for installation of cables and pipelines. Germany: Stein
& Partner, 2005.
Uni-Bell. Handbook of PVC pipe. 4th ed. Dallas: Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association, 2001.
ew
Water Services Association of Australia (WSAA):
WSA 02-2002 Sewerage Code of Australia – 1999 and 2002

WSA 03-2002 Water Supply Code of Australia – 1999 and 2002
WSA 04-2005
WSA 06-2008
sN
Sewage Pumping Station Code of Australia – 2005
Vacuum Sewerage Code of Australia – 2008
WSA 07-2007 Pressure Sewerage Code of Australia – 2007
rd
NETWORK UTILITY SERVICES

da
99954
118.92.13.10
Department of Labour. Guide for safety with underground services. Wellington: Department
of Labour, 2002.
New Zealand Utilities Advisory Group (NZUAG). National code of practice for utilities’
an
access to the transport corridors. Wellington: NZUAG, 2008.
Note – The NZUAG code of practice is an interim measure until a national code of practice is approved
St
under the Utilities Access Act 2010.
NEW ZEALAND LEGISLATION

ht
The provisions of this Standard shall be read subject to the provisions of regional and
district plans and to any applicable statutes, regulations, bylaws, and any subsequent
amendments, including (but not limited to):
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Building Act 2004, Building Regulations, and New Zealand Building Code (NZBC) 1992
Civil Defence Emergency Management Act 2002
py
Conservation Act 1987

Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992
Co
Health (Drinking Water) Amendment Act 2007

Historic Places Act 1993
Infrastructure (Amendments Relating to Utilities Access) Act 2010
Land Transfer Act 1952
Land Transport Rule (Traffic Control Devices) 2004
Local Government Act 1974 and Local Government Act 2002
Reserves Act 1977
Resource Management Act 1991
Utilities Access Act 2010
16
NZS 4404:2010
RELATED DOCUMENTS
When interpreting this Standard it may be helpful to refer to other documents, including
*
but not limited to:
d
GENERAL
n
Land Information New Zealand. New Zealand geodetic datum 2000 (NZGD2000)
ala
Ministry for the Environment. Climate change effects and impacts assessment – A guidance
manual for local government. 2nd ed. Wellington: Ministry for the Environment, 2008.
Ze
EARTHWORKS AND GEOTECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
Auckland Regional Council. Technical Publication No. 90 (TP90) Erosion and sediment
control: guidelines for land disturbing activities in the Auckland Region. Auckland: Auckland
ew
Regional Council, 1999.
Fraser Thomas Ltd (B J Brown, P R Goldsmith, J P M Shorten, L Henderson) BRANZ

Study Report 120, Soil expansivity in the Auckland region. Judgeford: BRANZ, 2003.
sN
Ministry for the Environment. Planning for development of land on or close to active
faults – A guideline to assist resource management planners in New Zealand. Wellington:
rd
Sanders, W, and Glassey, P. (Compilers). Guidelines for assessing planning policy and
consent requirements for landslide prone land, GNS Science Miscellaneous Series 7.
Lower Hutt: Institute of Geological and Nuclear Sciences Limited, 2007.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
ROADS
an
Concrete Masonry Association of Australia. Concrete segmental pavements – Design

guide for residential accessways and roads. Sydney: Concrete Masonry Association of
St
Australia, 1997.
Jones, P, Boujenko, N, and Marshall, S. Link and place – A guide to street planning and
design. London: Landor Books, 2007.
ht
Ministry of Justice. National guidelines for crime prevention through environmental design
in New Zealand Part 1: Seven qualities of safer places, and Part 2: Implementation guide.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Wellington: Ministry of Justice, 2005.
Ministry of Transport Government policy statement on land transport funding 2009/10 –

2018/19. Wellington: Ministry of Transport, May 2009.
py
Ministry of Transport. Safer journeys – New Zealand’s road safety strategy 2010 – 2020.
Wellington: Ministry of Transport, 2010.
Co
Ministry of Transport. The New Zealand transport strategy 2008. Wellington: Ministry of
Transport, 2008.
New Zealand Transport Agency
Traffic note 48 – Light vehicle sizes and dimensions: Street survey results and parking
space requirements – Information. Land Transport New Zealand, December 2004.
Available at: http://www.nzta.govt.nz/resources/traffic-notes/docs/traffic-note-48.pdf
Manual of traffic signs and markings (MOTSAM) Parts 1 – 4
NZTA register of network standards and guidelines. Wellington: NZTA, 2009. Available
at: http://www.nzta.govt.nz/resources/nzta-register-network-standards-guidelines/ ➤
17
NZS 4404:2010
SNZ HB 44:2001 Subdivision for people and the environment. Wellington: Standards
New Zealand, 2001.
*
STORMWATER, WASTEWATER, AND WATER SUPPLY
d
Auckland City Council. On-site stormwater management manual. Auckland: Auckland
n
City Council, 2002.
Auckland City Council. Soakage design manual. Auckland: Auckland City Council, 2003.
ala
Auckland Regional Council. Technical Publication No. 10 (TP10) Design guideline manual
stormwater treatment devices, 2003.
Auckland Regional Council. Technical Publication No. 108 (TP108) Guidelines for
Ze
stormwater runoff modelling in the Auckland region, 1999.
Christchurch City Council. Waterways, wetlands and drainage guide – Part A: Visions
and Part B: Design. 2003. Available at: http://www.ccc.govt.nz/cityleisure/parkswalkways/
ew
environmentecology/waterwayswetlandsdrainageguide/index.aspx
Environment Protection Authority (EPA) Victoria. Maintaining water sensitive urban design
elements. Melbourne: EPA Victoria, 2008.
sN
Greater Wellington Regional Council. Fish friendly culverts. June 2003. Available at: http://
www.gw.govt.nz/bridges-and-culverts/
New Zealand Water Environment Research Foundation (NZWERF) On-site stormwater
rd
management guideline. Wellington: NZWERF, 2004.
North Shore City Council. Bioretention guidelines. Takapuna: North Shore City Council,
da
99954
2008.
118.92.13.10
Puddephatt, J, and Heslop, V. Guidance on an integrated process – Designing, operating

and maintaining low impact urban design and development devices. Landcare Research,
an
July 2008.
Sustainable urban drainage systems (SUDS) design manuals for countries in the United
Kingdom
St
Water sensitive urban design (WSUD) manuals from various Australian states and cities
ht
WEBSITES
Auckland Regional Council http://www.arc.govt.nz
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Austroads http://www.austroads.com.au
Ministry for the Environment http://www.mfe.govt.nz
National Pest Plant Accord http://www.biosecurity.govt.nz/nppa
py
New Zealand Historic Places Trust http://www.historic.org.nz

New Zealand Legislation http://www.legislation.govt.nz
Co
New Zealand Transport Agency http://www.nzta.govt.nz/

Plastics Industry Pipe Association
of Australia: http://www.pipa.com.au
Trips Database Bureau http://www.tdbonline.org/home
Water Services Association of Australia https://www.wsaa.asn.au/
18
NZS 4404:2010
LATEST REVISIONS
The users of this Standard should ensure that their copies of the above-mentioned New
*
Zealand Standards are the latest revisions. Amendments to referenced New Zealand and
Joint Australian/New Zealand Standards can be found on http://www.standards.co.nz.
d
n
REVIEW OF STANDARDS
ala
Suggestions for improvement of this Standard will be welcomed. They should be sent to
the Chief Executive, Standards New Zealand, Private Bag 2439, Wellington 6140.
Ze
ew
sN
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
19
NZS 4404:2010
FOREWORD
A significant proportion of all new infrastructure is created by land development and
*
subdivision projects. As a community, we need to get this right. This is why NZS 4404:2010
aims to encourage good urban design and remove road blocks to liveability and economic
d
development in communities.
n
Some of the key changes from NZS 4404:2004 are:
ala
(a) That road design needs to allow ‘context’ or ‘place’ to be given significant emphasis,
and to require roads to achieve safe (slower) operating speeds;
(b) An emphasis on managing and treating stormwater ‘before it gets into a pipe’, together
Ze
with a requirement to consider climate change and potential sea level rise;
(c) Grassed swales, natural or artificial waterways, ponds and wetlands, for example,
may in certain circumstances be not only part of the stormwater system, but also be a
ew
preferred solution, especially if low impact on receiving waters downstream is critical;
(d) The sections on landscaping and reserves have been combined and significantly
rewritten; and
(e) sN
The section on utility services (section 8) has also been significantly amended in
accordance with the latest network authorities’ codes.
The change in the title from ‘engineering’ to ‘infrastructure’ signals that good subdivision
rd
design involves a multidisciplinary collaborative approach. NZS 4404 was first published in
1981 as the Code of practice for urban land subdivision. In 2004 it became the Standard for
da
99954
118.92.13.10 Land development and subdivision engineering. In response to submissions on the draft
2010 version, and to clarify the place and role of NZS 4404, the committee has decided that
the new name, Land development and subdivision infrastructure, best reflects its function.
an
NZS 4404:2010 is applicable to greenfield, infill, and brownfield redevelopment projects. It

provides local authorities (LAs) and developers a Standard for the design and construction
St
of subdivision infrastructure. It can be used on its own or, together with local codes, as a
means to comply with Resource Management Act (RMA) consent conditions. It is not an
urban design policy, guide, or method of masterplanning.
ht
The impetus for the review of NZS 4404:2004 came from requests for changes from:
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(f) The New Zealand Transport Agency (NZTA);

(g) Local Government New Zealand (LGNZ);
(h) The Ministry for the Environment (MfE);
py
(i) Pipe manufacturers;

(j) Territorial authorities (TAs), and;
Co
(k) A number of individual users of the Standard.
The revision was sponsored by LGNZ, NZTA, and MfE.
Innovative subdivision has been discouraged to some extent under the 2004 version of NZS
4404. The objectives of the 2004 version were to permit alternative solutions. However, in
practice, well designed solutions that were not in accordance with the acceptable solutions
specified by the Standard often had difficulty gaining RMA consents. This led to delays
and additional costs or a less desirable design being adopted.
20
NZS 4404:2010
The review committee therefore challenged itself to produce a new Standard that:
(l) Encourages sustainable and modern design;
*
(m) Provides some certainty for designers and LAs; and
d
(n) Prevents the outcomes that can arise when the sole focus is cost minimisation, and
adherence to minimum standards.
n
The committee recognises that there are tensions between these sometimes conflicting
ala
objectives and has balanced those tensions when deciding between allowing flexibility
and prescribing clear rules.
Ze
The committee would like to thank the many people who between them made more than
1,900 comments and suggestions for improvements. The submissions were overwhelmingly
in support of the new direction of the Standard. Every single comment and suggestion was
reviewed by committee members and many have found their way into the final document.
ew
It is a significantly better Standard because of those submissions. The committee would
also like to thank all those organisations that have allowed their documents to be used
in the Standard or as reference documents. The committee has tried not to ‘reinvent the
sN
wheel’ where existing documents provide the appropriate standards. This is why many
other publications including Standards are referenced by this Standard.
Finally, we all need to applaud and be grateful for the countless hours and effort committee
rd
members contributed to this review. The only payment is the satisfaction of a well-written
Standard that enjoys good community support. It is a Standard that helps develop people-
da
99954
oriented communities with land development and subdivision infrastructure that has a long
life, and the minimum environmental impact compatible with good urban design.
118.92.13.10
an
OUTCOME STATEMENT
St
This Standard provides local authorities, developers, and their professional advisors with
standards for design and construction of land development and subdivision infrastructure.
NZS 4404:2010 encourages sustainable development and modern design that emphasises
ht
liveability and environmental quality. It will also provide as much consistency as possible
on land development and subdivision infrastructure while still allowing flexibility for local
variations to suit local circumstances.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
21
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
NOTES
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
NZS 4404:2010

Land Development and Subdivision
*
Infrastructure
d
n
ala
1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES
Ze
1.1 Scope
ew
This Standard is recommended for adoption by local authorities (LAs). It is applicable
to greenfield and infill development, as well as brownfield redevelopment projects.
The Standard also serves as a basis for technical compliance for the subdivision and
development of land where these activities are subject to the Resource Management Act.
sN
LAs may develop their own standards for land development or tailor outcomes sought to
the particular needs of their local environments through their design guides, district plans,
and codes of practice or development engineering manuals. However, it is recommended
rd
that NZS 4404 be adopted as the basis for these standards.
Section 1 of this Standard concerns matters of general application and general requirements
da
99954
118.92.13.10
to be observed. Sections 2 to 8 of this Standard provide good practice guidelines on
particular types of infrastructure to be provided.
an
C1.1
This Standard does not include a statement of all minimum requirements for land
St
development and subdivision infrastructure. It is not an urban design guide. LAs may
specify their own minimum requirements, citing this Standard or their own bylaws or
district plan as appropriate.
ht
This Standard does not deal with the processes of compliance with the requirements
of a district plan for subdivision or development activities or obtaining a resource
consent for such activities. For these purposes reference can be made to the Ministry
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
for the Environment website, http://www.mfe.govt.nz, and the plans and policies of
the relevant LA.
py
1.2 Interpretation
Co
1.2.1 General
1.2.1.1
The full titles of referenced documents cited in this Standard are given in the list of
referenced documents.
1.2.1.2
The word ‘shall’ refers to practices which are mandatory for compliance with the Standard.
The words ‘should’ or ‘may’ indicate a recommended practice.
23
NZS 4404:2010
1.2.1.3
Clauses prefixed by ‘C’ and printed in italic type are intended as comments on the
corresponding mandatory clauses. They are not to be taken as the only or complete
*
interpretation of the corresponding clause. The Standard can be complied with if the
d
comment is ignored.
n
1.2.1.4
ala
The terms ‘informative’ and ‘normative’ have been used in this Standard to define the
application of the appendix to which they apply. A ‘normative’ appendix is an integral part
of a Standard, whereas an ‘informative’ appendix is only for information and guidance.
Ze
Informative provisions do not form part of the mandatory requirements of this Standard.
1.2.1.5
ew
Schedules containing information to be provided in certificates or as-built plans are included
at the end of sections to which they relate. Each schedule is copyright waived, meaning
it may be photocopied for use in accordance with the Standard.
1.2.2 Definitions sN
For the purpose of this Standard, the following definitions shall apply:
rd
Annual exceedance The probability of exceedance of a given occurrence,
probability (AEP) generally a storm, in a period of 1 year (1% AEP is equivalent
to a 1 in 100-year storm)
da
99954
118.92.13.10
Carriageway That part of a road consisting of the movement lane, sealed

shoulder, and includes parking and loading areas when
an
provided within the road
Corridor manager Has the same meaning given to it by the proposed utilities
St
access legislation
NOTE – In preparing NZS 4404:2010, the Committee made

every effort to align it with the infrastructure legislation and the
ht
utilities access legislation still before Parliament at the time this

Standard is published. Readers will need to satisfy themselves
rig
3
09
29
80
on the final form of the definitions of code (see section 8) and

80
00
16
corridor manager once this utilities access legislation comes

into effect.

py
Crime prevention Has a set of four principles: surveillance, access management,

through environmental territorial reinforcement, and quality environments of the built
Co
design environment. These CPTED principles lead to a reduction in

the incidence and fear of crime as well as an improvement
in the quality of life
Developer An individual or organisation having the financial responsibility

for the development project. Developer includes the
owner
24
NZS 4404:2010
Developer’s
The person, appointed by the developer, who shall be
professional advisor
responsible for:
(a) The investigation, design and obtaining of approvals for
*
construction;
d
(b) Contract administration and supervision of construction;
(c) Certification upon completion of construction
n
Drinking water As defined in the Health (Drinking Water) Amendment Act
ala
Dwelling unit Any building or group of buildings, or part thereof used, or
intended to be used principally for residential purposes and
Ze
occupied, or intended to be occupied by not more than one
household
Earthworks Any alteration to the contours, including the excavation and
ew
backfilling or recompaction of existing natural ground and the
stripping of vegetation and topsoil
Footpath So much of any road or other area as is laid out or constructed

sN
by authority of the TA primarily for pedestrians; and may
include the edging, kerbing, and channelling of the road
Freeboard A provision for flood level design estimate imprecision,

rd
construction tolerances, and natural phenomena (such as
waves, debris, aggradations, channel transition, and bend
da
99954
118.92.13.10
effects) not explicitly included in the calculations
Geo-professional A chartered professional engineer (CPEng) or an engineering

an
geologist with recognised qualifications and experience in

geotechnical engineering, and experience related to land
development
St
Ground Describes the material in the vicinity of the surface of the earth
whether soil or rock
ht
Independent qualified A specialist approved by the TA and having the appropriate

person (IQP) skills and qualification to carry out specific procedures
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Local authority As defined in the Local Government Act 2002, and includes
territorial authorities and regional councils
py
Low impact design An approach to land development and stormwater

management that recognises the value of natural systems in
order to mitigate environmental impacts and enhance local
Co
amenity and ecological values
Movement lane That part of the formed and sealed road that serves the link
function in a road. It may have a shared use for other activities
such as walking, cycling, parking, and play
Network utility operator Has the same meaning given to it by section (s.) 166 of the
Resource Management Act
25
NZS 4404:2010
Owner In relation to any land or interest in land, includes an owner

of the land, whether beneficially or as trustee, and their agent
or attorney, and a mortgagee acting in exercise of power of
*
sale; and also includes the Crown, the Public Trustee, and
d
any person, TA, board, or other body or authority however
designated, constituted, or appointed, having power to dispose
n
of the land or interest in land by way of sale
ala
Potable water As defined in the Health (Drinking Water) Amendment Act
Primary flow The estimated surface water run-off specified to be managed
Ze
by the primary stormwater system. This flow may be piped
or contained within relatively narrow confines under public
control by reserve or easement
ew
Private road Any roadway, place, or arcade laid out within a district on
private land by the owner of that land intended for the use of
the public generally and has the same meaning given to it by
sN
s. 315 of the Local Government Act 1974
Private way Any way or passage over private land within a district, the right
to use which is confined or intended to be confined to certain
rd
persons or classes of persons, and which is not thrown open or
intended to be open to the use of the public generally and includes
da
99954
118.92.13.10
any shared access or right of way and has the same meaning
given to it by s. 315 of the Local Government Act 1974
an
Receiving water The water body that receives the discharge from the stormwater
conveyance system and is usually a watercourse, stream, river,
pond, lake, or the sea
St
Road Has the same meaning given to it by s. 315 of the Local

Government Act 1974
ht
Secondary flow The estimated surface water run-off in excess of the primary
flow. In most cases this flow will be managed in an overland
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
flowpath or ponding area that is protected by public ownership

or easement
py
Stormwater Rainwater that does not naturally percolate into the ground or
evaporate, but flows via overland flow, interflow, channels, or
pipes into a defined surface water channel, open watercourse,
Co
or a constructed infiltration facility
Street Has the same meaning as ‘road’ as defined by s. 315 of the

Local Government Act 1974
Surface water run-off All naturally occurring water, other than subsurface water,
which results from rainfall on the site or water flowing onto the
site, including that flowing from a drain, stream, or river
26
NZS 4404:2010
Survey plan A survey plan under s. 2 of the Resource Management Act
Swale A constructed watercourse shaped or graded in earth
*
materials and stabilised with site-suitable vegetation or rocks,
for the safe conveyance and water-quality improvement of
d
stormwater run-off
n
Target operating speed The desired maximum speed for motor vehicles identified
ala
by the designer to suit the land use context and road
classification. This speed can be managed by physical and
psychological devices such as narrowed movement lanes,
Ze
reduced forward visibility, parking, slow points, build outs, leg
lengths, chicanes, planting, landscaping, street furniture, and
art works
ew
Territorial authority A territorial authority (TA) defined in the Local Government
Act 2002
Wāhi tapu
sN
Means a place sacred to Māori in the traditional, spiritual,
religious, ritual, or mythological sense
Wastewater Water that has been used and contains unwanted dissolved
rd
or suspended substances from communities, including homes,
businesses, and industries
da
99954
118.92.13.10
1.2.3 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in this Standard:
an
ABS acrylonitrile butadiene styrene

AEP annual exceedence probability
St
AV air valve
°C degrees Celsius
ht
CBD central business district

CBR California bearing ratio
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
CCTV closed circuit television

CLS (SCL) concrete lined steel (steel concrete lined)
py
CPTED Crime prevention through environmental design

DI ductile iron
Co
DN nominal diameter under the pipe manufacturing standard

du dwelling unit
ESA equivalent standard axle
FAC free available chlorine
FAR floor-to-area ratio
FL flange
FSL finished surface level
➤
27
NZS 4404:2010
GL ground level
g/m3 grams per cubic metre
*
GRP glass reinforced plastic
H head (in metres)
d
h hour
n
ha hectare
ala
HDD horizontal directional drilling
IQP independent qualified person
Ze
km kilometre
km/h kilometres per hour
kPa kilopascal
ew
L litre(s)
LA local authority
LID low impact design
m metre
sN
MDD maximum dry density
rd
MH manhole or maintenance hole
min minute(s)
da
99954
118.92.13.10 MPa megapascal
MS maintenance shaft
an
m/s metres per second

m3/s cubic metres per second
mm millimetres
St
NAASRA National Association of Australian State Road Authorities

NES National Environmental Standard
ht
NIWA National Institute of Water and Atmospheric Research

NPS National Policy Statement
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
NZBC New Zealand Building Code

NZHPT New Zealand Historic Places Trust
py
NZTA New Zealand Transport Agency

OSH Occupational Safety and Health
Co
p person
PE polyethylene
PE 80B polyethylene with minimum required strength (MRS) of 8 MPa
as defined in AS/NZS 4130 and AS/NZS 4131
PE 100 polyethylene with MRS of 10 MPa as defined in AS/NZS 4130 and
AS/NZS 4131
PF peaking factor
28
NZS 4404:2010
PIPA Plastics Industry Pipe Association of Australia Ltd

PN nominal pressure class (maximum rated operating pressure)
*
PP polypropylene
PRV pressure reducing valve
d
PVC polyvinyl chloride
n
PVC-U unplasticised polyvinyl chloride
ala
PVC-M modified polyvinyl chloride
PVC-O orientated polyvinyl chloride
Ze
RMA Resource Management Act
RRJ rubber ring joint
s. section
ew
Soc socket
STP specified test pressure

TA territorial authority
TMS
sN
terminal maintenance shaft
UV ultraviolet
rd
VC vitrified clay
vpd vehicles per day
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
29
NZS 4404:2010
1.3 Context
This Standard is relevant to Acts such at the Resource Management Act, Building Act,
*
Historic Places Act and other legislation. The purpose of NZS 4404:2010 is to provide
standards for the implementation of well designed land development and subdivision
d
infrastructure projects that have obtained the necessary resource consents under the
n
RMA, and comply with other legislation. LAs will be able to invoke compliance with this
Standard and their own local additions and variations, to ensure that the sustainability,
ala
urban design, and environmental impact objectives of land development and subdivision
projects are carried through to completion. The interrelationship between this Standard
and these Acts is outlined below.
Ze
The Standard also provides best practice land development and subdivision infrastructure
techniques in low impact design, climate change, and urban design.
ew
1.3.1 Resource Management Act
The Resource Management Act 1991 (RMA) is the principal statute under which the
development and subdivision of land is controlled.
sN
Regional and district plans prepared under the RMA are the key resource management
instruments that LAs implement to achieve sustainable management of natural and physical
resources, which is the overarching purpose of the RMA.
rd
This Standard does not have a binding effect unless incorporated into a regional/district
plan or bylaw. If the Standard is not referred to in the plan or any bylaw, the Standard
da
can still serve as a technical compliance manual to assist in guiding decision-making and
99954
118.92.13.10
forming conditions of resource consent.

an
A national policy statement (NPS) and national environmental standard (NES) may also
apply to a proposed development in addition to regional and district planning documents.
However NPS and NES only apply once they are finalised and gazetted whereas regional
St
and district plan provisions may apply to consent applications as soon as they are notified.
ht
C1.3.1
Over time, central government may develop other NPS and NES which may affect
rig
3
09
decision-making by LAs on land development and subdivision, including national

29
80
80
00
16
policy on freshwater management, sea level rise, and flood risk. The Ministry for the
Environment’s website should be referred to for any relevant NPS and NES.
py
The protection of historic heritage from inappropriate subdivision, use, and development is
a matter of national importance under s. 6(f) of the RMA. The RMA’s definition of historic
Co
heritage includes: historic sites, structures, places, and areas; archaeological sites;
sites of significance to Māori including wāhi tapu; and surroundings associated with the
natural and physical resources. Therefore regional/district plans should be reviewed to
ascertain whether any development proposal affects historic heritage. Most plans have a
historic heritage schedule, which lists the item protected, its location, and its sensitivity. A
precautionary approach should be taken prior to any land development and subdivision
infrastructure affecting historic heritage, with the LA consulted at the earliest stage (see
1.3.2).
30
NZS 4404:2010
Where applications for resource consents may affects sites of significance to Māori,
consultation with the appropriate tangata whenua groups should occur prior to finalising
plans or submitting applications for resource consent in order to give effect to Part II of
*
the RMA.
d
1.3.2 Historic Places Act
n
In addition to the RMA, the Historic Places Act regulates the modification of archaeological
ala
sites on all land and provides for substantial penalties for unauthorised destruction, damage,
or modification of these sites.
The Act makes it unlawful for any person to destroy, damage, or modify the whole or
Ze
any part of an archaeological site registered with the New Zealand Historic Places Trust
(NZHPT), without the prior authority of the NZHPT. This is the case regardless of whether:
(a) The site is registered or recorded by the council in planning documents;
ew
(b) The land on which the site is located is designated;
(c) The activity is permitted under the district or regional plan; or

(d)
sN
A resource or building consent has been granted.
Therefore approval from the NZHPT is required if a site registered with the NZHPT is
affected, in addition to any council approval that may be required.
rd
Furthermore, if the site is known to be associated with pre-1900 human activity, or there
is reasonable cause to suspect such an association, the developer should consult with
da
99954
118.92.13.10
the NZHPT prior to undertaking any earthworks or ground disturbance.
1.3.3 Building Act

an
The Building Act provides a national framework for building control to ensure that buildings
are safe and sanitary and have suitable means of escape from fire. The Building Regulations
St
made under the Act provide the mandatory requirements for building control in the form
of the New Zealand Building Code. The Building Code contains the objective, functional
requirements, and performance criteria that building works shall achieve.
ht
Where the development of land and subdivision infrastructure involves the creation of
structures with associated site works, including specific aspects of stormwater management
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
and the interaction of buildings, fences, and walls with stormwater flows, the requirements
of the Building Act shall be observed. Nothing in this Standard shall detract from the
requirements of the Building Act or the Building Code.
py
C1.3.3
Systems owned or operated by a network utility operator for the purpose of reticulation
Co
are not included in the definition of building under the Building Act.
1.3.4 Other legislation

The Reserves Act, Conservation Act, and other Acts may also require consideration
when undertaking land development and subdivision infrastructure. Covenants (a legal
restriction or agreement recorded on the title of a property that is a matter of private
contract) may also require consideration. For example, a Queen Elizabeth II Act Open
Space Covenant is a legally binding protection document agreed between a landowner
and the QEII National Trust.
31
NZS 4404:2010
1.4 Low impact design

Low impact design (LID) is both a design approach and a range of structural techniques
*
that can be applied to urban development and stormwater management. As a design
approach, LID provides an opportunity to identify and recognise natural features and
d
integrate these into the design of development layouts in order to minimise environmental
n
impacts or enhance natural features. The integration of natural processes in the design
stage of a development can result in more attractive, multifunctional landscapes with
ala
greater social, environmental, cultural, and transport outcomes.
Low impact design solutions that use natural processes and add value to urban environments
Ze
are the preferred approach.
1.5 Climate change
ew
Climate change is likely to increase the magnitude of some hazards, therefore it is
important to incorporate risk management in the design of infrastructure supporting new

developments to maintain the same level of service throughout the design lifetime. The
sN
design of infrastructure for land development and subdivision needs to provide for the
impact of sea level rise and the increased frequency of extreme weather events.
C1.5
rd
Amendments to the Resource Management Act, the Local Government Act 2002, and
the Building Act require LAs to have particular regard to the effects of climate change
da
when making decisions under these Acts.

99954
118.92.13.10
In coastal areas, the proposed ‘New Zealand coastal policy statement’ (policy 52)
an
requires LAs to consider the location of any new subdivisions in the context of avoiding
or reducing potential coastal hazards.
The government is considering the development of a number of other national policy

St
instruments which may affect decision-making by local authorities, including a ‘National

environmental standard on sea level rise’ and a ‘National policy statement on flood
risk’. These would not take effect until they are gazetted.
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
1.6 Urban design protocol

The New Zealand urban design protocol seeks to ensure that the design of buildings, places,
spaces, and networks that make up our towns and cities, work for all of us, both now and
py
in the future. NZS 4404 includes recommended best practices that support urban design
protocol initiatives. The New Zealand urban design protocol identifies seven essential
Co
design qualities for good urban design:
(a) Context: seeing that buildings, places, and spaces are part of the whole town or city;
(b) Character: reflecting and enhancing the distinctive character, heritage, and identity
of our urban environment;
(c) Choice: ensuring diversity and choice for people;
(d) Connections: enhancing how different networks link together for people;
32
NZS 4404:2010
(e) Creativity: encouraging innovative and imaginative solutions;

(f) Custodianship: ensuring design is environmentally sustainable, safe, and healthy;
*
(g) Collaboration: communicating and sharing knowledge across sectors, professions,
and with communities.
d
The New Zealand urban design protocol has been the primary influence on the urban
n
layouts that are encouraged in this Standard.
ala
1.7 Requirements for design and construction
Ze
1.7.1 Investigation and design
All investigation, calculations, design, supervision, and certification of the infrastructure
outlined in this Standard shall be carried out by or under the control of persons who:
ew
(a) Are experienced in the respective fields;
(b) Hold appropriate membership in the respective professional bodies or are recognised
by LAs as having proven experience;
(c) sN
Have appropriate professional indemnity insurance and public liability insurance.
The provisions of this Standard do not reduce the responsibility of those professionals to
exercise their judgement and devise appropriate solutions for the particular circumstances
rd
of each development.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
1.7.2 Construction
All construction carried out in any development shall be done by persons who:
an
(a) Have the appropriate experience in the relevant areas;

(b) Have the appropriate equipment;
St
(c) Have the appropriate public liability insurance;

(d) Meet the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Act.
ht
1.8 Approval of design and construction

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
1.8.1 Documents to be submitted for design approval
1.8.1.1
py
Prior to, or as a condition of, granting a resource consent for subdivision or development
of land, or as otherwise required by a district or regional plan, or as otherwise considered
necessary by the LA when considering applications to construct infrastructure, the LA may
Co
require documents to be submitted including the following:
(a) Design and construction documentation including drawings, specifications, and

calculations for the following:
(i) Earthworks and geotechnical requirements
(ii) Roading and site access including a design and access statement (see 3.2.6)
and a road safety audit (see 3.2.7)
(iii) Stormwater
(iv) Wastewater ➤
33
NZS 4404:2010
(v) Water supply

(vi) Landscape
*
(vii) Network utility services;
(b) A geo-professional’s report on the suitability of the land for subdivision or development;
d
(c) Other reports as considered necessary by the LA in the circumstances of the proposed
n
infrastructure in order to meet the requirements of this Standard;
ala
(d) A design certificate in the form of the certificate in Schedule 1A.
1.8.2 Drawings
Ze
1.8.2.1 General
Design drawings shall be prepared in accordance with the LA’s practices. Except where
otherwise notified, the requirements are as set out in this section and in sections 2 to 8
ew
of this Standard. Drawings shall be approved by the LA. All drawings shall be provided
in a form required by the LA.
Drawings shall be to adequate detail to clearly illustrate the proposals and enable assessment
sN
of compliance with this Standard and enable accurate construction.
1.8.2.2 Composition of drawings

rd
Design drawings generally include the following:
(a) A locality plan giving the overall layout and location;

da
99954
118.92.13.10
(b) Detailed plans, longitudinal sections, cross sections, and diagrams of the proposed
developments;
an
(c) Special details where the standard drawings are not sufficient;
(d) A north point and level datum, the scale or scales used, the date of preparation and
the date of any amendments, the designer’s name and contact details, and a unique
St
number or identifier.
1.8.2.3 Scale
ht
The scale for plans is generally 1:500 but other accepted scales may be used to suit
the level of detail on the plans. Special details shall be to scales appropriate for clarity.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Individual LAs may require other specific scales to be used.
1.8.2.4 Content of drawings

py
The following information when relevant shall be shown on the design drawings:
(a) The extent of the construction showing existing and proposed roads, and the relationship
Co
with adjacent construction, services, or property;

(b) Significant existing vegetation to be removed and any special or protected trees,
areas of heritage significance, and existing water bodies that may be affected by
the construction;
(c) The extent of earthworks, including earthworks on proposed reserves, existing and
proposed contours, areas of cut and fill, batter slopes, subsoil drainage, and silt
control measures both temporary and permanent;
(d) The design of proposed roads (and their connections with existing roads), including
34
NZS 4404:2010
longitudinal and cross section plans, horizontal and vertical geometry and levels,
typical cross sections, details of proposed pavement surface, kerbing, swales,
berms, footpaths, cycle paths, tree planting, road marking and signals, and all other
*
proposed road furniture;
d
(e) The horizontal and vertical location and alignment, lengths, sizes, materials, minimum
cover, position relative to other services of all proposed water, wastewater, and
n
stormwater systems and service connections, valves, hydrants, manholes, bends,
ala
tees, meters and backflow devices, and services that may be reconnected or plugged,
and any proposed overland stormwater flow path;
(f) Details and location of mechanically restrained portions of pipelines, pipeline bridges,
Ze
pumping stations, reservoirs, intake and outlet structures and the location of surface
obstructions, hazards, or other features that may be affected by the construction;
(g) For water mains, the nominal static pressure head at the point of connection and at
ew
the lowest point; design pressure and maximum design pressure;
(h) Details and location of existing and proposed telecommunications, electricity and
gas supply, and street lighting layout, including proposed underground and above
sN
ground junction boxes, transformers and similar equipment. This information is
typically provided by the service authorities once other design drawings are finalised
and approved;
(i) Details of proposed landscaping of roads and allotments, and details of proposed
rd
reserve development including earthworks, hydrological features, walkways and
accessways, landscaping features, landscaping structures, tree planting, revegetation,
da
99954
118.92.13.10 hard and soft surface treatment, park and road furniture, and playground equipment.
1.8.2.5 Recording of infrastructure – As-built information

an
The LA may require the design drawings to be in a certain format, suitable for later addition
of as-built information and inclusion in the LA asset map base. In particular, electronic
St
plans may be required.
1.8.3 Design basis for documents submitted for approval

ht
1.8.3.1 Standard design basis

Proposals submitted on a standard design basis shall conform to this Standard.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
1.8.3.2 Alternative design basis

Proposals submitted on an alternative design basis may differ from this Standard and
py
shall apply specifically to a particular proposal. LA approval of an alternative design does

not confer approval in general by the LA to any design criteria, construction technique or
material forming part of the alternative design.
Co
An explanation of the design basis or construction method is to be submitted, for approval

in principle. It will be considered on its merits and should be approved provided that the
design results in infrastructural development equivalent or superior in performance to that
complying with this Standard.
Alternative designs provide flexibility to meet the circumstances and requirements peculiar
to the site, or as a means of encouraging innovative design, or to meet the principle of
life-cycle costing.
35
NZS 4404:2010
1.8.3.3 Life-cycle costing

Life-cycle costing may be used to consider options within a proposal or a proposal as a
whole. In undertaking a life-cycle costing, consideration shall be given to the initial costs
*
borne by the developer and the maintenance and replacement costs borne by the future
d
owners or the LA. A reasonable balance shall be maintained between these short-term
and long-term costs.
n
ala
1.8.4 Approval of design
1.8.4.1
When it is satisfied that the design meets the requirements of this Standard, or the LA’s own
Ze
provisions, or in the case of an alternative design, that the design satisfies the requirements
of 1.8.3.2, the LA shall notify the owner that the design has been approved and endorse the
plans, specifications, and other documents accordingly. For the purpose of this approval
ew
the LA may require the owner to make amendments to any plans, specifications, and other
documentation and to submit further or other reports. In considering project design and
giving its approval, the LA shall act without undue delay.
1.8.4.2 Approval before commencing construction

sN
Construction shall not commence on site unless and until:
rd
(a) Resource consents have been issued, except when no such consents are required; and
(b) The LA(s) have approved any other consents and the drawings, specifications, and
da
99954
118.92.13.10
calculations for the specific infrastructure that is required in accordance with 1.8.4.1.
C1.8.4.2
an
S. 116 of the Resource Management Act sets out when a resource consent commences.
Generally this will be when any appeals against the grant of the consent have been
St
disposed of. Where any appeals are unresolved, approval to commence work will need
to be obtained from the Environment Court.
ht
1.8.5 Notification of contracts and phases of construction

rig
1.8.5.1
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
The developer shall notify the LA, in writing, of the names and addresses of contractors to
whom it is proposed to award the contracts, and the nature of the construction in each case.
py
1.8.5.2
Unless the LA requires otherwise, the developer shall notify the LA when the following
Co
phases of construction are reached and such other phases as the LA may determine to
enable inspection to be carried out:
(a) Commencement of construction;

(b) Prior to concrete construction;
(c) Prepared earthworks and subsoil drainage prior to filling;
(d) Completed earthworks and prepared subgrade;
(e) Water, wastewater, and stormwater reticulation prior to backfilling;
36
NZS 4404:2010
(f) Water and wastewater reticulation during pressure testing;

(g) Finished basecourse before the commencement of road sealing;
*
(h) Disinfection of water mains.
d
At least 24-hours notice shall be given by the developer. Inspection shall be carried out
within 24 hours of notification if possible. Further construction phases shall not proceed
n
until inspection has been made.
ala
C1.8.5.2
LAs may require the appointment of a ‘developer’s professional advisor’ or ‘independent
Ze
qualified person (IQP)’ in which case this requirement will be performed by that person.
1.8.6 Supervision of construction
ew
The level of supervision undertaken in connection with any construction shall be agreed
between the LA and the developer, or, if appointed, the developer’s professional advisor or
the IQP as the case may be, and shall be appropriate to the circumstances considering the
sN
size and importance of the project, the complexity of the construction, and the experience
and demonstrated skill in quality management of the person undertaking the construction.
The LA may require completion certification for construction and supervision be submitted
rd
to it on completion. Such certification may be required from the contractors undertaking
the construction, or the developer, or the developer’s professional advisor (if any). The
da
99954
118.92.13.10
certificates shall be in the form given in Schedules 1B and 1C.
C1.8.6
an
An appropriate level of supervision can be selected by reference to the Construction

Monitoring Services information published by the Institution of Professional Engineers
of New Zealand (IPENZ) and the Association of Consulting Engineers New Zealand
St
(ACENZ).
ht
1.8.7 Connecting to existing services
1.8.7.1
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Connection of water, wastewater, stormwater, and other services to existing systems

will normally be carried out by the appropriate network utility operator at the cost of the
developer, except that at the discretion of the network utility operator connections may be
py
made by the owner, or contractor employed by the owner, if appropriately qualified and
under the network utility operator’s supervision.
Co
1.8.7.2
The developer shall give the network utility operator 5 working days notice of intention to
connect to existing services. Where required, new services shall be tested and approved
by the network utility operator prior to connection.
1.8.8 Testing
Any infrastructure required to be tested by the developer shall be pre-tested and proved
satisfactory by the developer before test by the network utility operator is requested.
37
NZS 4404:2010
1.8.9 Maintenance
The developer shall maintain the infrastructure until it is formally taken over by the TA or to
a date specified in a bond or consent condition for completion of uncompleted infrastructure.
*
The developer shall not be responsible for damage caused by other activities such as
d
building construction or for fair wear and tear or vandalism caused by public use of the
roads that have been taken over by the TA or network authority.
n
ala
1.8.10 Completion documentation
On completion of all subdivision and land development infrastructure, the developer shall
provide the LA with the following:
Ze
(a) The geotechnical reports and as-built plans required by 2.6 of this Standard;
(b) As-built plans of all infrastructure showing the information set out in Schedule 1D.
As-built plans may be required as electronic data where a standard data format has
ew
been agreed between the LA and the developer;
(c) Evidence that all testing required by this Standard has been carried out and that the
test results comply with the requirements of this Standard;
(d) sN
Evidence that reticulation and plant to be taken over by network utility operators have
been installed to their standards and will be taken over, operated and maintained by
the network utility operator concerned;
rd
(e) Completion certificates as per Schedules 1B and 1C;
(f) Certification by a suitably qualified person where they have recommended a specific
da
99954
118.92.13.10
design and construction has been undertaken in accordance with that recommendation.
The certification shall state that the suitably qualified person supervised the construction
and it has been completed in accordance with the recommended design principles;
an
(g) Other documentation required by the TA including, but not limited to, operation
and maintenance manuals, and warranties for new facilities involving electrical or
mechanical plant and asset valuations for all infrastructures to be taken over by the TA.
St
1.8.11 Approval of uncompleted work

ht
Where in the opinion of the TA it is assessed as reasonable, and unlikely to materially

affect the safe operation of public assets and expectations and interests of the public
and directly affected private parties, the TA may approve the deferral of completion of an
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
element of a consented and approved work, subject to satisfactory bonds being arranged.
py
Co
38
NZS 4404:2010
1.9 Bonds and charges
1.9.1 Uncompleted works
*
1.9.1.1
d
Bonds to cover uncompleted works, especially where a subdivision or development has
n
been substantially completed, are recognised as an acceptable procedure and should be
permitted at the discretion of the TA. Acceptance of a bond for uncompleted works shall
ala
not be unreasonably withheld.
1.9.1.2
Ze
Bonds shall be secured by an appropriate guarantee or shall be in cash and lodged with
the TA. Where necessary bonds shall be executed and registered.
ew
1.9.1.3
The amount of the bond shall be the estimated value of the uncompleted work plus a
margin to cover additional costs estimated to be incurred by the TA in the event of default.
C1.9.1
sN
A satisfactory system of bonding uncompleted works is needed to overcome delays
rd
in obtaining the deposit of land transfer plans for subdivision. A major factor can be
the practical difficulties of fully completing the construction of a subdivision caused by
inclement weather, shortages of machinery, materials, and labour and the difficulty of
da
coordinating the many aspects required to achieve full completion of a substantially

99954
118.92.13.10
completed subdivision.
an
The authority to require bonds is given in s. 108(2)(b) and s. 108A of the Resource
Management Act, and s. 109 of that Act deems bonds and covenants to be instruments
registerable under the Land Transfer Act, running with the land and binding subsequent
St
owners. Section 109 of the Resource Management Act also gives the TA the power to
enter land and complete the work. Additional powers are given by s. 223 of the Resource
Management Act to allow the deposit of a survey plan notwithstanding uncompleted work.
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
39
NZS 4404:2010
SCHEDULE 1A
*
DESIGN CERTIFICATE – LAND DEVELOPMENT/SUBDIVISION
d
n
ISSUED BY:………………………………………………………………………………………………
(Approved certifier firm/suitably qualified design professional)
ala
TO: ……………………………………………………………………………………..…………………
(Developer/owner)
TO BE SUPPLIED TO:……………………………………………………………….…………………
Ze
(Territorial authority)
FOR: …………………………………………………………………….…………………………………
(Description of land development/subdivision)
ew
AT:…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………….…………………
(Address)
……………………………………. has been engaged by .....................................………………..

sN
(Consultant/designer) (Developer/owner)
rd
to provide……………………………………. services for the land development and/or subdivision described above.
I …………………………………….have the qualifications and experience relevant to this project as set out herein
da
and have designed the land development/subdivision and confirm that the design is to current engineering
99954
118.92.13.10
practice, and that I believe on reasonable grounds that it satisfies all relevant resource consent conditions, all
an
relevant ………………………………………………………(insert name of authority) requirements and applicable

codes and standards.
St
I / My practice holds professional indemnity insurance to the amount of $……………….and includes run-off cover.
…………………………………………… Date ………………………………………………………..

ht
(Signature of approved certifier on behalf of the approved certifier firm)

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
(Name, title, and professional qualifications)

py
NOTE – This statement shall only be relied upon by the territorial authority named above. Liability under this statement accrues
to the approved certifier firm only. The total maximum amount of damages payable arising from this statement and all other
statements provided to the territorial authority on this land development/subdivision, whether in contract, tort, or otherwise
Co
(including negligence), is limited to the sum of $............................. (insert)
Copyright waived
40
NZS 4404:2010
SCHEDULE 1B
*
CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE UPON COMPLETION OF LAND
DEVELOPMENT/SUBDIVISION
d
n
ISSUED BY:……………………………………………………………………………………………………
(Contractor)
ala
TO: ……………………………………………………………………………………..………………………
(Principal)
TO BE SUPPLIED TO:……………………………………………………………….………………………
Ze
FOR: …………………………………………………………………….…………………………………..…
ew
AT:………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………
(Address)
sN
………………………………… has contracted to ...........................................…………………………..
(Contractor) (Principal)
rd
to carry out and complete certain land development and/or subdivision construction in accordance with
a contract, titled Contract No. ………… for ………………………………(‘the contract’).
da
99954
118.92.13.10
I …………………………… a duly authorised representative of …………………………………………

(Duly authorised agent) (Contractor)
an
hereby certify that ……………………………………………… has carried out and completed

(Contractor)
St
the construction, other than those outstanding works listed below, in accordance with the contract and in
accordance with approved engineering drawings and specifications.
ht
………………………………………………… Date …………………………………………………

rig
3
09
29
(Signature of authorised agent on behalf of)

80
80
00
16
…………………………………………………
(Contractor)
py
………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………
(Address)
Co
Outstanding works
……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………
Copyright waived
41
NZS 4404:2010
SCHEDULE 1C
*
CERTIFICATION UPON COMPLETION OF LAND DEVELOPMENT/SUBDIVISION
d
ISSUED BY:………………………………………………………………………………………………
n
(Approved certifier firm)
ala
TO: ……………………………………………………………………………………..…………………
(Developer/owner)
TO BE SUPPLIED TO:……………………………………………………………….…………………
Ze
FOR: …………………………………………………………………….…………………………………
ew
AT:…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………….…………………
(Address)
………………………………… has been engaged by ...........................................………………

(Consultant/designer) (Developer/owner)
sN
to provide construction observation review and certification services for the above subdivision
rd
which is described in the specification and shown on the drawings numbered
…………….....................................…approved by………..............................................…………
da
99954
118.92.13.10
I have sighted the ……………………………………………… consent and conditions of subdivision

an
and the approved specification and drawings.

On the basis of periodic reviews of the construction and information supplied by the contractor in the
St
course of the construction, I believe on reasonable grounds that the infrastructure other than those outstanding
works listed below, is complete and has been constructed in accordance with:
(a) The approved engineering drawings and specifications and any approved amendments;
(b) The Council’s Engineering Standards; and
ht
(c) The manufacturer’s instructions
...................................................................…… Date ………………………………………

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(Signature of approved certifier on behalf of the approved certifier firm)
.......................................................................................................................................................
py

NOTE – This statement shall only be relied upon by the territorial authority named above. Liability under this statement accrues to
the approved certifier firm only. The total maximum amount of damages payable arising from this statement and all other statements
Co
provided to the territorial authority in relation to this land development/ subdivision, whether in contract, tort, or otherwise (including
negligence), is limited to the sum of $......................... (insert).
Outstanding works
……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………
Copyright waived
42
NZS 4404:2010
SCHEDULE 1D
*
AS-BUILT PLANS
d
Information given on as-built drawings, whether submitted electronically or as paper plans, shall include but
shall not be limited to:
n
(a) Stormwater and wastewater reticulation – including the coordinated positions of manholes, manhole
ala
inverts, inverts of pipes and lid levels, measurements to house connections, and laterals and their
length and position. Positions of connections and laterals shall be both coordinated and referenced
to adjacent manhole lids and boundary pegs. All levels shall be in terms of datum approved by
the TA;
Ze
(b) Stormwater management devices – as-built plans for low impact stormwater management
devices and non-reticulated components;
ew
(c) Flood and secondary flow information, flood water levels and the extent of any overland
secondary flows shall be shown where these have been obtained or derived during the design;
(d) sN
Water reticulation – including the position of mains, location of hydrants, valves, tees, reducers,
connections, tobies, water meters, and specials. All features shall be accurately dimensioned,
coordinated, and referenced so that they can be accurately relocated in the field;
rd
(e) Ducts – measurements to ducts installed by the developer for utilities;
(f) Labelling of pipes and ducts to cover diameter, pipe material and class, year laid, jointing
da
type;
99954
118.92.13.10
(g) Road names where available – as approved by the TA;

an
(h) Coordinates and levels of all utility surface features to be taken over by the TA, including tobies,
and water meters;
St
(i) The coordinates of at least two points on each plan in terms of an appropriate geodetic or
cadastral datum and the origin of the plan level datum;
ht
(j) Geotechnical completion report and as-built drawings as detailed in 2.6.1 and 2.6.2 of
NZS 4404:2010. As-built surface contours covering all areas of disturbed and cut/fill ground;
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(k) Road construction, including location, structural details, and details of road marking, signals,
lighting, and signs, landscape features, seating, and other amenities and features;
py
(l) Road pavement and surfacing information;

Co
(m) Landscape features, seating, and other amenities and features.
Copyright waived
43
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
NOTES
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
NZS 4404:2010
2 EARTHWORKS AND GEOTECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Scope
*
This section sets out requirements for the assessment of land stability and the design and
d
control of earthworks to ensure a suitable platform for the construction of buildings, roads,
n
and other structures. A low impact design approach is preferred. Geotechnical assessment
shall be undertaken by a geo-professional defined in 1.2.2 of this Standard where:
ala
(a) The assessment of land stability requires specialist expertise;
(b) The construction of earthworks associated with any development requires initial
Ze
planning and design to ensure that banks and batters remain stable and that fill
material is placed in such a way that it remains stable and can support the future
loads imposed on it;
ew
(c) There is historical fill which has not been undertaken in accordance with any Standard
or where natural slopes, banks, or batters are involved;
(d) The assessment of ground for the foundations of buildings, roads, services, and other
(e)
sN
infrastructure requires specialist expertise as weak ground may require special design;
The wide range of soil types, physical conditions, and environmental factors applying
in different areas make it difficult to specify precise or prescriptive requirements for
land stability assessment or earthworks.
rd
In setting design, construction requirements, or development limitations the designer shall

da
99954
take account of all relevant standards and TA requirements.
118.92.13.10
C2.1
an
NZS 4431 is applicable to the construction of earth fills for residential development
including residential roading.
St
2.2 General
ht
2.2.1 Objective
The objective of this section is to set out some, but not necessarily all of the matters which
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
need to be considered in planning and constructing a land development project. The aim
is to provide information for professionals involved in designing and constructing a land
development project and to require geotechnical expertise in projects where land stability
py
could be an issue or where earthworks other than of a minor nature will occur.
The geo-professional needs to be involved in the choice of final land form. This decision
Co
depends on many factors which may be specific to the development. These include the
relationship with surrounding landscapes, the size of the development, the proposed
and existing roading patterns, the preservation of natural features, wāhi tapu, and other
historic and archaeological sites, the land stability and underlying structural geology, the
function and purpose of the development and the potential for flooding, and erosion and
other natural hazards and events including earthquakes. The aim is to also give guidance
on the identification of and assessment of the order of importance of the above factors
which will vary from project to project.
45
NZS 4404:2010
2.2.2 Referenced documents

A selection of useful guidance material on geotechnical and geomechanical issues in land
development is set out in Referenced Documents. Related Documents lists additional
*
material that may be useful.
d
2.2.3 Local authorities’ requirements
n
The TA may require an assessment of land stability to meet the provisions of the Resource
ala
Management Act and Building Act. The TA requires and relies on the assessment made
by the geo-professional.
Special requirements apply when land is subject to erosion, avulsion, alluvium, falling
Ze
debris, subsidence, slippage, rotation, creep, or inundation from any source. In such
situations reference needs to be made to s. 106 of the Resource Management Act and,
for subsequent building work, s. 71 of the Building Act.
ew
Advice should be sought from the regional council for earthworks and consent requirements.
The methods used and investigations undertaken are defined by the TA and the geo-
professional. sN
This Standard does not set those requirements or set standards for assessing geotechnical
risk.
rd
2.2.4 Geotechnical requirements

da
99954
118.92.13.10
Where any proposed development involves the assessment of slope stability or the detailed
evaluation of the suitability of natural ground for the foundations of buildings, roading, and
other structures, or the carrying out of bulk earthworks, then a geo-professional shall be
an
appointed by the developer to carry out the following functions:
(a) Check regional and district plans, records, and requirements prior to commencement
St
of geotechnical assessment;
(b) Prior to the detailed planning of any development, to undertake a site inspection
and such investigations of subsurface conditions as may be required, and to identify
ht
geotechnical hazards affecting the land, including any special conditions that may
affect the design of any pipelines, underground structures, or other utility services;
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(c) Before construction commences, to review the drawings and specifications defining
any earthworks or other construction and to submit a written report to the TA on the
foundation and stability aspects of the project;
py
(d) Before and during construction, to determine the extent of further geo-professional
services required (including geological investigation);
Co
(e) Any work necessary to manage the risk of geotechnical instability during the
construction process;
(f) Before and during construction, to determine the methods, location, and frequency of
construction control tests to be carried out, determine the reliability of the testing, and
to evaluate the significance of test results and field inspection reports in assessing
the quality of the finished work;
(g) During construction, to undertake regular inspection consistent with the extent and
geotechnical issues associated with the project;
46
NZS 4404:2010
(h) On completion, to submit a written report to the TA attesting to the compliance of

the earthworks with the specifications and to the suitability of the development for
its proposed use including natural ground within the development area. Where
*
NZS 4431 is applicable, the reporting requirements of that Standard shall be used
d
as a minimum requirement.
n
2.3 Design
ala
2.3.1 Design factors
The design process shall include, but not be limited to:
Ze
(a) Preliminary site evaluation;
(b) Identification of special features to be retained/protected;
(c) Low impact design considerations;
ew
(d) Selection of the choice of landform;
(e) Stability assessment;

(f)
(g)
sN
Assessment of special soil types where applicable;
Setting of compaction standards for fill material;
(h) Erosion, sediment, and dust control;
rd
(i) Seismic considerations;
(j) Geothermal issues where applicable.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
2.3.2 Preliminary site evaluation

During the preliminary site evaluation phase the developer’s professional advisor shall
an
engage a geo-professional at an early stage to undertake a preliminary site evaluation

and prepare a geotechnical assessment report where there is doubt about the stability
St
or suitability of the ground for the proposed development, or there are any TA or local
practice requirements for geotechnical involvement in the project.
In cases where more than a visual appraisal is deemed to be required, particular attention
ht
will need to be given to the following matters, as appropriate, which should normally be
considered prior to preparing a proposal for development:
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(a) Low impact design factors:

The preliminary site evaluation needs to take into account low impact design factors.
py
These include consideration of maintaining and improving natural waterway features

and optimising waterway crossing locations. Protection of well-drained soils and natural
soakage areas also need to be taken into account.
Co
(b) Drainage:
Identify the existing natural drainage pattern of any area and locate any natural springs
or seepage. Where any overland flow paths or natural surface or subsurface drainage
paths are interfered with or altered by earthworks, then appropriate measures should be
taken to ensure that adequate alternative drainage facilities are provided to ensure there
is no increase in flood hazard risk to the site or adjoining properties; ➤
47
NZS 4404:2010
(c) Slope stability:

Some natural slopes exist in a state of only marginal stability and relatively minor disturbance
such as trenching, excavation for streets or building platforms, removal of scrub and
*
vegetation, or the erection of buildings, can lead to failure. Signs of instability include
d
cracked or hummocky surfaces, crescent-shaped depressions, crooked fences, trees
or power poles leaning uphill or downhill, uneven surfaces, swamps or wet ground in
n
elevated positions, plants such as rushes growing down a slope, and water seeping from
ala
the ground. In addition, a simple desktop study of aerial photographs may show indications
of historic failures as well as faulting, resulting in linear ground features. Refer to BRANZ
Study Report 004, Crawford and Millar 1998, or the New Zealand Geotechnical Society
Ze
publications Field description of soil and rock and Geotechnical issues in land development.
For a sample checklist for geotechnical assessments refer to Crawford and Millar 1998.
Existing or potential surface creep effects also need to be investigated and reported upon;
ew
(d) Foundation stability:
A study of the general topography of the site and its surroundings may indicate areas
which have previously been built up as a result of natural ground movement or by the
sN
deliberate placing of fill material. Unless such fill has been placed and compacted under
proper control, instability or long-term differential settlement could occur causing damage
to superimposed structures, roads, services, or other structures;
rd
(e) Stream instability:
There is a potential for instability through changes to the current ground conditions, such
da
99954
118.92.13.10
as stream erosion;
(f) Local conditions:

an
A wide range of soil types exists throughout New Zealand which may need special
consideration. Expansive soils, volcanic soils, soft alluvial sediments, and compressible
soils are examples of these. Liquefaction of saturated non-cohesive soils should also be
St
considered. The TA may have information on the soil types in its area, including potentially
contaminated land;
ht
(g) Peer review:

Where risk for the land prior to development is assessed as being medium to very high
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
risk, a peer review of the geotechnical assessment for the proposed development may
be required and this would need to be carried out by an independent geo-professional.
(For guidance see NZ Geomechanics News (Crawford and Millar) for risk classification
py
and (Cook et al) for peer review.)
C2.3.2
Co
The preliminary evaluation should be carried out in the context of the total surroundings
of the site, and should not be influenced by details of land tenure, territorial, or other
boundary considerations. Where the preliminary evaluation discloses the potential
for slope instability, other geotechnical or geological hazards, or the need for major
foundations or for earthworks, the geo-professional should be involved at an early
stage in the planning of the development.
48
NZS 4404:2010
2.3.3 Landform selection

The final choice of landform shall represent the most desirable compromise between
the development requirements and the preservation of natural features and the natural
*
character and landscape amenity values of the site including the retention of natural
d
watercourses. Landform selection needs to take into account low impact design principles
including retention of existing landforms and natural features where possible, and avoiding
n
earthworks where there are existing habitats of indigenous species, wetlands, or areas of
ala
high natural character. The design shall take into account the following factors in making
the selection of the final choice of the landform:
(a) The choice of a suitable landform may be specific to a particular site. An earthworks
Ze
approach that respects and reflects the natural topography of the site is preferred.
Considerations for carrying out earthworks include:
(i) The minimisation of the risk of damage to property occurring through ground
ew
movement in the form of slips, subsidence, creep, erosion, or settlement
(ii) The minimisation of the risk of damage to property occurring through flooding,
or surface water run-off
(iii) sN
The development of a more desirable roading pattern with improved
accessibility to and within the site and the creation of a better sense of
orientation and identity for the area as a whole
(iv) The efficiency of overall land utilisation including the quality of individual sites
rd
and amenity areas around buildings, the economics of providing engineering
services, and the standard of roading and on-site vehicular access
da
(v) The need to create suitably graded areas for playing fields and other community
99954
118.92.13.10
facilities, and
an
(vi) The enhancement of the general environmental character of the area;
(b) The general nature and shape of the ground including:

St
(i) The geological nature and distribution of soils and rock

(ii) Existing and proposed drainage conditions, and the likely effects on
groundwater
ht
(iii) Previous history of ground movements in similar soils in the area

(iv) Performance of comparable cuts and fills (if any) in adjacent areas, and
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(v) Air photography and other sources of information which should be reviewed
and incorporated into any slope stability assessment;
py
(c) Soil data as applicable for areas which:

(i) Are intended to form in situ bases for fills
(ii) Are intended to yield material for the construction of fills
Co
(iii) Are intended to be exposed as permanent batters, and

(iv) Are to remain as permanent slopes or cut areas;
(d) Borings, probings, or open cuts as necessary to:

(i) Classify the soil strata by field and visual methods
(ii) Evaluate the likely extent and variation in depths of the principal soil types, and
(iii) Establish the natural groundwater levels;
➤
49
NZS 4404:2010
(e) Soil information required for:

(i) Further sampling and testing which may be required on representative soil
types
*
(ii) Relating subsequent soil test properties to relevant strata over the site
d
(iii) Assessment and design for slope stability
n
(iv) Assessment and design for foundations suitable for the finished site, and
ala
(v) Assessment and design for road subgrades.
The test data appropriate in different areas should be determined by the geo-professional.
Ze
2.3.4 Stability criteria
In making an assessment of the stability of slopes and earth fills, the geo-professional shall
use accepted criteria and analysis methods. Stability criteria applicable to land development
ew
in New Zealand are published or recommended by the New Zealand Geotechnical Society
(see Referenced Documents).
2.3.5 Special soil types

sN
If special soil types are known to exist in a locality or are identified, then a geo-professional
shall be engaged to advise on appropriate measures for incorporation of these soils into
a development. Special soil types include, but are not limited to:
rd
(a) Soils with high shrinkage and expansion;
(b) Compressible soils;
da
99954
(c) Volcanic soils;

118.92.13.10
(d) Soils subject to liquefaction;

an
(e) Soils prone to dispersion (such as loess).

St
C2.3.5
The geo-professional should refer to the LA for hazard maps or information on special
soil types in the locality if unfamiliar with the area.
ht
2.3.6 Compaction standards for fill material

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
The standard of compaction and method of determination shall be as set out in NZS 4431.
Where NZS 4431 is not applicable, the methods and standards of compaction shall be
specified by the geo-professional.
py
C2.3.6
Co
Commercial and industrial developments often have specialised requirements for fill
materials and compaction. In these cases the requirements of NZS 4431 may not
be applicable. The geo-professional should set the fill standards and procedures for
these developments.
50
NZS 4404:2010
2.3.7 Erosion, sediment, and dust control
2.3.7.1 Minimisation of effects
*
Earthworks shall be designed and constructed in such a way as to minimise soil erosion
and sediment discharge. Where necessary, permanent provision shall be made to control
d
erosion and sediment discharge from the area of the earthworks.
n
Generation of dust during and after the earthworks operation shall be considered during
ala
the planning and design phase. If necessary, specific measures shall be incorporated to
control dust.
Ze
C2.3.7.1
Most LAs have requirements for erosion, sediment, and dust control or these will be
set in resource consents for the project. Such conditions should be referred to and
ew
taken into account in the early stages of planning a project.
2.3.7.2 Protection measures

sN
Where surface water could cause batter erosion or internal instability through infiltration
into the soil, open interceptor drains shall be constructed in permanent materials, and
benches in batter faces should be sloped back and graded longitudinally and transversely
rd
to reduce spillage of stormwater over the batter.
Water from stormwater systems shall be prevented from flowing into fill or into natural
da
99954
118.92.13.10
ground near the toe or sides of the fill.
No stormwater or wastewater soakage systems shall be constructed in fill or natural ground

an
which could impair the stability of the ground.
Protection measures shall include the following as appropriate:

St
(a) Erosion control mechanisms:

(i) Temporary drains to be constructed at the toe of steep slopes to intercept
ht
surface run-off and to lead away for treatment where required before discharge
to a stable watercourse or pipe stormwater system
(ii) Surface water to be diverted away from or prevented from discharging over
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
batter faces and other areas of bare earth by bunds formed to intercept surface
run-off and treated where required prior to discharge through stable channels
or pipes, preferably into stable watercourses or piped stormwater systems
py
(iii) The upper surface of fills to be shaped and compacted with rubber-tyred or
smooth-wheeled plant when rain is impending, or when the site is to be left
Co
unattended to minimise water infiltration

(iv) The completed battered surfaces of fills to be topsoiled and vegetated, or
otherwise resurfaced to reduce run-off velocities
(v) Control of erosion and sediment discharge may require planting, environmental
matting, hydroseeding, drainage channels, or similar measures at an early
stage in the earthworks construction phase
(vi) Dust control may require frequent watering during construction along with
establishment of the permanent surface at an early stage in the construction
phase; ➤
51
NZS 4404:2010
(b) Sediment management devices:

(i) The surfaces of fills and cuts to be graded to prevent ponding
*
(ii) Sediment traps and retention ponds to be constructed where they are
necessary. These should be cleaned out, as required, to ensure that adequate
d
sediment storage is maintained, with appropriate plans for decommissioning
n
(iii) Temporary barriers or silt fences using silt control geotextiles, to be used to
reduce flow velocities and to trap sediment
ala
(iv) Sections of natural ground to be left unstripped to act as grass (or other
vegetation) filters for run-off from adjacent areas.
Ze
2.3.8 Seismic considerations
The geo-professional shall consider the seismic effects on earth fills, slopes, and liquefiable
ground and shall take these into account in design and construction of any development
ew
in accordance with the scale of the development.
2.4 Approval of proposed works

sN
The approval process for land development and subdivision design and construction shall
be in accordance with section 1 of this Standard. Land stability assessments and the
design and control of earthworks require approval from the LAs.
rd
2.5 Construction
da
99954
Earthworks shall be carried out to the standards detailed in the approved specifications and
118.92.13.10
drawings, and any requirements in a regional or district plan or consent issued by the LA.
an
The construction control testing shall be carried out by a testing laboratory or competent
person under the control of the geo-professional, and to the recognised testing standards
St
as deemed appropriate.
The testing laboratory shall have recognised registration or quality assurance qualifications.
ht
2.6 Final documentation

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
2.6.1 Geotechnical completion report

For all developments where a geo-professional is engaged the geo-professional shall
submit a geotechnical completion report to the developer and the TA accompanied by a
py
statement of professional opinion as set out in Schedule 2A. The geotechnical report shall
identify any specific design requirements which would necessitate the building design
Co
deviating from NZS 3604.
The expected level of site movement from reactive soil (expansive soils) under AS 2870:1996
shall be identified by their respective class and included in the geotechnical completion
report. The soil properties used in determining the class are to be recorded in the report.
The site subsoil class to the provisions of NZS 1170.5 section 3 and NZS 1170.5 Supp 1
C3.1.3 shall be identified in the geotechnical completion report.
52
NZS 4404:2010
The report shall describe the extent of inspection, revisit and review all inferences and
assumptions made during the investigation, assess the results of testing and state the
geo-professional’s professional opinion on the compliance of the development with the
*
standards set by the geo-professional. The report shall also include all geotechnical reports
d
prepared for the development.
n
Documentation on the testing of the soils for compaction shall be included in the geotechnical
completion report. This documentation should clearly show the areas in which compaction
ala
met the required standards, as well as any areas requiring retesting, and areas which did
not meet the standards.
Ze
For developments where there are no earthworks the geotechnical completion report will
comprise the geotechnical assessment report. For large or more complex developments
where there may have been several stages of geotechnical reporting, all prior reports
covering the subject area of land under certification shall be included in the geotechnical
ew
completion report. The geotechnical completion report shall identify areas that provide
good ground as defined in NZS 3604. Those areas that require specific design for stability
and foundation design shall also be noted.
2.6.2 As-built drawings for earthworks and subsoil drains

sN
Where earthworks have occurred, an as-built plan shall be prepared showing finished
contours. The plans shall also show original contours where earthworks have occurred
rd
to illustrate the extent and depth of cuts and fills. Alternative methods of representing
earthwork depths may be acceptable including plans showing lines joining all points of equal
da
99954
118.92.13.10
depth of cut and fill at appropriate vertical intervals. The as-built plans shall also record the
position, type, and size of all subsoil drains and their outlets, and show any areas of fill or
natural ground which the geo-professional considers do not comply with this Standard or
an
areas where the standards have been varied from the original construction specification.
These plans shall be made available to the TA and the developer in conjunction with the
St
geotechnical completion report.

ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
53
NZS 4404:2010
SCHEDULE 2A
STATEMENT OF PROFESSIONAL OPINION ON SUITABILITY OF LAND FOR BUILDING
*
CONSTRUCTION
d
Development .........................................................................................
n
Developer .........................................................................................
ala
Location .......................................................................................................
I ........................................................................ of ...............................................................................................
(Full name) (Name and address of firm)
Ze
Hereby confirm that:
1. I am a geo-professional as defined in clause 1.2.2 of NZS 4404:2010 and was retained by the developer as the
geo-professional on the above development.
ew
2. The extent of my preliminary investigations are described in my Report(s) number .................................,
dated ............................., and the conclusions and recommendations of that/those document(s) have
been re-evaluated in the preparation of this report. The extent of my inspections during construction, and
sN
the results of all tests and/or re-evaluations carried out are as described in my geotechnical completion
report dated ...............................
3. In my professional opinion, not to be construed as a guarantee, I consider that (delete as appropriate):

rd
(a) The earth fills shown on the attached Plan No...................... have been placed in compliance with the
requirements of the ...................................................................... Council and my specification.
da
(b) The completed works take into account land slope and foundation stability considerations, subject to
99954
118.92.13.10
the appended foundation recommendations and earthworks restrictions, (which should be read in
conjunction with the appended final site contour plan).
an
(c) Subject to 3(a) and 3(b) of this Schedule, the original ground not affected by filling is suitable for the
erection of buildings designed according to NZS 3604 provided that:
St
(i)..........................................................................................................................................................
(ii).........................................................................................................................................................
ht
(d) Subject to 3(a) and 3(b) of this Schedule, the filled ground is suitable for the erection of buildings
designed according to NZS 3604 provided that:
(i)..........................................................................................................................................................
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(ii).........................................................................................................................................................
(e) The original ground not affected by filling and the filled ground are not subject to erosion, subsidence,
py
or slippage in accordance with the provisions of section 106 of the Resource Management Act 1991
provided that:
(i)..........................................................................................................................................................
Co
(ii).........................................................................................................................................................
NOTE – These subclauses may be deleted or added to as appropriate, to include such considerations as expansive soils
where excluded from NZS 3604, and site seismic characteristics as covered in clause 3.1.3 of NZS 1170.5.
54
NZS 4404:2010
4. This professional opinion is furnished to the TA and the developer for their purposes alone on the express
condition that it will not be relied upon by any other person and does not remove the necessity for the
*
normal inspection of foundation conditions at the time of erection of any building.
d
5. This certificate shall be read in conjunction with my geotechnical report referred to in clause 2 above and
shall not be copied or reproduced except in conjunction with the full geotechnical completion report.
n
ala
Signed........................................................... Date.................................................
......................................................................
Ze
......................................................................
......................................................................
ew
Copyright waived
sN
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
55
NZS 4404:2010
3 ROADS
3.1 Scope
*
This section sets out requirements for the design and construction of roads for land
d
development and subdivision. Section 3 provides engineering design and construction
n
solutions for most situations.
ala
3.2 General
3.2.1 Objective
Ze
The objective is to provide roads that are safe for all road users and designed to the context
of their environment. Roads shall be capable of carrying all utility services underground,
provide for the management of stormwater, and contribute to quality urban design.
ew
3.2.2 Related Standards and guidelines

A selection of currently available documents which provide an appropriate basis for road
sN
design is set out in Referenced Documents. Related Documents lists additional material
that may be useful. These are not exclusive. Other Standards, guidelines, and design
responses may be used where appropriate and accepted by the TA.
rd
3.2.3 Road purpose
Roads serve a number of purposes that enhance quality of life in neighbourhoods, towns,
da
and cities; improve opportunities for business in commercial areas; and meet a range of
99954
118.92.13.10
local, regional, and national goals for access, mobility, and land use.
an
Roads serve the following functions:
(a) A place for access and interaction, including:

St
(i) Providing for human interaction

(ii) Facilitating commerce and business
(iii) Enabling access to buildings, lots, and public spaces
ht
(iv) Parking;
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(b) A link for connection and movement of people and goods including the following
user groups:
(i) Pedestrians
py
(ii) Cyclists
(iii) Public transport
Co
(iv) Freight and goods vehicles

(v) Private motor vehicles
(vi) Other modes which are not vehicles;
56
NZS 4404:2010
(c) A corridor for utility and amenity infrastructure, including:

(i) Stormwater treatment and conveyance
*
(ii) Road lighting
(iii) Landscaping and street furniture
d
(iv) Utility services
n
(v) Signals, signs, and markings
ala
(vi) Safety, convenience, and crime prevention.
3.2.4 Place and link context
Ze
The two fundamental roles of a road are to provide a space for interaction between people for
a range of purposes and access to land uses so that movement between places can occur.
3.2.4.1 Place context
ew
Place context is defined for both the specific land use served and the broader area type
in which it is located.
sN
The land use characteristic is defined according to the description of predominant activities
in individual areas. Descriptions include live, play, shop, work, and learn, in addition to
activities associated with growing, manufacturing, and transporting goods and products.
rd
Table 3.1 describes the relationship between land use, area type, and transport context.
Table 3.1 should be used as a guide for decision-making on transport infrastructure and
da
99954
118.92.13.10
services. This table addresses:
(a) Geographic area: Four area types are identified to establish the context of place:
rural, suburban, urban, and centre.
an
(b) Land use: Four land use types are identified: live and play (residential and parks),
shop and trade (retail and services), work and learn (offices and schools), and make,
St
grow, and move (agricultural, industrial, and warehouses).

(c) Transport: As a matrix, the area context and land use classification system describe
sixteen individual place contexts that indicate the types, times, intensity, and mode
ht
of trips that can be expected to occur in neighbourhoods. This land use framework
describes the typical elements of road links that are to accommodate the needs of
rig
3
09
29
80
the expected users.

80
00
16
py
Co
57
Table 3.1 – Land use and area type matrix describing typical place and transport context
58
LAND USE AREA TYPE
RURAL SUBURBAN URBAN CENTRE
118.92.13.10
99954
LIVE AND PLAY Low density, generally no Low and moderate density Moderate and high density Moderate and high density
NZS 4404:2010
(Residential and parks) more than 4 units per hectare housing generally up to housing often in combination housing often in combination
Co
located outside the urban 15 units per hectare in an with other uses such that with other uses such that
Homes, home-based businesses, and
limits. area where housing is the combined population of combined population of
mixed use developments with residential
py
exclusive or dominant use. residents, employees, and residents, employees, and
uses, as well as parks and low impact Transport: Private motor
vehicles are the predominant students is typically 50 per students is typically 200 per
recreation. Transport: Private vehicles
form of transport with low trip hectare or greater. hectare or greater.
rig
are the predominant form of
Transport: These land uses primarily volumes throughout the day. transport but public transport Transport: A higher portion Transport: Residents typically
generate home-based and internal circulation
should provide peak period of trips are made on public walk or cycle to nearby
trips (recreation, social, school, and retail).
ht
service on arterials and transport and by walking and destinations and rely on
Home-based work trips are concentrated at
connector/collectors. Non- cycling. There is lower priority public transport for longer
peak periods, while other types of trips are
motorised trips are primarily for the provision of residential trips, and they may choose not
St
dispersed across time periods. Streets to
recreational and occur on local parking in urban areas. to own a vehicle. Provision
these land uses prioritise recreation walking
roads. for residential and commuter
an
and cycling over vehicle movement.
parking is a low priority in
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
centres.
da
rd
SHOP AND TRADE Isolated or small clusters Includes both traditional town Retail and services focused in Moderate to high density
(Retail and services) of stores or service-based centres and newer shopping a town centre or concentrated land uses include retail
sN
businesses located outside centres of generally 1-2 along an urban corridor in mixed with other uses in
Retail or other service where most trips to
the urban limits. storeys where the dominant combination with other uses. an urban or town centre.
the business are by customers and clients,
ew
use is retail and services The combined population of Centres typically have, or are
rather than employees. Transport: Most trips are made
in private motor vehicles with businesses and the combined residents, employees, and planned to have, a combined
Transport: A large volume of destination retail and commercial floor- students is typically 50 per population of residents,
low trip volumes throughout
trips occur across time periods, especially to-area ratio (FAR) is typically hectare or greater. employees, and students of
the day.
Ze
weekends and peak shopping times to these under 0.3 (gross). 200 per hectare or greater.
land uses. A low-to-moderate volume of Transport: Trips are made on
freight truck traffic is served. Streetscapes Transport: Most trips are made a variety of modes at all times Transport: Public transport
ala
may serve as connections for destination in private motor vehicles with with limited amounts of shared
n services are typically focused
users to reach several or numerous moderate and high trip volumes, and paid parking. on centres, and centres
businesses in the area. especially on weekends,
requiring these land uses to
d
are among the most highly
connected and walkable
have large amounts of parking
allocated to each site.
*
environments. Provision for
parking is the lowest land use
priority in centres.
Table 3.1 – Land use and area type matrix describing typical place and transport context (continued)
LAND USE AREA TYPE

RURAL SUBURBAN URBAN CENTRE
118.92.13.10
99954
WORK AND LEARN Individual or small clusters of Low rise office buildings Low and mid-rise office Mid-rise and high-rise office
(Offices and schools) activities located outside the (typically 1-2 storeys) and buildings that often include buildings that usually include
Co
urban limits, such as school school campuses with an street-front retail and services mixed uses, including street-
Areas dominated by businesses or
campuses and research area wide average FAR of focused in a town centre or front retail and multi-family
schools where the most important trips
py
facilities. less than 0.3, including any concentrated along an urban housing. Centres typically
to the business are made by employees
retail component. corridor. The combined have, or are planned to have,
(typically offices) and students. Transport: Most trips are made
population of residents, a combined population of
rig
in private motor vehicles with Transport: Most trips are
Transport: A large volume of destination employees, and students is residents, employees, and
most trips occurring during peak made in private motor vehicles
trips occur at peak periods on weekdays. A typically 50 per hectare or students of 200 per hectare
periods. during peak periods, requiring
ht
low-to-moderate volume of freight truck greater. or greater.
these land uses to have large
traffic is served. Streetscapes may serve as
amounts of parking allocated to Transport: Trips are made on Transport: Public transport
connections for a variety of users, especially
each site.
St
during lunch periods as well as other times a variety of modes at all times services are typically focused
when clients or customers may visit work with limited amounts of shared on centres, and centres
an
places. Roads near schools will require and paid parking. are among the most highly
16
connected and walkable
00
80
special design needs to accommodate
80
29
09
3
younger pedestrians. environments. Provision for
da
parking is the lowest land use
priority in centres.
rd
sN
MAKE, GROW, AND MOVE Farms, light industry, and Industrial parks. Would not normally occur Would not normally occur
(Agricultural, industrial, and warehouses) warehouses located outside except where activities have except where activities have
Transport: Road links are
the urban limits.
ew
little impact on or otherwise little impact on or otherwise
Areas dominated by businesses where the predominantly designed
to accommodate freight support surrounding land support surrounding land
most important trips to the business are Transport: Road links are
predominantly designed truck movements and those uses. uses.
made by heavy delivery trucks (typically
to accommodate freight generated by employees and
Ze
farms, warehouses, and industries).
truck movements and those business customers. Parking
Transport: A moderate-to-large volume of generated by employees and may also be provided for
freight trips occur (year around or seasonally) business customers, Special some employees, and special
ala
and should be accommodated in the road vehicle areas may be provided vehicle areas may be provided n
link network. Streetscapes are designed to accommodate specialised to accommodate specialised d
to accommodate heavy freight movements. freight needs. freight needs
Where these are larger in number and need *
to be served, the freight, link function is
crucial to service the land use function.
59
NZS 4404:2010
NZS 4404:2010
3.2.4.2 Link context

Link context is classified by the extent of access and the degree of through movement
intended to be served. This Standard includes three levels of link context:
*
(a) Lane: A road that provides very high local access and very limited though movement
d
connectivity. Very low vehicle speeds with shared pedestrian and vehicle access
n
predominate;
(b) Local road: A road that provides access and connectivity for a local area. Low vehicle
ala
speeds, pedestrian and local amenity values predominate;
(c) Connector/collector road: A road that provides circulation in local areas and links to
arterial roads, while balancing this with pedestrian and local amenity values. Higher
Ze
vehicle speeds and access for all modes of transport including public transport
predominate.
ew
C3.2.4.2
Arterial roads and motorways are not included in this Standard. These roads are subject
to specific design standards to be agreed with the road controlling authority to ensure
sN
through movement connectivity associated with the broader sector in which such roading
is located. The following descriptions are included for information:
(a) Minor arterial road: A road that provides access between connector/collector and
rd
major arterial roads. Minor arterial roads have a dominant through vehicular
movement and carry the major public transport routes. Access to property may
be restricted and rear servicing facilities may be required. Urban traffic volumes
da
are typically 8,000 vpd to 20,000 vpd and rural from 1,000 to 5,000 vpd with a
99954
118.92.13.10
higher proportion of heavy vehicles. Typical urban operating speeds are 40 to

an
60 km/h and rural 80 to 100 km/h.
(b) Major arterial road: A road that provides interconnections between major sectors
St
of a large area linked with external areas and distributes traffic from major intercity
links. Access is generally at grade but may be limited. Urban traffic volumes are
typically greater than 20,000 vpd and rural 5,000 vpd with a significant number
of heavy vehicles. Typical urban operating speeds are 50 to 70 km/h and rural
ht
80 to 100 km/h.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(c) Motorway: Motorways have the highest link function and have no frontage access.
Typical operating speed is 100 km/h.
py
3.2.5 Network connectivity

Well-connected networks (roads and other links) are achieved with smaller block sizes
Co
and regular connections. Network connectivity shall be designed to achieve:
(a) Shorter travel distances;

(b) An increased number of alternative routes for all types of users;
(c) Increased opportunity for interaction;
(d) Improved access to public transport, cycling and walking networks, and access to
destinations.
60
NZS 4404:2010
Development design shall ensure connectivity to properties and roads that have been
developed, or that have the potential to be developed in the future. The design process
should ensure the following maximum walking distances from a lot to a connector/
*
collector or arterial road:
d
(a) Rural: No maximum distance. The design should maximise future connectivity to
a suburban network;
n
(b) Suburban: 400 m. A shorter distance shall be considered near centres and major
ala
public transport routes;
(c) Urban: 300 m;
Ze
(d) Centre: 200 m.
Where factors, such as topography or barriers, limit the ability to achieve the network
connectivity standard, the designer shall optimise network connectivity and access to the
ew
maximum extent practical. The designer shall maximise connectivity to existing development.
3.2.6 Design and access statement
sN
A design and access statement shall be submitted with the application for design approval.
The statement shall cover all relevant aspects of 3.2 and 3.3 of this Standard and specifically
address:
(a) Road dimensions and layout;

rd
(b) Link and place functions;

da
99954
118.92.13.10
(c) Connectivity;
(d) How target operating speeds will be achieved;
(e) How LID principles have been considered for stormwater run-off from the roads.
an
In addition a design and access statement shall evaluate the effects of the proposed
development at its ultimate extent (and staged, where applicable) on the surrounding
St
communities and transportation network.

ht
C3.2.6
Design and access statements allow the basis of the road design to be independently
reviewed, and should be sufficient to illustrate the reasons for the design selections.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
3.2.7 Road safety audit

py
Proposals that provide for new roads to vest in the TA should be subject to the NZTA Road
safety audit procedures for projects unless the TA decides that audits are not required
at any or all of the stages. The developer’s professional advisor may recommend that
Co
audits are not required at any or all of the stages and complete an ‘exemption declaration’
as described in the procedures and submit it as part of the application process to be
considered by the TA. The ‘exemption declaration’ shall be prepared by a suitably qualified
road safety auditor.
Safety audits should cover all road users, including the needs of pedestrians, cyclists,
and disabled/elderly users. Where appropriate, the requirements of these groups may
demand specific audit procedures.
61
NZS 4404:2010
3.3 Design
3.3.1 Design requirements
*
Table 3.2 should be used as the basis for road design. Road widths shall be selected to
d
ensure that adequate movement lanes, footpaths, berms, and batters can be provided to
retain amenity values (including landscaping) and enable utility services to be provided
n
safely and in economically accessible locations. Road widths shall be planned to cope
ala
with estimated long-term community needs even though construction may be carried out
only to shorter-term requirements.
Alternative carriageway widths may be adopted to suit particular design considerations.
Ze
These shall be subject to specific design consideration and approval by the TA. Such
cross sections may include landscaped features, painted median facilities, or variations
to parking provision. Carriageways should avoid widths of 5.7 m to 7.2 m and 7.5 m to
ew
9.0 m where these widths may cause confusion between movement and parking functions.
C3.3.1
sN
In the case of a rear access lane, the concept relies heavily on minimal garage setback
from the lane frontage. Rear access lanes are required to provide for manoeuvring for
access to/from garages. Where the garages are located on or close to the lane edge
the manoeuvring requirement may necessitate a wider lane dimension or increased
rd
setback. In this sense, a key function of the lane is to operate akin to an aisle within
a car parking area and needs to be designed accordingly. A single lane sealed width
da
99954
with widening at the garage locations for turning is the minimum requirement. Sealing
the entire lane increases opportunities for the lane to be used in a social sense. It is
118.92.13.10
therefore desirable for the entire lane to be sealed, although a narrow berm for services
an
may be necessary.
There are three carriageway types. These are:

St
(a) A width in the range 5.5 m – 5.7 m providing for ability to park on one side of the
road and one through lane, or alternatively two through lanes. This is often not
defined at the engineering stage and is instead left to road users to choose. This
ht
type of road is provided for in the standard and is typically appropriate for shorter
streets of up to approximately 250 m, to assist with achieving a slower operating
speed.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(b) A width in the range of 7.2 m – 7.5 m providing an ability for either two parked
cars and one through movement, or one parked car and two through movements.
py
This is typically not defined through the provision of parking bays although it may
be. There may be cases in lower parking demand situations where this width is
achieved with varied pinch points to provide a road with two through lanes and
Co
a parking bay.
(c) A width in the range 9.0 m – 9.5 m providing ability for two through lanes and two
parking lanes. Depending on parking demand this can either be achieved with
landscaping such as tree boxes/pits and recessed parking, or by maintaining full
flexibility with a straight edge.
62
NZS 4404:2010
The designer shall consider the environment, purpose, and function of the road being
designed. In developing a design cross section the designer shall consider the relationships
between speed, parking and its frequency, and the shared or recessed nature of parking
*
in the movement lanes. In general a wider standard total carriageway cross section can
d
be developed where parking is shared in the movement lane, however if this is not a
frequent occurrence then the outcome will be an unnecessarily wide road and the target
n
speed outcome will not be achieved without other managed intervention. Where parking
ala
is less frequent, consideration shall be given to narrowing the travelling carriageway and
recessing the parking or to introducing landscaping into the carriageway to reduce the
appearance of apparent formed width. Where the designer proposes to develop a shared
street design that varies from that shown in table 3.2, a full description and assessment
Ze
of the frequency and extent of interactions of this nature shall be described in the design
and access statement.
Roads shall be designed to account for stormwater and keep potential groundwater below
ew
structural pavement layers. On rural roads, side drains or swales shall be provided to carry
stormwater and keep potential groundwater below structural pavement layers. All roads,
including footpaths and cycleways, shall be adequately drained in accordance with good
sN
engineering practice. Roads also have the potential to provide stormwater ponding and
overland flow paths when the primary system is overloaded (see 4.3.4.2).
In soils of adequate permeability and favourable topography, the use of low impact design
rd
soakage systems and devices shall be considered to provide benefits of attenuating peak
flows and improving run-off quality. For detailed design criteria for soakage systems and
da
99954
118.92.13.10
devices see 3.3.19.5, 4.3.7.6, and 4.3.7.9.
Any design should be coordinated with the relevant landscape design requirements
an
covered in section 7.
Table 3.2 should be read in conjunction with 3.3.1.1 to 3.3.1.10.

St
3.3.1.1
A movement lane may include a single lane operating in a one-way configuration or in two
ht
directions. Normal camber is 3%. Maximum super elevation is 6%.

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
3.3.1.2
No more than one movement lane in each direction is typical. Streets in urban areas and
centres may include a single movement lane operating as a one-way street.
py
3.3.1.3
Each parking/passing area should be a minimum 2.1 x 6 m, and a loading area a minimum
Co
2.5 x 12 m, each with appropriate entry and departure tapers outside of the movement
lane. Provision is to be made on one lane two way carriageways for passing every 50 m
and at corners.
3.3.1.4
Where not shown in the table cyclists shall be provided with separate movement lanes if
identified in a local or regional cycle network.
63
NZS 4404:2010
3.3.1.5
Side and rear access should not be the primary access.
*
3.3.1.6
d
Shoulder widths on rural roads need to be assessed for each project based on the speed
n
environment of the area and terrain. For high speed environments where high non-motorised
use is expected, shoulder widths may need to be increased to optimise overall road safety.
ala
3.3.1.7
Minimum gradient is 0.4%. Maximum gradients shall be as indicated in the table. Steeper
Ze
gradients may be acceptable for shorter lengths of road in hilly country or low overall speed
environments subject to TA approval.
ew
3.3.1.8
In some circumstances an increased overall road reserve may be necessary for utilities
provision or increased amenity, landscape or urban design element. Specific design
sN
shall be undertaken and agreed with the territorial authority where road reserves are to
be reduced. In other circumstances, reserve widths may be reduced if a one way road,
or development is on one side of the road
rd
3.3.1.9
All carriageways shall be sealed for the first 10 m from the intersection with another road.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
3.3.1.10
Where the gradient of a public road is steeper than 12.5%, a resolution of the TA or a
an
District Plan allowance is required. Refer to s. 329 (road gradients) of the Local Government
Act 1974.
St
NOTE – The typical plan and cross section images in table 3.2 are also set out in Appendix E.
Copyright on these is waived.
ht
3.3.2 Road geometric design
3.3.2.1 Design parameters

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Roads shall be designed to accepted standards generally satisfied by table 3.2 of this
Standard or the use of the relevant Austroads guides, and guides listed in Referenced
Documents and Related Documents for other facilities.
py
3.3.2.2 Sight distance

Co
All roads shall be designed with sight distances that match the target operating speed.
Reducing a driver’s field of vision in conjunction with other design and management
measures is a recognised method for achieving an appropriate speed environment (see 3.3.5).
On connector/collector and arterial roads, sight distance criteria at intersections as well

as for stopping, overtaking, on curves, and to avoid obstructions should be applied in
accordance with the relevant Austroads or NZTA guides.
64
NZS 4404:2010
3.3.2.3 Widening on horizontal curves

In some areas the developed road geometry may be constrained, horizontal alignments
may involve low radius, or the proportion of commercial vehicles may predominate, such as
*
in a make and move environment. In such instances, movement lanes shall be assessed
d
to determine the need for localised additional width, for example on low radius horizontal
curves where the passage of vehicles has the potential to reduce safety. The Austroads
n
Guide to road design – Part 3: Geometric design provides useful guidance on this.
ala
Ze
ew
sN
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
65
Table 3.2 – Road design standards
66
PLACE CONTEXT DESIGN ENVIRONMENT LINK CONTEXT
Area Land Local Locality Target Min. Max. Pedestrians Passing, parking, Cyclists Movement Classification TYPICAL PLAN AND
use attributes served operating road grade loading, and lane
CROSS SECTION
118.92.13.10
speed width shoulder (excluding
99954
NZS 4404:2010
(km/h) (m) shoulder)

SEE APPENDIX E FOR LARGER VERSION
Co
Notes See 3.2.4, See table 3.1 See table 3.1 See 3.3.5 See 1.2.2, See 3.3.11 See 3.3.6 & 3.3.1.4 See 3.3.1.5, 3.3.7, & See 1.2.2, 3.3.1.1, See 3.2.4.2 &
OF FIGURES
table 3.1 & 3.3.1.9, & 3.3.11.2 3.3.1.2, 3.3.1.3, 3.3.16 (Typical max.
FIGURE NUMBER
3.3.1.6 3.4.16 3.3.1.10, 3.3.11.3 volumes)

py
Access to 1 to 6 du 20 6 20% Shared Allow for passing Shared 2.50 Lane
lifestyle or (on shoulder up to every 50 m, (in movement (this would
rig
clustered and berm) total shoulder lane) normally be a
housing 0.5 m, sealed private road
or private
E1
ht
way)
Live and play

St
an
16
00
80
Access to 1 to 20 du 30 9
80
16% Shared Total shoulder Shared 5.5 - 5.7 Lane
29
09
3
lifestyle or (on shoulder 0.5 m, sealed (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
da
clustered and berm) lane)
housing
rd
E2
Live and play

sN
ew
Rural (3.3.1.7, 3.3.1.8, & 3.3.1.9)

Access to 1 to 150 du 70 15 12.5% Shared Total shoulder Shared 5.5 - 5.7 Local road
housing (on shoulder 1.0 m, sealed (in movement (~ 1000 vpd)
Ze
and berm) shoulder 0.5 m lane)
E3
ala
n
Live and play

d
*
Table 3.2 (continued)

speed width shoulder (excluding CROSS SECTION
See table 3.1 See table 3.1 See 3.3.5 See 1.2.2, See 3.3.11 See 3.3.6 & 3.3.1.4 See 3.3.1.5, 3.3.7, & See 1.2.2, 3.3.1.1, See 3.2.4.2 &
118.92.13.10
99954
Notes See 3.2.4, OF FIGURES
FIGURE NUMBER
3.3.1.6 3.4.16 3.3.1.10, 3.3.11.3 volumes)

Co
Side or Up to 100 m 10 6 16% Shared Allow for passing Shared 2.75 - 3.00 Lane
rear service in length (in movement up to every 50 m. (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
py
access between lane) Kerbed edge or lane)
streets, 1 to total shoulder
rig
20 lots 0.5 m, sealed
E4
Shop and trade

ht
St
Access to Rural village 40 15 10% 1.5 m each Parking and Shared 5.5 - 5.7 Local road
an
trade shops side loading may (in movement (~ 1,000 vpd)
16
00
80
80
occur in the lane)
29
09
3
da
movement lane
or be separate
E5
and recessed.
rd
See 3.3.6. Kerbed
Shop and trade

edge or total
sN
shoulder 1.0 m,
sealed shoulder
0.5 m
ew
Rural (3.3.1.7, 3.3.1.8, & 3.3.1.9)

Primary Rural up to 20 10% 1.5 m each Total shoulder On sealed 5.5 - 5.7 Local road
freight access activities 100 side 1.0 m, sealed shoulder (~ 1,000 vpd)
shoulder 0.5 m where it is a
Ze
local authority
defined cycle
E6
route
ala
Make and move

n d
*
67
NZS 4404:2010
68
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
OF FIGURES
FIGURE NUMBER
Co
3.3.1.6 3.4.16 3.3.1.10, 3.3.11.3 volumes)
Access to 1 to 200 lots up to 60 20 10% 1.5 m each Parking and On sealed 5.5 - 5.7 Local road
py
office and side loading may occur shoulder (~ 1,000 vpd)
education in movement lane where it is a
or be separate local authority
rig
and recessed. defined cycle
E7
Refer clause 3.3.6. route

Total shoulder
ht
Make and move

1.0 m, sealed
shoulder 0.5 m
St
All (serving - up to 20 10% Separate Total shoulder On sealed 5.5 - 5.7 Connector/
an
land uses 100 from the 1.5 m, sealed shoulder collector
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
not specified carriageway, shoulder 1.0 m where it is a (~ 2,500 vpd)
da
elsewhere in 1.5 m each local authority
this table) side defined cycle
E8
rd
Rural (3.3.1.7, 3.3.1.8, & 3.3.1.9)

route
specified elsewhere)
sN
All other situations (where not

Access to 1 to 3 du 10 3.6 m 20% Shared Allow for passing Shared 2.75 - 3.0
ew Lane
houses/ or for up to (in movement up to every 50 m (in movement (this would
townhouses 1 to 6 du 3 du lane) lane) normally be a
or private road
Ze
4.5 m or private
E9
for up to way)
Suburban
Live and play
6 du
ala
n d
Table 3.2 (continued) *

118.92.13.10
99954
OF FIGURES
FIGURE NUMBER
Co
3.3.1.6 3.4.16 3.3.1.10, 3.3.11.3 volumes)
Side or Up to 100 m 10 6 16% Shared Allow for passing Shared 2.75 - 3.00 Lane
rear service in length (in movement up to every 50 m (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
py
access between lane) lane)
streets,
rig
1 to 20 lots
E10
Live and play

ht
St
Access to 1 to 20 du 20 9 16% Shared Shared Shared 5.5 - 5.7 Lane
an
houses/ (in movement (in movement (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
townhouses lane) lane) lane)
da
E11
rd
Suburban
Live and play
sN
Primary 1 to 200 du 40 15 12.5% 1.5 m one Shared parking Shared 5.5 - 5.7
ew Local road
access to side or in the movement (in movement (~ 2,000 vpd)
housing 1.5 m each lane up to 100 du, lane)
side where separate parking
Ze
more than required over
E12
20 du or 100 du
Live and play

more than
ala
100 m in n
length d
69
NZS 4404:2010
70
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
OF FIGURES
FIGURE NUMBER
Co
3.3.1.6 3.4.16 3.3.1.10, 3.3.11.3 volumes)
Primary Up to 800 du 50 20 10% 2.0 m each Parking is Separate 2 x 4.2 Connector/

py
access to side separate and provision collector
housing recessed. where local (~ 8,000 vpd)
See 3.3.6. Public authority
rig
transport is likely defined cycle
E13
(see clause route
Live and play

3.3.1.4, 3.3.1.5)
ht
St
Side or Suburban 10 6 10% Shared Recessed Shared 3.5 Lane
an
rear service village, (in movement loading bays in (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
access access to lane) accordance with lane)
da
office and 3.3.6
education,
E14
rd
learn
1 - 20 lots
Suburban
sN
Shop and trade, work and

Access Suburban 40 18 10% 3.0 m each Parking and Shared 5.5 - 5.7
ew Local road
to trade, village side loading bays both (in movement (~ 2,000 vpd)
office and 1 - 200 lots sides may be in lane)
education the movement
Ze
lane or recessed.
E15
learn
See 3.3.6
ala
n
Shop and trade, work and

d

118.92.13.10
99954
OF FIGURES
FIGURE NUMBER
Co
3.3.1.6 3.4.16 3.3.1.10, 3.3.11.3 volumes)
Side or rear Industrial 10 11 10% Separate Loading bays Shared 3.5 Lane
py
freight access area footpath one shall be separate (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
side and recessed. lane)
See 3.3.6
rig
E16
ht
Make and move

St
Primary Industrial 40 18 10% 1.5 m each Parking and Shared 2 x 4.2 Local road
an
freight access area side loading bays both (in movement (~2,000 vpd)
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
sides may be in lane)
da
the movement
lane or recessed.
E17
See 3.3.6
rd
Suburban
Make and move
sN
ew
All, roads All, or 50 23 10% 2.5 m each Parking separate Separate 2 x 4.2 Connector/
serving combinations side, 3.5 m and recessed. provision collector
multi-purpose of these land each side for See 3.3.6. Public where local (~ 8,000 vpd)
areas uses shop and transport is likely authority
Ze
involving trade, work (see 3.3.1.4, defined cycle
most or all of and learn 3.3.1.5) route
E18
the indicated
ala
make and move

land uses, n
not specified d
elsewhere in
Shop and trade, work and learn,

this table. *
71
NZS 4404:2010
72
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
OF FIGURES
FIGURE NUMBER
Co
3.3.1.6 3.4.16 3.3.1.10, 3.3.11.3 volumes)
Access to 1 to 3 du or 10 3.6 m 20% Shared Allow for passing Shared 2.75 - 3.0 Lane
py
lifestyle or 1 to 6 du for up (in movement up to every 50 m (in movement (this would
clustered to 3 du lane) lane) normally be a
housing or 4.5 m private road
rig
for up to or private
E19
6 du way)
Live and play

ht
St
Side or 1 to 20 du 10 6 16% Shared Parking is required Shared 2.75 - 3.00 Lane
an
rear service (in movement and shall be (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
access lane) separate and lane)
da
recessed
E20
rd
Urban
Live and play
sN
Access to 1 to 20 du 20 9 16% Shared Shared Shared 5.5 - 5.7
ew Lane
houses / (in movement (in movement (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
townhouses lane) lane) lane)
Ze
E21
Live and play

ala
n d

118.92.13.10
99954
OF FIGURES
FIGURE NUMBER
3.3.1.6 3.4.16 3.3.1.10, 3.3.11.3 volumes)

Co
Primary 1 to 200 du 30 15 12.5% 1.5 m one Parking may Shared 5.5 - 5.7 Local road
access to side or 1.5 m occur in the (in movement (~ 2,000 vpd)
py
housing both sides movement lane lane)
where more or be separate
rig
than 20 du and recessed.
E22
or more than See 3.3.6
Live and play

100 m in
ht
Stlength
All other land All 50 20 10% 2.0 m each Parking separate Separate 2 x 4.2 Connector/
an
use activity side and recessed. provision collector
16
00
80
80
29
09
types within See 3.3.6. Public where local (~ 8,000 vpd)
3
da
this area type transport is likely authority
not specified (see 3.3.1.4, defined cycle
E23
elsewhere in 3.3.1.5)
rd
route
Urban
Live and play
this table.
sN
Side or 1 to 20 lots 10 6 16% Shared Loading bays shall Shared 2.75 - 3.00 Lane
ew
rear service (in movement be recessed (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
access lane) lane) Ze
E24
Shop and trade

ala
n d
73
NZS 4404:2010
74
118.92.13.10
99954
OF FIGURES
NZS 4404:2010
FIGURE NUMBER
3.3.1.6 3.4.16 3.3.1.10, 3.3.11.3 volumes)

Co
Access to lots 1 to 20 lots 10 11 12% Shared Parking may Shared 2.75 - 3.00 Lane
or shop or (in movement occur separate (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
py
trade units lane) and recessed. lane)
See 3.3.6
rig
E25
ht
Shop and trade

St
Primary 1 to 200 lots 30 20 10% 3.5 m each Parking and Shared 5.5 - 5.7 Local road
an
access to side loading bays (in movement (~ 2,000 vpd)
16
00
80
80
29
trade may occur in the lane)
09
3
da
movement lane
or be separate
E26
and recessed.
rd
Urban
See 3.3.6
Shop and trade

sN
Side or 1 to 20 lots 10 6 16% Shared Parking and Shared 2.75 - 3.00 Lane
ew
rear service (in movement loading bays (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
access lane) shall be separate lane)
and recessed.
Ze
See 3.3.6
E27
Work and learn

ala
n d

118.92.13.10
99954
OF FIGURES
FIGURE NUMBER
3.3.1.6 3.4.16 3.3.1.10, 3.3.11.3 volumes)

Co
Access to 1 to 20 lots 10 11 12% Shared Parking and Shared 2.75 - 3.00 Lane
lots or work (in movement loading bays (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
py
or learn lane) shall be separate lane)
activities and recessed.
rig
See 3.3.6
E28
ht
Work and learn

St
an
access to side loading bays (in movement (~ 2,000 vpd)
16
00
80
80
29
09
office and may occur in the lane)
3
da
education movement lane
or be separate
E29
and recessed.
rd
Urban
See 3.3.6
Work and learn

sN
Multiple user 1 to 200 lots 30 20 10% 3.5 m each Parking and Shared 5.5 - 5.7 Local road
ew
access side loading bays (in movement (~2,000 vpd)
may occur in the lane)
movement lane
Ze
or be separate
E30
and recessed.
Mixed use
See 3.3.6
ala
n d
75
NZS 4404:2010
76
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
OF FIGURES
FIGURE NUMBER
Co
3.3.1.6 3.4.16 3.3.1.10, 3.3.11.3 volumes)
Neighbourhood 200 to 800 50 23 10% 2.5 m each Parking is Separate 2 x 4.2 Connector/
py
centres (and lots side preferred separate provision collector
all other and recessed. where local (~ 8,000 vpd)
areas serving See 3.3.6. Public authority
rig
multiple land transport is likely defined cycle
E31
uses not listed (see 3.3.1.4, route.
Urban
Mixed use
elsewhere in 3.3.1.5)
ht
this table) St
Side or 1 to 20 lots 10 6 16% Shared Parking and Shared 5.7 Lane
an
rear service (in movement loading bays (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
access lane) (shared in lane)
da
movement lane).
See 3.3.6
E32
rd
Mixed use
sN
Centre
Access to lots 1 to 20 lots 20 11 12% Shared Parking and Shared 5.5 - 5.7
ew Lane
or mixed use (in movement loading bays (in movement (~ 200 vpd)
activities lane) may occur in lane)
movement lane
Ze
or be separate
E33
and recessed.
Mixed use
See 3.3.6
ala
n d

118.92.13.10
99954
OF FIGURES
FIGURE NUMBER
Co
3.3.1.6 3.4.16 3.3.1.10, 3.3.11.3 volumes)
py
access side loading bays (in movement (~ 2,000 vpd)
and local may occur in lane)
movement movement lane
rig
or be separate
E34
and recessed.
Mixed use
See 3.3.6
ht
St
Shared Varies, 10 11 None if Shared Activity space Shared 2.75 - 3.00 Local road
an
spaces, specific steps (in movement (in movement vehicle (~ 2,000 vpd)
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
accessway, design lane) lane) movement
da
mall, and required space, total
community space by
E35
reserve
rd design
Centre
Mixed use
sN
Urban street 200 to 800 40 23 10% 4.0 m each Parking and or Where local 2 x 4.2
ew Connector/
lots side loading is separate authority collector
and recessed. defined cycle (~ 8,000 vpd)
See 3.3.6. Public route
Ze
transport is likely
E36
(see 3.3.1.4,
Mixed use
3.3.1.5)
ala
n d
77
NZS 4404:2010
NZS 4404:2010
3.3.3 Pavement structural design

Generally pavements shall be flexible designs. Other types of pavements shall be subject
to TA approval. Pavements shall be designed in accordance with the Austroads guides
*
with a design life of 25 years.
d
C3.3.3
n
For roads of connector/collector class or above, structural design should be undertaken
ala
by mechanistic design methods. For other roads, mechanistic or other industry standard
chart based methods may be used.
Ze
3.3.3.1 California bearing ratio design method for rigid and flexible pavements
Soaked California bearing ratio (CBR) values of the pavement subgrade shall be used
and the pavement designed for the estimated number of equivalent standard axle (ESA)
ew
loadings over a 25-year design life.
3.3.3.2 California bearing ratio tests

sN
CBR values shall generally be determined in the laboratory according to 6.1 of NZS 4402.6.
––For local roads an alternative method of determining subgrade CBR in non-granular

materials by Scala Penetrometer may be acceptable for clay and colluvial materials.
rd
Figure 3.1 shows a correlation between Scala penetration and CBR values. This should
da
99954
118.92.13.10
be used conservatively.
The CBR value used in the design shall be the 10th percentile value of the CBR tests
taken on the subgrade material. A selection of tests shall be taken at 150, 300, and
an
450 mm below final subgrade level.
Where CBR values are required for aggregates, these shall be based on laboratory tests
St
prepared on the fraction passing the 19 mm sieve but a CBR of more than 30 shall never
be used. The use of CBR on metal layers shall only be in conjunction with consideration
of the CBR and stiffness of lower layers.
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
78
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
Figure 3.1 – Parameter relationship

rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
79
NZS 4404:2010
NZS 4404:2010
3.3.4 Safety barrier provisions
3.3.4.1 Pedestrian and cycle barriers
*
Where safety barriers for pedestrian and cyclists are necessary, they shall comply with
the design requirements of the New Zealand Building Code and NZS/AS 1657.
d
n
3.3.4.2 Urban vehicle barriers
ala
Where safety barriers for vehicles in urban areas are necessary, they shall comply with the
design requirements of NZTA RTS 11: Urban roadside barriers and alternative treatments.
Ze
3.3.4.3 Rural vehicle barriers
Where safety barriers for vehicles in rural areas are necessary, they shall comply with the
design requirements in AS/NZS 3845.
ew
3.3.5 Target operating speed
Traffic management shall be included in road design to ensure that the target operating
speed shown in table 3.2 is achieved. Target operating speed can be managed by physical
sN
and psychological devices such as narrowed movement lanes, reduced forward visibility,
parking, slow points, build outs, leg lengths, chicanes, planting and landscaping, and
street furniture and art works.
rd
The Austroads Guide to traffic management – Part 8: Local area traffic management
provides suitable guidance for designing to a target operating speed. Reference can
da
99954
118.92.13.10
also be made to the Manual for streets (UK Department for Transport 2007). Figure 3.2
provides information on estimating traffic speeds for particular circumstances.
an
C3.3.5
The two key geometric factors that contribute to achieving the target operating speed
St
are carriageway width and forward visibility. Figure 3.2 can be used to give an indication
of the speed at which traffic will travel for a given carriageway width/forward visibility
combination. (Reference: UK Department for Transport, ‘Manual for streets’. Figure 3.2
is adapted from figure 7.16 in the reference and ‘TRL661 – The manual for streets:
ht
evidence and research’). It is recommended that the user interpolate the design street
width between the guide lines shown to determine relative street width and forward
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
visibility.
py
Co
80
NZS 4404:2010
*
d
n
ala
Ze
ew
Figure 3.2 – Influence of road geometry on speed sN

3.3.6 Parking, passing, and loading
rd
Parking and loading can be provided either on or off-street. Facilities shall meet the
needs of the area and the requirements of the TA, and shall be addressed in the design
da
99954
118.92.13.10
and access statement (see 3.2.6). Further guidance can be found on the Trips Database
Bureau website http://www.tdbonline.org/home.
an
Passing provision shall be in accordance with the design guidance in table 3.2 and the
requirements of the TA.
Acceptable and alternative on-street car park and loading dimensions should be taken
St
from AS 2890.5 and/or the Austroads guides.
Parking and loading shall not be provided so that it has the potential to obstruct the
ht
movement of emergency or service vehicles along a road. Alternate provision within sites
may be demonstrated in addition to the requirements of the district plan, particularly when
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
establishing rules for new subdivisions.
3.3.7 Intersection and alignment design

py
The angle of intersection should be 90o, although a minimum angle of 70o can be used
when justified by other constraints. Carriageway alignment may be offset within the street
reserve to achieve the required target operating speed for the road.
Co
All road intersections in ‘live and play’ areas below arterial class should have a kerb radius
at intersections of 4 m to 6 m. An alternative and reduced kerb radius may be considered
to enhance pedestrian facility in low speed environments, and shall be subject to the
approval of the TA.
All intersections in ‘make and grow’ areas should have a minimum kerb radius of 13.5 m
with corner splays of 6 m, or subject to specific design. ➤
81
NZS 4404:2010
Intersections in all other 50 km/h or lower speed environments shall have the lot corners
splayed by a minimum of 4 m along both boundaries, although these may be dispensed
with in low target operating speed situations provided that there is adequate provision for
*
pedestrians and utility services. Corner boundary splays shall be subject to specific design
d
in higher speed environments, to ensure safe visibility at intersections.
n
Reference can also be made to Austroads guides.
ala
Intersections between connector/collector roads or intersections of connector/collector
roads with arterials shall be a minimum distance of 150 m apart, centre line to centre line.
Ze
3.3.8 No-exit roads
‘No-exit’ roads should not be provided where through roads and connected networks
can be designed. Where no-exit roads are provided, they should ensure connectivity for
pedestrians and cyclists.
ew
No-exit roads and lanes shall provide for road turning at the end of the road for an
appropriate vehicle as described in RTS 18: New Zealand on-road tracking curves for
sN
heavy vehicles. The design of turning facilities for light vehicles shall be in accordance
with AS 2890.5. See figures 3.3 and 3.4 for acceptable solutions.
An on-road turning area may provide for parking or landscaping in the centre of the
rd
turning area. The minimum kerb gradient around turning heads shall be 0.5%. Appropriate
drainage shall be provided.
da
3.3.9 Bus stops

99954
118.92.13.10
Bus stops shall be provided for on connector/collector roads or arterials in accordance

an
with the TA direction in consultation with the regional transport authority. Bus stops may
be designed in accordance with ARTA Bus stop infrastructure design guidelines.
St
3.3.10 Special road and footpath provisions near places of assembly

Designs for areas adjacent to places of public assembly including schools, hospitals,
shopping areas, and public halls, shall incorporate special provisions such as extra parking
ht
spaces, stopping lay-bys, widened footpaths, bus and taxi stops, pedestrian crossings,
loading zones, and any associated facilities to ensure the safety of concentrations of
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
vehicles and pedestrians.
3.3.11 Footpaths, accessways, cycle paths, and berms

py
Pedestrians, cyclists, and berms shall be provided for in accordance with table 3.2.
Dimensions, strength, durability, and finish shall be appropriate to their use and expected
loadings. Paths shall be designed in accordance with Austroads guides and NZTA Pedestrian
Co
planning and design guide.
Where accessways separate from the roads are to be illuminated, they shall be to the
standard of illumination recommended in AS/NZS 1158.3.1.
82
NZS 4404:2010
3.3.11.1 Footpaths and accessways

Footpaths shall be a minimum of 1.5 m wide surfaced over their full width. The crossfall
should be no greater than 2%. Wider footpaths or areas of local widening will often be
*
required by the TA where higher use or other needs dictate such widening.
d
Accessways should be provided at no-exit roads or where necessary to improve connectivity.
n
They shall be designed for user safety using crime prevention through environmental
design (CPTED) principles and should:
ala
(a) Be direct and no greater than two properties long;
(b) Have good sight lines for passive surveillance with fences a maximum height of
Ze
1.2 m for 10 m from the road frontage, or no fencing;
(c) Be sited to ensure high levels of community use;
(d) Be amenity landscaped without compromising safety;
ew
(e) Have provision for the disposal of stormwater;
(f) Be provided with pedestrian level lighting; and

(g) Have a legal width not less than 5.5 m.
sN
3.3.11.2 Cycle paths
Separate cycle paths shall be provided where good design requires separation from the
rd
carriageway or a different route to be selected.
da
99954
Stormwater disposal shall be provided to all off-road cycle paths. Lighting is to be provided
where appropriate.
118.92.13.10
Cycle facilities shall be designed to the standards as set out in the Austroads guides and
an
the NZTA Cycle network and route planning guide.

St
3.3.11.3 Footpath and cycle path surfacing

All footpaths and cycle paths shall be surfaced with a permanent surfacing layer appropriate
to the surrounding environment and level of use expected.
ht
Acceptable surfacing for footpaths and cycle paths are:

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
(a) Concrete;
16
(b) Asphaltic concrete.

py
Other acceptable surfacing for footpaths are:
(c) Concrete pavers;

Co
(d) Other pavers may be approved by a TA in areas of high aesthetic value;

(e) Chipseal (grade 6) may be approved by a TA in areas of very low pedestrian traffic;
(f) Metal surfaces may be appropriate in rural areas;
(g) Permeable or porous paving may be approved by a TA.
In all cases the surfacing shall be placed over compacted basecourse which in turn shall
be placed over a firm subgrade with all organic soft material removed.
83
NZS 4404:2010
3.3.11.4 Berms
Grassed or planted berms between the road legal boundary and carriageway shall be
provided in accordance with the landscape character intent for each street type within
*
the development. For streets with high pedestrian activity, a full footpath (with no berms)
d
may be more appropriate. Residential streets with a lower pedestrian activity may have a
ribbon footpath (planted berms between footpath and carriageway, and between footpath
n
and road boundary).
ala
In all cases the combined berm and footpath width shall be as required by the TA to be
adequate to enable landscaping and all current and expected services to be installed.
Ze
Where a berm crossfall greater than 1 in 12.5 is proposed, the designer shall produce
a cross section along suitable individual property access locations to show that the sag
or summit curves at crossings can be satisfactorily negotiated by a 90th percentile car.
ew
Berms shall be of adequate width to:
(a) Achieve safe clearances between the carriageway edge and any obstacle;
(b)
sN
Allow running of utility services and placing of lighting poles within the berm unless
approved otherwise by the utility provider or the TA;
(c) Provide adequate space between the road reserve boundary and the carriageway
edge to enable residents to safely enter the road traffic;
rd
(d) Allow room for efficient road edge and edge drain maintenance; and
(e) Allow adequate space for the effective operation and maintenance of any form of
da
stormwater management device.

99954
118.92.13.10
an
3.3.12 Traffic signs, marking, and road furniture

The design shall incorporate all required road marking, signs, and other facilities appropriate
to the place and link context. Roads should be designed to minimise the need for traffic
St
signs and marking.
Designs shall satisfy the Land Transport Rule (Traffic Control Devices) 2004 and linked
ht
traffic sign specification, and the NZTA Pedestrian planning and design guide. All road
markings and traffic signs shall be approved by the TA.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
All fire hydrants shall be marked in accordance with NZS/BS 750.
Road name signs shall comply with the TA’s current road names standards and their
py
mounting shall be provided by the developer to the TA’s requirements.
Seats, signs, and other street furniture shall be designed and placed in accordance with
Co
the TA’s requirements. Furniture used should unless expressly approved otherwise be
compatible with a TA’s existing street furniture.
3.3.13 Trees and landscaping

See section 7 of this Standard.
3.3.14 Road lighting

All road lighting shall be designed and installed in compliance with the recommendations
of AS/NZS 1158, Austroads guides or guidelines adopted by the TA at that time.
84
NZS 4404:2010
3.3.15 Bridges and culverts

Bridges and culverts may require separate resource and building consents. All bridges
and culverts shall be designed in accordance with the NZTA Bridge manual.
*
Particular features to be considered/covered include:
d
(a) Widths/lengths:
n
All bridges and culverts shall be designed with a width to accommodate movement
ala
lane, cycle, and pedestrian needs of the road (see table 3.2);
(b) Roadside barriers:
See 3.3.4;
Ze
(c) Batter slope protection:
All culverts shall have anti-scour structures to protect batter slopes, berms, and
carriageways;
ew
(d) Clearance over traffic lanes:
Where passing above traffic lanes, bridges shall have the full clearance of 5.2 m to
provide clearance for overdimension vehicles able to operate without a permit;
(e) Foundations: sN
All bridges and culverts shall be founded to resist settlement or scour. Abutments
shall be designed to ensure bank stability and provide erosion or scour protection
as applicable;
rd
(f) For waterway design see section 4.

da
3.3.16 Private ways, private roads, and other private accesses

99954
118.92.13.10
Access to all lots, dwellings, or multi-unit developments shall be considered at the time of
an
subdivision/development and should where possible be formed at that time.
Where access to the lot is to a garage or car deck to be constructed as part of the buildings
St
this shall be noted on the design drawings. This is likely to have been considered as part
of the resource consent process.
Accesses shall be designed and constructed to the following requirements or in accordance

ht
with the TA’s specific requirements, unless alternative designs by the developer’s professional
advisor are approved by the TA.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
3.3.16.1 Plan and gradient design

Table 3.2 should be used as a guide for the widths of elements required for accesses.
py
A maximum 3-point turning head in the common area shall be provided at the end of all
accesses serving three or more rear lots or dwelling units. Circular, L, T, or Y shaped
Co
heads are acceptable. Suitable dimensions are shown in figures 3.3 and 3.4.
For accesses serving fewer than three lots or dwelling units, turning heads in the common
area are not required where it can be shown that adequate turning area is available within
each lot or private area.
Centre line grades should:
(a) Not be steeper than 1 in 5 although gradients of 1 in 4.5 may be used on straight
lengths of access over distances of up to 20 m. The first 5 m of any access shall ➤
85
NZS 4404:2010
be not steeper than 1 in 8. A greater length of transition shall be provided where

necessary on non-residential accesses;
(b) Not be less than 1 in 250.
*
d
C3.3.16.1 (a) and (b)
n
The TA may approve exceptions provided the design includes suitable vertical transitions
and adequate safety at the point where the access meets the footpath or road.
ala
All accesses shall be shaped with either crown or crossfall of not less than 2%.
Ze
To allow vehicles to pass, accesses shall have widening to not less than 5.5 m over a 15 m
length at not more than 50 m spacing. Rural accesses may have passing bays at up to
100 m distances where visibility is available from bay to bay.
ew
3.3.16.2 Stormwater design

All shared urban accesses shall be surfaced and have their edges defined by a structural
sN
edge. The design shall demonstrate consideration of a sustainable approach to stormwater
management rather than kerbed collection, channelling, and disposal, if possible.
Rural accesses shall be formed with safe water tables/edge drains along but adequately
rd
clear of each side of the access.
Accesses sloping up from the road shall have a stormwater collection system at the road
da
99954
118.92.13.10
reserve boundary so as to avoid stormwater run-off and debris migration onto the public
road. Except in rural areas, stormwater shall discharge via an appropriately sized and
designed stormwater system acceptable to the TA (see figure 3.8 for examples of typical
an
sump to driveway or right of way). Rural side drains may discharge directly to the roadside
drain or where accesses pass over the side drain they shall be provided with a culvert of
size appropriate for the design flow but not less than 300 mm diameter.
St
Accesses that slope down from the road shall be designed to ensure that road stormwater
is not able to pass down the access. Side drainage in context with the area shall be
ht
provided to stop the concentration and discharge of stormwater and debris onto adjacent
properties or any land which could be at risk of instability or erosion. Where an overland
rig
3
09
29
80
80
flow path departs from the road reserve, accesses shall be designed to direct secondary
00
16
flow away from building floors and to follow designed overland flow paths.
Commercial and industrial accesses shall drain from their sumps through a lead directly
py
or through a stormwater treatment device to a public stormwater main.

Co
3.3.16.3 Pavement design

Private pavements shall be designed as for public roads but no residential or rural pavement
shall have a minimum formation thickness of less than 150 mm for flexible pavements or
100 mm for concrete pavements.
Commercial and industrial pavement shall be provided with adequate supporting design
to ensure that it will have a life of 20 years.
Acceptable surfacing for accesses includes asphaltic concrete (25 mm minimum thickness),
chipseals, in situ concrete or concrete pavers.
86
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Figure 3.3 – Dimensions of no-exit road turning areas

Ze
ala
n d
*
87
NZS 4404:2010
88
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
Figure 3.4 – Turning areas for no-exit roads

sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
NZS 4404:2010
3.3.17 Crossings
3.3.17.1 Urban
*
Vehicle crossings shall be provided between the edge of the movement lane and the road
boundary at the entrance to all private ways and lanes and to any lots, front or rear where
d
access points are clearly identifiable at the subdivision or development stage.
n
Where access points are not clearly identifiable at the subdivision or development stage,
ala
crossings shall be constructed at the building consent stage.
Vehicle crossings shall be designed to enable the 99th percentile car to use them without
grounding any part of the vehicle, and shall be designed in accordance with the NZTA
Ze
Pedestrian planning and design guide. Structural design shall be adequate to carry the
loads to be expected over its design life. All crossings shall be surfaced with asphalt or
concrete or paving stone as approved by the TA.
ew
Where stormwater drainage is provided by swale or open drain, crossings shall be provided
as specified in 3.3.17.2.
sN
Pram and wheelchair crossings shall be provided at all road intersections and pedestrian
crossings. The crossings shall be sited to facilitate normal pedestrian movements in the
road and where possible sumps shall be sited so as to reduce the flow of stormwater in
the channel at the crossing entrance. Pram and wheelchair crossings shall satisfy the
rd
NZTA Pedestrian planning and design guide.
da
3.3.17.2 Rural
99954
118.92.13.10
All shared crossings and any where the location is obvious at the design stage shall be
an
installed at the development stage. Other crossings shall be provided at the building
consent stage.
Crossings shall be provided between the surfaced road edge and the lot boundary at a
St
defined and formed access point to every rural lot. The crossing shall be sealed to not
less than the standard of the road surface and to the road boundary. If the access slopes
up from the road the crossing shall be sealed to a minimum distance of 10 m from the
ht
edge of the carriageway.

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
The crossing shall not obstruct the side drain. Where the side drain is shallow and only
carries small flows during rain, the crossing may pass through the side drain. Where the
side drain is of an unsuitable shape or carries flows for significant parts of the year the
py
side drain shall be piped under the crossing. Pipes and end treatments shall be sized
appropriately for the catchment intercepted but shall be a minimum of 300 mm diameter.
Co
Rural crossings shall be designed so that vertical curvature transitions are suitable for the
passage of the 99th percentile car and control of stormwater and debris run-off.
3.3.18 Fencing
Fencing shall be provided along the road reserve boundaries of all rural subdivisions unless
agreed otherwise by the TA. Standards and requirements shall be in accordance with the
TA’s fencing policy at the time. This shall also apply to fencing of pedestrian, cycle, and
reserve accesses in rural areas.
89
NZS 4404:2010
3.3.19 Road run-off
3.3.19.1 Integration of road run-off with development stormwater system
*
Stormwater management for a subdivision needs to integrate the control of stormwater
from the proposed roading network with the overall stormwater system for the land
d
development phase and final subdivision layout. Such planning needs to integrate the
n
control of stormwater peak flows and pollutant removal as set out in section 4 of this
Standard with the aim of minimising downstream negative effects and mitigating road
ala
instability and erosion problems. Some guidance on integrated catchment management
is set out in NZTA Stormwater treatment standard for state highway infrastructure.
Ze
3.3.19.2 Design
For stormwater run-off design see section 4 of this Standard.
ew
3.3.19.3 Subsurface drains
Where considered necessary by the TA or the developer’s professional advisor, piped

subsurface drainage shall be provided to protect road formations from deterioration or
sN
loss of strength caused by a high water table and as part of swale stormwater systems.
Design shall be in accordance with NZTA specification F/2.
Piped subsurface drains shall be provided on each side of all urban roads where the
rd
natural subsoils have inadequate permeability or unacceptably high water table to enable
long term strength of the new pavement to be maintained. Piped subsurface drains shall
da
99954
118.92.13.10
be provided on the upslope side of all urban roads in hill areas and on the down side also
where the down slope is in cut.
All piped subsurface drains shall discharge by gravity into a suitable component of the
an
public stormwater system or approved discharge point.
For two typical details of under-kerb drainage and subsoil drainage see figure 3.5.
St
3.3.19.4 Side drains/water tables

ht
Rural roads shall have normal camber (see table 3.2) to side drains/water tables formed
on each side of the carriageway except where the road is on embankment above adjacent
land without available formed drains. In such cases the road may be designed so as to
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
provide for sheet run-off to the adjacent land surface provided natural pre-existing drainage
patterns are not altered.
py
For all situations where side drains are required they shall be sized to suit the flows
discharging to them. Side drains shall be intercepted at regular intervals and discharge
via open drains or pipes to an appropriate discharge point. All discharge points shall have
Co
outlets protected from scour and shall be located to minimise the risk of slope instability.
Such discharges shall be subject to the approval of affected property owners and be shown
to be neither diverting catchments nor significantly changing peak flows or flow patterns.
90
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
Figure 3.5 – Subsoil drains

16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
91
NZS 4404:2010
NZS 4404:2010
3.3.19.5 Swales
Swales should be used wherever appropriate to allow for infiltration to reduce peak
discharge flows and to provide stormwater treatment. They can be located either in the
*
berm area or in the centre of the road, and must be of sufficient width to accommodate
d
services (if needed), plant growth and maintenance (see 7.3.5).
n
Where swales are used they shall be designed by a suitably qualified person in accordance
with TA requirements or one of the publications listed in Referenced Documents or Related
ala
Documents that cover swale design. Typical details that may be used in swale design are
shown in figures 3.6(A) to 3.6(C).
Ze
See 4.3.7.6 for swale design and section 7 on landscaping design and practice.
ew
sN
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
Figure 3.6(A) – Typical swale detail (1)
92
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd Figure 3.6(B) – Typical swale detail (2)
sN
ew
Ze
ala
nd
*
93
NZS 4404:2010
94
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
Figure 3.6(C) – Typical check dam detail

sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
NZS 4404:2010
3.3.19.6 Kerbs and channels

Where kerbs and channels are to be provided on carriageways they should comply with
figure 3.7. Mountable or nib kerbs, or their slip-formed equivalent may be used subject
*
to the approval of the TA. Pedestrian crossings (pram crossing) should be provided for
d
disability access at regular intervals and at locations where pedestrians are reasonably
expected to transition between footpaths and the street.
n
ala
3.3.19.7 Sumps
Sumps used in all public places shall comply with the TA’s current standard details.
Stormwater sumps are classified as three types according to the design of their inlets:
Ze
(a) Grated only inlet sumps: Grated inlets are effective in intercepting gutter flows. They
also provide access openings for maintenance. Grated inlets are prone to blockage
and problems of increased pavement maintenance in the immediate vicinity of the
ew
inlet, therefore, their use in street gutters are discouraged. They are suitable for
non-kerbed situations such as yards, end of ditches, open car parks, accessways,
driveways, medians, and ponding areas. Figures 3.8 and 3.9 show details of common
(b)
types of grated inlet; sN
Back entry inlet sumps: Back entry inlets are less affected by blockage, and they
are more effective in intercepting flows in sag areas;
rd
(c) Combined grates and back entry inlet sumps: This system of combining a back entry
with the traditional grated inlet significantly improves flow intake and is less prone
da
99954
118.92.13.10
to blockage from debris. This type of inlet should be used in all situations where
possible. Figures 3.10 to 3.14 show typical examples of this type of inlet.
an
Figure 3.8 shows an acceptable detail for sumps in accessways, footpaths, and rights of
way. A flat channel or yard sump and various styles of hillside sump are shown in figures
3.9, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, and 3.13.
St
A double back-entry sump for road low points is shown in figure 3.14.
ht
3.3.19.7.1 Sump location

Sumps shall be located:
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(a) To ensure that the total system design flow enters the pipe system and that surface
flows across intersections are minimised. In hill areas the total design flow shall
include run-off from any upslope hillsides that are not specifically drained. In many
py
cases this will mean the use of closely spaced or specially designed sumps to ensure
that the flow to which the pipe system is designed can actually get into the system;
(b) At all points in a surface system where a change in gradient is liable to result in
Co
ponding due to change in flow velocities or on bends where there may be a tendency
for water to leave the kerb and channel;
(c) Not further apart than 90 m along any surface system.
95
NZS 4404:2010
450
SET DOWN FOR
*
300 150 KERB CROSSING 450
20 MM FILLET 100 100
d
AND CHAMFER
50
n
10
100
150
250
ala
200
150
150
50
STANDARD KERB AND CHANNEL MOUNTABLE KERB AND CHANNEL
Ze
450 300
300 150 200 100
ew
10
50
40 MPa
CONCRETE
sN
250
200
3 - D16
100
50 COVER
HEAVY DUTY VEHICLE CROSSING MOUNTABLE NIB KERB

rd
KERB AND CHANNEL
600
da
450
300 300
99954
118.92.13.10
50
300 150
an
200
150
50
St
3 - D12
PRAM CROSSING DISH CHANNEL 50 COVER
KERB AND CHANNEL
ht
150 150
600 150
30 30
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
40
300
py
200
250
100
95
3 - D12
Co
ALTERNATIVE DISH CHANNEL 50 COVER STANDARD KERB ONLY NIB KERB
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES
Figure 3.7 – Kerbs and dished channels
96
NZS 4404:2010
FALL
*
DRIVEWAY OR
d
RIGHT OF WAY
KERB AND CHANNEL
n
ala
STANDARD TERRITORIAL
AUTHORITY STYLE SUMP
CHANNEL CUT OFF DRAIN IF REQ'D BY TA
Ze
ew
TWIN 100 dia. ROUND OR TWIN

150 X 50 rect. GALV. STEEL TO
KERB MAY BE ACCEPTABLE
WHEN NO SW MAIN
AVAILABLE
(SEE NOTE)
sN VEHICLE
BERM AND
CROSSING
FOOTPATH
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
STORMWATER MAIN
ROAD ROAD
CLASS Y 200 MIN.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
NOTE –
(1) Use of single or twin pipes from the
property to the sump to be
determined by calculation.
(2) All dimensions are in millimetres.
Figure 3.8 – Typical sump to driveway or right of way
97
NZS 4404:2010
890
*
d
CYCLE OR WHEELCHAIR
FRIENDLY GRATES
n
ala
1
725
Ze
ew
PLAN
sN
PRECAST CONCRETE YARD SUMP TOP
WITH CAST IRON LID AND FRAME
rd
da
300 MIN
SUBSOIL DRAIN AT
350 MAX
99954
118.92.13.10
SUBGRADE LEVEL
WHERE APPLICABLE
300 MIN
an
NOTE –
SUMP OUTLET
MAY BE 150 dia.
St
IN PRIVATE 200 dia. M

IN.
PROPERTY CLASS Y PI
OR APPRO
VED EQUPE
IVALENT
1194
ht
FLEXIBLE JOINT
WITHIN 300
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
OF SUMP
75
py
PRECAST CONCRETE
SUMP BARREL OR
610 600 dia. SUMP BARREL
Co
SECTION 1
-
Figure 3.9 – Flat channel or yard sump
98
NZS 4404:2010
STAINLESS STEEL PRECAST CONCRETE
*
HINGE PINS SUMP TOP
d
n
SIDE ENTRY SUMP
FOR HILLSIDE SITUATIONS
300
ala
(REFER FIGURE 3.11)
SUBSOIL STUB AT
SUBGRADE LEVEL
Ze
(IF REQUIRED)
DUCTILE IRON GRATING

WITH MILD STEEL FRAME
SLOTS 16 mm x 40 mm 740
ew
(NOMINAL)
1 PLAN
-
1000
810
PRECAST
20
sN 760
150
PRECAST CONCRETE
650 CONCRETE
SUMP TOP
rd
SUMP TOP
75
165
TEE SECTION
da 330
99954
240
118.92.13.10
300 MIN.
an
200 dia. M
St
IN
CLASS Y P .
IPE
1194
ht
75
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
PRECAST OR CAST-IN-SITU
CONCRETE SUMP BASE
py
710 610
Co
FRONT ELEVATION SECTION 1

-
Figure 3.10 – Hillside sump
99
100
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
750
750
rig
253
ht 170
-
1
St
an
16
00
32
263
80
80
29
09
3
5
da
dia
.
100
SECTION
1000
150
750
rd
-
115
1
FRONT ELEVATION
1500
sN
ew
660 Ze
Figure 3.11 – Add-on to back-entry sump for hillside situations

FLUTED SURFACE TO
ala
DIRECT WATER TO SUMP n d
*
NZS 4404:2010
Precast kerb units 76 x 38 Channel at 460

crs max. welded to
C web grating.
*
B
d
n
Transition to
sump shape B
Std. hillside
Std. hillside
ala
channel
channel
A A
500 460
Ze
50mm slot full depth
in conc. nib
Webforge WA 403/1
C
or equivalent.
Weld grating to
PLAN Pipe as specified
76 x 38 Channel at each
intersection point. Cross bars on top
ew
H.D. galvanise 20 1970
after fabrication.
1940
10
525
sN
600
320
rd
150
450
da
99954
118.92.13.10
200
an
Silt trap as alternative

to conc. nib if specified
150 500 150
St
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
ht
Precast kerb units

160 70 280 100
80 150 360 100
10
10
85
rig
3
09
245
29
140
80
80
00
16
333
165
325
130
50
50 50
py
50
150 200-275
380-455
Length
varies
Length
varies
Co
150 330 150 150 250 150
SECTION C-C SECTION C-C

HILLSIDE CHANNEL KERB & FLAT CHANNEL
Figure 3.12 – An alternative sump for hillside situations
101
NZS 4404:2010
Back of kerb
Invert
*
d
n
ala
Fender
Ze
PLAN
40x40x10 angle.
Hot dip galvanised.
Cast ends into
ew
sump by 75 mm.
C
A B
d channel
Invert Back of kerb Length of forme
sN as specified
rd 5
B
da
Special
99954
118.92.13.10
grating if
Invert specified
an
LONGITUDINAL SECTION
St
25 mm dia rods
1
length to suit.
Hillside Weld to 50 x 12 flat plate.
Grating 30
ht
channel Profile end as above.
30
C 75
rig
30
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
30
75 30
3
75
B 75
5
A Double
py
sump
50 Length as specified 30
Hot dip galvanise
entire grating
Co
SECTION A-A, B-B & C-C SPECIAL GRATING
NOTE –
(1) Further cross-bars on grate may
be required for cycle safety
(2) All dimensions are in millimetres.
Figure 3.13 – Special entry to double sump in hillside channel
102
NZS 4404:2010
*
d
n
ala
Ze
ew
sN
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
Figure 3.14 – Double back-entry sump for road low points

an
3.3.19.7.2 Sump design

Sumps should be designed to intercept and convey stormwater run-off flow from design
St
storm of the AEP set out by the TA, or otherwise stated in section 4 of this Standard, while
allowing a reasonable frequency and degree of traffic interference. Depending on the road
classification, as specified by the TAs, portions of the road may be inundated during major
ht
storm events. See 4.3.4.2 for allowable floodwater depths.
The following general guidelines should be used in the design of sumps:

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(a) General safety requirements

(i) Provide for the safety of the public from being swept into the stormwater system;
py
the maximum allowable opening shall not exceed 100 mm in width

(ii) Openings are sufficiently small to prevent entry of debris that would clog the
stormwater system
Co
(iii) Openings be sized and oriented to provide for safety of pedestrians and cyclists.
Cycle-friendly sump grates shall be used where required by the TAs. These
grates may be built either with bars transverse to the side channel direction
or closely spaced bars in a wavy pattern in a longitudinal direction;
(b) Sump inlet capacities
Inlet capacities of any sump used should be determined using manufacturers’
and suppliers’ data which should be based on either rational analysis or first principle
calculations, otherwise sump inlet capacities should be calculated using approved ➤
103
NZS 4404:2010
design methods where applicable. When no proper data is available, the capacity of
the single 675 x 450 back entry sump with standard grating should be limited to 28 L/s.
The calculated sump inlet capacities should be reduced to account for partial blockage
*
of the inlet with debris as follows:
d
On-grade grated back entry sump 10% reduction
n
On-grade grated sump 50% reduction
On-sag grated sump 50% reduction
ala
On-sag grated back entry sump Include back entry capacity only
(c) The use of silt traps is encouraged in all sumps to provide partial treatment to
stormwater at the source, but in all cases, trapped sumps should be used where
Ze
discharge to a soakage device is permitted.
3.3.19.7.3 Sump gratings
ew
Sump grating areas shall be sized generously to allow for partial blockage to ensure that
side-channel water does not bypass sumps when velocities are high.
Cycle-friendly sump grates shall be used where cyclists can be expected or when required
sN
by the TA. These gratings may be built either with bars transverse to the side-channel
direction or closely spaced bars in a wavy pattern in a longitudinal direction.
rd
3.3.19.7.4 Sump leads
Leads should be designed to be of sufficient size to convey all the design capacity of
the sump to the system. The minimum size of the lead for all types of sumps shall be
da
200 mm diameter, but 300 mm diameter is desirable to minimise inlet losses and blockage
99954
118.92.13.10
risk. For double sumps and other high capacity sumps the minimum size of lead required
is 300 mm diameter.
an
3.3.19.7.5 Secondary flow provisions

St
At all points where sump blockage may occur, or where design capacity may be exceeded,
which could lead to overflow into private property, the provision of designed secondary
flow paths protected by public ownership or easement shall be made (see 4.3.4.2).
ht
3.4 Construction
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
3.4.1 Introduction
These requirements apply to flexible pavements. For rigid pavements, such as concrete
py
pavements refer to Austroads guides, and the Guide to residential streets and paths as
listed in Referenced Documents.
Co
Road construction shall be carried out to the alignments and standards detailed in the
approved drawings and with the specified materials so as to provide the intended design life.
The road construction includes all associated construction required to complete adjacent
footpaths, berms, and road reserve areas.
3.4.2 Materials for flexible pavements
3.4.2.1 Transition layer

A transition layer may be required for traffic loading in excess of 1 x 105 ESA where the
104
NZS 4404:2010
subgrade is soft, to prevent ingress of the soft soils into the pavement layers. The transition
layer may be filter metal complying with appropriate NZTA specifications or an approved
geotextile filter fabric. The transition layer shall be compatible with the grading of adjacent
*
layers and be regarded as part of the total depth of the sub-base layer.
d
3.4.2.2 Sub-base
n
The sub-base layer immediately beneath the basecourse shall have a permeability of at
ala
least 10 – 4 m/s for a depth of at least 100 mm.
The material used as sub-base shall be hard rock material with the largest aggregate size
not larger than 60% of the depth of the layer or 65 mm. The material shall be sufficiently
Ze
free draining so as not to be susceptible to undue weakening at highest in-service moisture
content.
ew
3.4.2.3 Basecourse
The thickness of the basecourse layer when used with other metal aggregate layers shall
not be less than 100 mm.
Acceptable basecourse specifications are:

sN
(a) NZTA approved regional basecourse
This is a slightly lower quality material than NZTA specified M/4. It may be used for
rd
roads of connector/collector class; or
(b) Local basecourse acceptable to the TA
da
This may be used for local roads in live and play areas and footpaths, kerb crossings,
99954
118.92.13.10
and shared accessways.

an
3.4.3 Road surfacing
3.4.3.1 Acceptable surfacing materials

St
All movement lanes shall be provided with a permanent, hard wearing surfacing layer,
which shall be either impermeable or formed over an impermeable base. The surfacing
shall be capable of carrying all stresses expected during its lifetime.
ht
Acceptable surfacing options may include:

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(a) Hot laid asphaltic concrete of minimum compacted thickness 30 mm, laid over a
waterproofing sealcoat;
(b) Other asphaltic concrete mixes such as friction course or macadam wearing mix
py
laid over a waterproofing coat;

(c) Chip seals of various types, providing the equivalent of two bound chip coatings;
Co
(d) Concrete block pavers; and

(e) Stone block surfacing where designed for aesthetic effects.
To resist scuffing and local load effects, minimum surfacing standards as given in table 3.3
shall apply to the named facilities.
Use of concrete or stone block paving in public traffic areas shall require the specific
approval of the TA.
105
NZS 4404:2010
Table 3.3 – Recommended surfacing standards
Facility Minimum surfacing
*
Residential turning head Segmental concrete pavers, concrete,
30 mm asphaltic concrete
d
Public carparks (excl. parallel parks) Segmental concrete pavers, concrete,
n
ala
Commercial and industrial turning head Segmental concrete pavers, concrete,
Traffic islands and bus stops Segmental concrete pavers, concrete,
Ze
3.4.3.2 Road surface tolerances and texture
ew
The finished surface of new roads shall have a NAASRA roughness satisfying the TA’s
standards at the time of construction. No abrupt or abnormal deviations shall occur

and no areas shall pond water. The surface shall be of uniform texture expected by
sN
best trade practice and satisfy density standards applicable to the surfacing being
used. The skid resistance and surface texture of roads where design speeds exceed
70 km/h, shall comply with NZTA specification T/10 and its accompanying notes.
rd
Where hard surfacing is required for areas that are not movement lanes, alternative
materials and porous pavements that achieve the durability, maintenance, and amenity
requirements are acceptable with the approval of the TA.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
C3.4.3.2
an
In the cases of narrow traffic islands and bus stops, where loading is concentrated, the
use of stabilised base course is also desirable.
St
3.4.4 Road surfacing materials

All materials used in road surfacing shall comply with the appropriate NZTA specifications.
ht
The following surfacing options will be acceptable for roads covered by the Standard.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
3.4.4.1 First and second coat chip seals

For first coat seals the chip size shall generally be grade 3 on all roads.
py
For second coat seals the chip size shall generally be grade 4. Cycle and parking lanes
shall be grade 6.
Co
3.4.4.2 Double wet lock coat

First and second seals may be constructed in one operation with asphaltic cutback to
NZTA M/1 and P/3 specifications.
The binder application rate for the seals shall be designed to suit the conditions and chip size.
106
NZS 4404:2010
Acceptable and compatible chip sizes are:
Local roads
*
First coat: grade 4, second coat: grade 6
d
Other roads
First coat: grade 3, second coat: grade 5 or 6.
n
ala
3.4.4.3 Hot laid asphaltic concrete surfacing
Hot laid asphaltic concrete surfacing shall comply with NZTA specification M/10 or equivalent
approved by the TA. The mix used shall be appropriate to the end use and thickness
Ze
being placed.
A waterproofing seal coat, using asphaltic binder or emulsion, and grade 5 chip, with the
requirement that the seal coat comprises a minimum of 1.0 L/m2 of residual penetration
ew
grade bitumen, shall be laid prior to surfacing with asphaltic concrete of 50 mm or lesser
thickness. No cut back shall be used in such coats as it can cause flushing of the asphalt
overlay.
sN
When using NZTA specification M/10 compliant mixes on roads of connector/collector
class, NZTA guidelines on skid resistance and surface texture shall be incorporated in
the mix design.
rd
3.4.4.4 Other asphaltic mixes

da
99954
For special uses other asphalt-based hot mixes may be used such as open grade porous
asphalt or macadam wearing mix. When used they shall be placed over a waterproof
118.92.13.10
under layer and shall be designed according to current specifications and guides. In no
an
case shall the laid thickness be less than 25 mm.
3.4.4.5 Concrete
St
All concrete for roads shall come from a special grade plant as defined in NZS 3109.
Concrete of not less than 30 MPa 28-day strength shall be used for any road or crossing
slabs.
ht
Concrete for kerbs and channel shall be of not less than 20 MPa, 28-day strength.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
3.4.4.6 Concrete pavers

Design and material standards shall comply with NZS 3116. Paver thickness shall be as
py
defined in NZS 3116 for the appropriate traffic loading classification.
When used in roads the basecourse underlayer shall be given a waterproofing seal coat
Co
before the sand and pavers are laid, except where part of a porous pavement is approved
by the TA.
When used for bus stops or at raised crossings the basecourse shall be cement stabilised
under the raised zone and for at least 3 m on either side of the raised zone.
Pavers shall be laid to 5 mm above the lips of channels and other draining features.
107
NZS 4404:2010
3.4.5 Subgrade checking

Where the extent of cut or fill for the project is too great to make subgrade CBR testing
feasible at the design stage, it should be done on completion of earthworks when subgrade
*
levels have been exposed. Even in cases where the subgrade has been tested as part of
d
the design its condition shall be reviewed on exposure during construction and pavement
thicknesses adjusted accordingly.
n
ala
The results of such testing or review along with any consequent adjustments to pavement
layer thicknesses shall be advised to the TA before placing of pavement layers commences.
Any identified wet spots in the subgrade shall be drained to the under-channel drainage
Ze
system. Where the wet area is below the level of the under-channel drain, it shall be
drained using approved filter drainpipes connected to the nearest stormwater system.
Between the date the subgrade is completed and the application of the first metal-course
ew
aggregate, the subgrade shall be maintained true to grade and cross section. Should
potholes, soft spots or ravelling develop in the subgrade, the area so affected shall be
scarified and clean material added and recompacted.
3.4.6
sN
Spreading and compaction of metal course aggregates
The metal course aggregates shall be placed on the prepared subgrade in layers. The
aggregate layers shall be of adequate thickness and stiffness to ensure that with adequate
rd
compaction the minimum required deflections are achieved.
da
99954
118.92.13.10 3.4.7 Sub-base
Sub-base material shall be placed in layers thin enough to ensure requisite compaction
and CBR standards are achieved. Sub-base shall be compacted in accordance with
an
NZTA B/2 specification to achieve a mean of 95% of maximum dry density (MDD) and a
minimum of 92% of MDD.
St
The layers shall be so placed that when compacted they will be true to the grades and
levels required. The laying procedure shall be arranged to minimise segregation. Grader
use shall be restricted to essential shaping and final trimming, with minimum working of
ht
the final surface.

rig
The sub-base layer may be used by construction traffic, but such traffic shall be managed
09
29
80
80
00
16
to ensure no detrimental effects to the final road construction.

py
3.4.8 Basecourse
Basecourse shall be placed in layers not exceeding 150 mm. It shall be placed and
compacted to NZTA B/2 specification density requirements to achieve a mean of 98%
Co
MDD and a minimum of 95% MDD.
Where approved by the TA, cement stabilised basecourses should be placed and compacted
in accordance with the NZTA B/5 specification.
To assist compaction, water may be added as a fine mist spray to achieve optimum moisture
content. Particular care shall be taken to avoid excess water reaching the formation or
sub-base course.
108
NZS 4404:2010
Fine aggregate may be hand spread in a comparatively dry state over any open textured
portion of the final compacted aggregate surface. The fine aggregate shall be vibrated
or rolled into the interstices of the basecourse. The use of such surface choking material
*
shall be kept to a minimum. Special attention shall be paid to the consolidation of the
d
edges of the basecourse.
n
The construction of the basecourse shall be carried out in a manner that will ensure the
production of a stone mosaic surface after sweeping.
ala
3.4.9 Maintenance of basecourse
The finished aggregate surface shall be maintained at all times true to grade and cross
Ze
section by placement of a ‘running course’, watering as required, trimming, planning, rolling,
and taking appropriate measures to ensure the even distribution of traffic.
Every precaution shall be taken to ensure that the surface of the basecourse does
ew
not pothole, ravel, rut or become uneven, but should any of these conditions become
apparent, the surface shall be patched with suitable aggregate and completely scarified
and recompacted. The basecourse shall be maintained to the specified standards until
covered with an impermeable surfacing layer. sN
3.4.10 Basecourse preparation for surfacing
rd
Any loose or caked material shall be removed from the surface without disturbing the
compacted base, and the material so removed shall be disposed of. The surface shall then
be swept clean of any dust, dirt, animal deposits, or other deleterious matter. The surface
da
of the road at the time of surfacing shall be clean, dry and uniform, tightly compacted, and
99954
118.92.13.10
shall present a stone mosaic appearance. Immediately prior to any form of surfacing a strip
600 mm wide contiguous to each channel or seal edge shall be sprayed with an approved
an
ground sterilising weed killer at the manufacturer’s recommended rate of application.
For second coat sealing, repairs shall be carried out prior to sealing. Areas to be patched
St
shall be cleaned and loose material removed before application of an emulsion tack coat
and asphaltic patching material. The repairs shall provide a finished surface flush with the
levels and grades of the surrounding pavement, and shall not hold water.
ht
Prior to commencement of sealing the surface preparation shall be inspected by the TA.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
3.4.11 Deflection testing prior to surfacing

Where required by the TA prior to placing the surfacing layer (except for cast in situ concrete
py
roads) deflections shall be tested by the Benkelman beam method (see table 3.4). At least
95% of all tests shall comply with the standards appropriate to the road type. Where the
TA does not have its own deflection standards table 3.4 shall be considered as a minimum
Co
standard. In addition no test shall give deflections greater than 25% above the specified
maximum.
109
NZS 4404:2010
Table 3.4 – Benkelman beam standards
Live and play Deflections Shop and trade Deflections

Work and learn
*
Average Maximum Make and move Average Maximum
d
Lane 1.50 mm 1.80 mm Lane 1.00 mm 1.20 mm
n
Local road 1.50 mm 1.80 mm Local road 1.00 mm 1.20 mm
ala
Connector/ Connector/
1.25 mm 1.50 mm 1.00 mm 1.20 mm
collector collector
Ze
Readings shall be taken in the wheel path in both lanes and at a maximum interval of 10 m.
3.4.12 Surfacing specification

Chipsealing construction standards shall comply with NZTA specifications P/3 and P/4.
ew
Asphaltic concrete construction standards shall comply with NZTA specification P/9.
3.4.13 Bitumen application rate sN

Bitumen application rate for chipseals and tack coats shall be assessed based on current
NZTA design methods and ambient weather conditions at the time of construction.
rd
3.4.14 Footpaths and cycle paths
da
3.4.14.1 Concrete
99954
118.92.13.10
Concrete footpaths and cycle paths shall be formed over not less than 100 mm of compacted
metal. The formation is to be thoroughly compacted by rolling before any concrete is placed.
an
Porous areas shall be blinded with sand prior to placing concrete.
The foundation shall be evenly trimmed to a crossfall of 1 in 50. If the foundation is dry, it
St
shall be moistened in advance of placing concrete.
The concrete paths shall be laid with construction joints at intervals of not greater than 3 m.
If paths are constructed by continuous pour techniques, clean, true, well-oiled 5 mm thick
ht
steel strips at least 40 mm deep shall be inserted at 3 m intervals to facilitate controlled

cracking. These strips shall be carefully removed after the concrete has set. Alternatively,
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
the joints may be cut by means of a concrete-cutting saw. In this case the cutting shall
be carried out not more than 48 hours after pouring and shall be to a depth of 40 mm.
These joints may also be typically tooled into the concrete when the concrete is still plastic.
py
Minimum concrete thickness for paths is 100 mm. Concrete in both footpaths and kerb
and channel shall be cured for at least 7 days during dry weather.
Co
Concrete used in footpaths shall be of at least 20 MPa, 28-day strength. Concrete for
crossings shall be 30 MPa, 28-day strength as detailed in 3.4.4.5.
Where required, vehicle and pedestrian crossings shall be constructed in accordance

with the TA standard details. Tactile pads may be required at pedestrian kerb crossings.
110
NZS 4404:2010
3.4.14.2 Asphaltic concrete

Asphaltic concrete footpaths and cycle paths shall be placed over not less than 100 mm of
compacted basecourse after removal of all organic and soft subgrade. Asphaltic concrete
*
shall be laid in a minimum layer thickness of 25 mm of mix M/10 material. Asphalt concrete
d
paths shall not puddle water and shall be edged with either concrete or ground treated
timber where abutting berms or other grassed areas.
n
ala
3.4.14.3 Concrete pavers
Concrete pavers for footpaths shall be placed over not less than 100 mm of compacted
basecourse after removal of all organic and soft subgrade. Laying shall be in accordance
Ze
with NZS 3116. Pavers shall be laid to 5 mm above tops of channels and other drainage
features.
ew
3.4.14.4 Surface finish, tolerances
Surface finish and tolerances on footpaths shall comply with the appropriate design
requirements.
3.4.15 Kerb and channel sN

Kerb and channel may be either cast in situ or extruded.
rd
For cast in situ kerb and channel, formwork shall be clean dressed timber or steel sections
adequately oiled or otherwise treated to allow ease of striking without staining or damaging
of the stripped concrete surface.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
No formwork shall be stripped until at least 2 days have elapsed from time of pouring
concrete.
an
For extruded kerb and channel, concrete used shall be of such consistency that after
extrusion it will maintain the kerb shape without support. The extrusion machine shall be
St
operated to produce a well compacted mass of concrete free from surface pitting.
Concrete used in kerbs and channels shall be of at least 20 MPa, 28-day strength. Finished
ht
tolerances and standards shall satisfy the design standards.
3.4.16 Berms and landscaping

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Berms shall be formed after all other construction has been completed. Grassed and
planted areas shall have a 100 mm thick layer of topsoil free of weeds, stones, and other
foreign matter and shall finish 15 mm above adjacent footpath level to allow for settlement.
py
After topsoiling, the berm shall be either sown or planted, or both, and maintained free of
weeds for the contract maintenance period. The seed mix shall be approved by the TA.
Co
When sown, rather than planted, grass coverage of not less than 90% shall be achieved
within 1 month of sowing and before completion documentation will be accepted for
processing by the TA.
For additional requirements for swales see 3.3.19.5.
Any landscaping in the road reserve shall be in accordance with section 7 of this Standard.
111
NZS 4404:2010
3.4.17 Surface finish and tolerances on kerbs, paths, and accessways
3.4.17.1 Kerbs and channel
*
All curves both horizontal and vertical shall be tangential to straights and the lines and levels
of kerbs shall be such as to give the finished kerbs smooth lines free of kinks and angles.
d
Construction joints shall be placed in all unreinforced kerb and channel at 10 m centres.
n
Workmanship standards shall be such that, on straights, kerbing shall not deviate from a
ala
straight line by more than 6 mm in any length of 3 m. Similar standards shall apply to the
gradient line. No visible ponding in new channels shall occur.
The exposed faces of the kerb and channel shall present smooth, uniform appearance
Ze
free from honey-combing or other blemishes to at least U3 standard in NZS 3114.
3.4.17.2 Paths and accessways
ew
Concrete paths and accessways shall be finished with a crossfall to shed water and an
even non-skid brush surface to finish U5 in NZS 3114.
sN
The surface of other paths/accessways shall be of uniform texture as would be expected
from best trade standards for the surfacing used. Crossfalls of 2% shall be provided.
The surface of all paths/accessways shall not deviate by more than 6 mm from a 3 m
rd
straight edge at any point and no abrupt changes in line or level shall occur. No path/
accessway shall pond water.
da
3.4.18 Progress inspections

99954
118.92.13.10
The contractor shall give notice to the TA as appropriate to allow the conduct of all inspections
an
required to facilitate eventual acceptance of the project by the TA.
3.4.19 Installation of traffic services, road furniture, benchmarks

St
Traffic lines and utility services shall be painted and marked after initial surfacing and
sweeping has been completed. Road furniture and survey reference marks shall be
installed, prior to final inspections being made by the TA.
ht
3.4.20 As-built and completion documentation

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
On completion of construction, information and documents as required by the TA shall be

provided by the developer’s professional advisor. (See Schedule 1D for further information.)
The information provided shall provide sufficient detail to enable the TAs to complete the
py
road assessment and maintenance management database input.

Co
112
NZS 4404:2010
4 STORMWATER
4.1 Scope
*
This section sets out requirements for the design and construction of stormwater systems
d
for land development and subdivision. The significant issues for stormwater management
n
are the protection of people, property, infrastructure, and the receiving environment.
Stormwater management requires the integration of land use, roading, and ecological
ala
factors. A catchment-based approach is required with consideration of changes in catchment
hydrology, rainfall patterns, and sea level rise from climate change effects.
Ze
Opportunities exist with stormwater design to use or replicate the natural drainage system.
Grassed swales, natural or artificial waterways, ponds and wetlands, for example, may
in certain circumstances be not only part of the stormwater system, but also a preferred
solution especially if low impact on receiving waters downstream is critical. Low impact
ew
design is the preferred approach, particularly where there is a requirement to replicate the
pre-development hydrological regime. Nevertheless piped stormwater systems will often

be required either in support of low impact systems or as the primary system.
sN
Stormwater systems serve a number of purposes including the management of storm
surface water run-off, treatment of such run-off, and groundwater control. All aspects need
to be considered in design and achieved with minimal adverse effects on the environment.
rd
4.2 General
da
99954
118.92.13.10
4.2.1 Objectives
The primary objective of a stormwater system is to manage storm surface water run-off
an
to minimise flood damage and adverse effects on the environment.
The stormwater system shall include provision for:

St
(a) A level of service to the TA’s customers in accordance with the authority’s policies;
(b) Minimised adverse environmental and community impact;
ht
(c) Protection from potential adverse effects to aquatic ecosystems;

(d) Compliance with environmental requirements;
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(e) Adequate system capacity to service the fully developed catchment;

(f) Long service life with consideration of maintenance and life-cycle cost;
py
(g) Application of low impact design solutions.
4.2.2 Legislation and guidance manuals

Co
Referenced legislation is listed in the Referenced Documents section of this Standard.
A selection of guidance manuals which may provide a useful resource or basis for stormwater
design and management is set out in Referenced Documents and Related Documents.
They are non-statutory in themselves but may be required to be complied with under
regional or district plan rules.
113
NZS 4404:2010
4.2.3 Local authorities’ requirements

The requirements of relevant regional and district plans on stormwater shall be met.
Regional plan requirements will generally be limited to effects of stormwater on the
*
natural environment. The TA exercises control over infrastructure associated with land
d
development and subdivision.
n
Authorisation will be required from the regional council for the discharge of stormwater
ala
unless the discharge is to an existing and consented stormwater system and meets any
conditions which apply to the existing system. Other activities often associated with
stormwater infrastructure which need to be authorised by the regional council include: the
diversion of natural water during construction, the permanent diversion of natural water
Ze
as a consequence of the development, activities in the bed or on the banks of a natural
waterway, and damming waterways.
The discharge of clean stormwater and other activities where effects are considered minor
ew
may be authorised as a permitted activity subject to certain conditions in the regional plan.
Authorisation may also be by way of a comprehensive consent held by the TA for a large
area or entire catchment.
sN
In other circumstances site specific discharge permits and water permits shall be obtained.
Advice should be sought from the LAs at the earliest stage of planning for stormwater
infrastructure and receiving waters.
rd
Discharge and temporary water permits required during construction shall be applied for
by the developer and exercised in the name of the developer.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
C4.2.3
an
The division of responsibilities between TAs and regional councils is set out in the
Resource Management Act.
St
4.2.4 Catchment management planning

Stormwater management planning should be carried out on a subcatchment or catchment-
ht
wide basis. Where the proposed development is in an area covered by a local authority
comprehensive catchment management plan, designers will be required to comply with
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
the design philosophy in the plan.
If there is no catchment management plan for the area of the proposed development, the
stormwater planning requirements should be discussed with the LAs at an early stage.
py
The implications of future development on adjoining land should be on the basis of replicating
the pre-development hydrological regime whereby the maximum rate of discharge and
Co
peak flood levels post-development are no greater than pre-development.
Any catchment management planning issues should be discussed with LAs at an early stage.
114
NZS 4404:2010
4.2.5 Effects of land use on receiving waters

Impervious surfaces and piped stormwater systems associated with development have
an effect on catchment hydrology. Faster run-off of storm flows, reduction in base flows,
*
and accelerated channel erosion and depositions alter the hydrology and adversely affect
d
the quality of receiving waters. Development should aim to minimise the increase in the
frequency at which pre-development discharges are exceeded across a range of design
n
rainfall events as this has implications for the biodiversity of the aquatic biological community.
ala
The effects of rural development on receiving waters are generally less significant. The
modification to stream hydrology is generally minor. However, any reduction in riparian
vegetation increases sediment loads and nutrient concentrations are likely to reduce
Ze
aquatic biodiversity.
4.2.6 System components
ew
The stormwater system conveys storm surface run-off and shallow groundwater from
the point of interception to soakage areas, attenuation areas, or the point of discharge
to receiving waters. Components of the primary system may include roadside channels,
sN
swales and sumps, stormwater pipelines, subsoil drains, outlet structures, soakage areas,
wetlands, ponds, and water quantity and quality control structures. Secondary surface
flow paths to convey primary system overflows will also be required.
rd
These different system components are set out on standard construction drawings contained
in Appendix B. The drawings are copyright waived and may be adapted by subdivision
developers for incorporation into specific designs.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
4.2.7 Catchments and off-site effects

an
All stormwater systems shall provide for the management of stormwater run-off from
within the land being developed together with any run-off from upstream catchments. In
designing downstream facilities the upstream catchment shall be considered to be fully
St
developed to the extent defined in the operative district plan or structure plan unless the
TA advises that the upstream catchment will be required to be controlled for off-site effects
at the time of its development.
ht
For all land development infrastructure (including projects involving changes in land use or
coverage) the design of the stormwater system shall include the evaluation of stormwater
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
run-off changes on upstream and downstream properties. This evaluation will be required
at the resource consent stage and may be linked to a requirement to replicate the pre-
development hydrological regime.
py
Upstream flood levels shall not be increased by any downstream development unless any
increase can be shown to have not more than a minor impact on the upstream properties.
Co
Downstream impacts could include (but are not limited to) changes in flow peaks and
patterns, flood water levels, contamination levels and erosion or silting effects, and effects
on the existing stormwater system. Where such impacts are more than minor, mitigation
measures such as peak flow attenuation, velocity control, and treatment devices will be
required.
Fish passage shall be maintained. This is likely to be a requirement of any authorisation

from the regional council.
115
NZS 4404:2010
4.2.8 Water quality

Stormwater treatment devices may be required to avoid adverse water quality effects
on receiving waters. The type of potential contaminants should be identified and then
*
treatment devices designed to address the particular issues. The need for treatment
d
devices should be considered for every discharge even when it is not a direct discharge
to a receiving water, for instance where the discharge is to an existing network. In this
n
instance specific approval from the TA will be required.
ala
4.2.9 Climate change
Climate change is expected to increase the intensity and frequency of heavy rainfall
Ze
events, even in areas where mean annual rainfall is predicted to decrease. In low-lying
coastal areas higher sea levels will also affect rivers, streams, and stormwater outfalls.
The performance of stormwater systems in these areas will need to take into account
higher predicted downstream sea levels.
ew
Rainfall design charts shall be adjusted to take into account the predicted increase in
rainfall intensities from the effects of climate change.
C4.2.9
sN
Refer to the following Ministry for the Environment publications for guidance on climate
change:
rd
‘Preparing for climate change – A guide for local government in New Zealand’ for guidance
on adjusting rainfall design charts at selected locations within each regional council area.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
‘Preparing for coastal change – A guide for local government in New Zealand’ for
guidance on coastal hazards and climate change.
an
‘Tools for estimating the effects of climate change on flood flow – A guidance manual
for local government in New Zealand’ for incorporating climate change in flood flow
estimation.
St
‘Preparing for future flooding – A guide for local government in New Zealand’ provides
an overview of the expected impacts of climate change on flooding.
ht
4.3 Design
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
4.3.1 Design life

All stormwater systems shall be designed and constructed for an asset life of at least 100
py
years. Some low impact design devices such as rain gardens and other soakage systems
may require earlier renovation or replacement.
Co
4.3.2 Structure plan

The TA may provide a structure plan setting out certain information to be used in design,
such as flows, sizing, upstream controls, pipe layout, treatment, or mitigation requirements.
Catchment management plans should detail the appropriate stormwater management options
for the given structure plan area. Where a structure plan is not provided, the designer
shall determine the information by investigation using any catchment management plan
for the area, this Standard, and any requirements of the TA, as appropriate.
116
NZS 4404:2010
4.3.3 Future development

Where further subdivision, upstream of the one under consideration, is provided for in the
district or regional plan, the TA may require stormwater infrastructure to be constructed
*
to the upper limits of the subdivision.
d
Additionally, the TA may require further capacity to be provided in the stormwater system
n
to cater for existing or future development upstream.
ala
4.3.4 System design
4.3.4.1 Primary and secondary systems
Ze
Stormwater systems shall be considered as the total system protecting people, land,
infrastructure, and the receiving environment.
A stormwater system consists of:
ew
(a) A primary system designed to accommodate a specified design rainfall event; and
(b) A secondary system to ensure that the effects of stormwater run-off from events that
sN
exceed the capacity of the primary system are managed, including occasions when
there are blockages in the primary system.
4.3.4.2 Secondary systems

rd
Secondary systems shall consist of ponding areas and overland flow paths to manage
excess run-off. Where possible, secondary systems shall be located on land that is, or is
da
99954
118.92.13.10 proposed to become public land. If located on private land, the secondary system shall
be protected by legal easements in favour of the TA or by other encumbrances prohibiting
earthworks, fences, or other structures, as appropriate.
an
Secondary systems shall be designed so that erosion or land instability will not occur.
Where necessary the design shall incorporate special measures to protect the land
St
against such events.
Ponding or secondary flow on local roads shall be limited to a 100 mm maximum height at
ht
the centre line and velocity such that the carriageway is passable in a 5% AEP design storm.
The TA should be consulted to confirm design requirements.

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
C4.3.4.2
The Austroads ‘Guide to road design – Part 5: Drainage design’ provides more information
py
on major and minor stormwater design and acceptable volume and velocity for surface
flow.
Co
4.3.5 Design criteria

When the design process includes the use of a hydrological or hydraulic model, all underlying
assumptions (such as run-off coefficients, time of concentration, and catchment areas)
shall be clearly stated so that a manual check of calculations is possible. A copy of the
model may be required by the TA for either review or records or both. ➤
117
NZS 4404:2010
The designer shall undertake the necessary design and prepare design drawings compatible
with the TA’s design and performance parameters. Designers shall ensure the following
aspects have been considered and where appropriate included in the design:
*
(a) The size of pipes, ponds, swales, wetlands, and other devices in the proposed
d
stormwater management system;
n
(b) How the roading stormwater design is integrated into the overall stormwater system;
ala
(c) The type and class of materials proposed to be used;
(d) System layouts and alignments including:
(i) Route selection
Ze
(ii) Topographical and environmental aspects (see 5.3.4.3)
(iii) Easements
(iv) Clearances from underground services and structures (see 5.3.7.9 and
ew
5.3.7.10)
(v) Provision for future extensions;

(vi) Location of secondary flowpaths;
(e) Hydraulic adequacy (see 4.3.9.5); and sN
(f) Property service connection locations and sizes (see 4.3.11).
rd
The designer should liaise with the TA, prior to commencement of design, to ensure that
sufficient prerequisite information is available to undertake the design.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
For catchments less than 50 ha, surface water run-off using the Rational Method will
generally be accepted. For larger catchments, or where significant storage elements
(such as ponds) are incorporated, surface water run-off should be determined using an
an
appropriate hydrological or hydraulic model.
The New Zealand Building Code (NZBC) clause E1/VM1 provides guidance in the design
St
of pipes, culverts, and open channel hydraulics.
4.3.5.1 Design storms

ht
All new stormwater systems shall be designed to cope with climate change adjusted design
storms of at least the annual exceedence probability (AEP) set out in table 4.1 unless
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
specific approval has been obtained from the TA.
Table 4.1 – Recommended AEP for design storms

py
Function AEP Return period

(%) (years)
Co
Primary systems –
Rural 20 5
Residential and rural residential areas 10 10
Commercial and industrial areas 10 10
All areas where no secondary flow path is available 1 100
Secondary systems 1 100
118
NZS 4404:2010
C4.3.5.1
Rainfall intensity design charts developed from local data should be used if available.
*
High Intensity Rainfall Design Systems (HIRDS) data available from NIWA is another
source for rainfall design data.
d
n
4.3.5.2 Freeboard
ala
The minimum freeboard height additional to the computed top water flood level of the
1% AEP design storm should be as follows or as specified in the district or regional plan:
Freeboard Minimum height
Ze
Habitable dwellings (including attached garages) 0.5 m
Commercial and industrial buildings 0.3 m
Non-habitable residential buildings and detached garages 0.2 m
ew
The minimum freeboard shall be measured from the top water level to the building platform
level or the underside of the floor joists or underside of the floor slab, whichever is applicable.
4.3.5.3 Tidal areas

sN
In tidal areas, design criteria should be discussed with the LAs at an early stage. Storm
surge, tsunami hazards, climate change, and sea level rise need to be taken into account
rd
in accordance with the proposed NES on sea level rise and assessed in line with the
Ministry for the Environment guidance manual Coastal hazards and climate change – A
da
99954
118.92.13.10
guidance manual for local government in New Zealand.
4.3.5.4 Hydraulic design of stormwater systems

an
The hydraulic design of stormwater pipes should be based on either the Colebrook-
White formula or the Manning formula. System capacity shall be determined from the
Colebrook-White or Manning coefficient as shown in table 4.2. The Colebrook-White and
St
Manning formulae can be found in Metrication: Hydraulic data and formulae (Lamont).
Manufacturers’ specifications should also be referred to.
ht
C4.3.5.4
rig
3
09
Refer to ‘Roughness characteristics of New Zealand rivers’ by D M Hicks and P D Mason

29
80
80
00
16
for further guidance on the selection of Manning’s ‘n’ values. This handbook emphasises
that the Manning’s ‘n’ values can vary significantly with flow and the selected value
should be based on the graphs of Manning’s ‘n’ versus discharge presented for each site.
py
Co
119
NZS 4404:2010
Table 4.2 – Guide to roughness coefficients for gravity stormwater pipes concentrically jointed and clean
Description Colebrook-White Manning
*
coefficient roughness
k (mm) coefficient
d
(n)
n
Circular pipes
PVC 0.003 – 0.015 0.008 – 0.009
ala
PE 0.003 – 0.015 0.008 – 0.009
Vitreous clay 0.15 – 0.6 0.010 – 0.013
Ze
Concrete – machine made to AS/NZS 4058 0.03 – 0.15 0.009 – 0.012
Corrugated metal – 0.012 – 0.024
GRP (glass reinforced plastic) 0.003 – 0.015 0.008 – 0.009
ew
Culverts
Concrete pre-cast (pipes and boxes) 0.6 0.016
Open channel
Straight uniform channel in earth and gravel in good condition

sN – 0.0225
Unlined channel in earth and gravel with some bends and in fair condition – 0.025
rd
Channel with rough stony bed or with weeds on earth bank and natural – 0.030
streams with clean straight banks
da
Winding natural streams with generally clean bed but with some pools and – 0.035
99954
118.92.13.10
shoals
an
Winding natural streams with irregular cross section and some obstruction – 0.045
with vegetation and debris
Irregular natural stream with obstruction from vegetation and debris – 0.060
St
Very weedy irregular winding stream obstructed with significant overgrown – 0.100
vegetation and debris
ht
NOTE –
Refer to AS 2200 table 2 and notes, and Metrication: Hydraulic data and formulae (Lamont).
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
4.3.5.5 Energy loss through structures

Energy loss is expressed as velocity head:
py
Energy loss He = kV2/2g

Co
where k is the entrance loss coefficient and V is velocity.
The entrance loss coefficient table and energy loss coefficient graph in NZBC clause E1/
VM1 provide k values for flow through inlets and access chambers respectively.
For bends, see table A1 in Appendix A.
120
NZS 4404:2010
4.3.5.6 Determination of water surface profiles

Stormwater systems shall be designed by calculating or computer modelling backwater
profiles from an appropriate outfall water level. On steep gradients both inlet control and
*
hydraulic grade line analysis shall be used and the more severe relevant condition adopted
d
for design purposes. For pipe networks at MHs and other nodes, water levels computed
at design flow shall not exceed finished ground level while allowing existing and future
n
connections to function satisfactorily.
ala
In principle, each step in the determination of a water surface profile involves calculating
a water level upstream (h2) for a given value of discharge and a given start water level
downstream (h1).
Ze
This can be represented as:
h2 + V22 / 2 g = h1 + V12 / 2 g + Hf + He
ew
where V is velocity,
Hf is head loss due to boundary resistance within the reach (for pipes, unit head loss is
read from Manning’s flow charts, for example), sN
He is head loss within the reach due to changes in cross section and alignment (see
table 4.3 for loss coefficients).
rd
Table 4.3 – Loss coefficients for bends

da
99954
118.92.13.10
Bends k
MH properly benched with radius of bend

an
1.5 x pipe diameter 0.5 to 1.0

Bend angle
90o 0.90
St
45o 0.60
22.5o 0.25
ht
4.3.6 Stormwater pumping

Stormwater pumping should be avoided wherever possible. However, in certain
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
circumstances for low lying areas, and where gravity drainage is difficult to achieve,
stormwater pumping may be required to achieve the appropriate levels of service and
protection.
py
The consequences and risk of pump malfunction and power outages should be considered
carefully.
Co
C4.3.6
Sea level rise scenarios may need to be assessed in line with the proposed NES on
sea level rise. Such assessments are likely to indicate the need to design for or at least
plan for stormwater pumping in the future to ensure levels of service are maintained
throughout asset life.
121
NZS 4404:2010
4.3.7 Low impact design

Low impact design aims to use natural processes such as vegetation and soil media to
provide stormwater management solutions as well as adding value to urban environments.
*
The main principles of low impact design are reducing stormwater generation by reducing
d
impervious areas, minimising site disturbance, and avoiding discharge of contaminants.
Stormwater should be managed as close to the point of origin as possible to minimise
n
collection and conveyance. Benefits include limiting discharges of silt, suspended solids,
ala
and other pollutants into receiving waters, and protecting and enhancing natural waterways.
Effective implementation of LID principles typically requires more planning and design
input than piped stormwater systems. Aspects in the design process requiring specific
Ze
consideration include provision of secondary flow paths, land requirements, and provision
for effective operation and maintenance.
ew
C4.3.7
Useful guidance on low impact design practices can be found in the following Auckland
Regional Council (ARC) publications: ‘Low impact design manual for the Auckland
sN
region, Technical Publication 124’; ‘Application of low impact design to brownfield sites,
Technical Report 2008-20’; and ‘Integration of low impact design, urban design and
urban form principles, Technical Report 2009-83’.
rd
Additional guides that may be useful are listed in Referenced Documents and Related
Documents.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
4.3.7.1 Low impact design stormwater system

Low impact design is a type of stormwater system that aims to minimise environmental
an
impacts by:
(a) Reducing peak flow discharges by flow attenuation;

St
(b) Eliminating or reducing discharges by infiltration or soakage;

(c) Improving water quality by filtration;
ht
(d) Installing detention devices for beneficial reuse.

rig
3
09
4.3.7.2 Low impact design process

29
80
80
00
16
Key design considerations include:
(a) Design objective. The need to be clear about what is being designed for is important
py
to informing decisions on the type of device and maintenance approach that is

appropriate in a given context. Low impact devices offer many opportunities to
deliver multiple outcomes in addition to their stormwater functionality;
Co
(b) Device selection. The proper design and position of a product or device within the
stormwater treatment train is important. It is critical to select a device or product
that is fit for purpose, robust, and effective for delivering the design objective over
its design life. Problems with the operation and maintenance of a device can occur
when it is inappropriate for a given location or is undersized for its purpose. The
respective position of the various components in the treatment train is an important
consideration in ensuring the sustained effectiveness of the system;
122
NZS 4404:2010
(c) Integrated approach. Ensure that those who will become responsible for the ongoing
operation and maintenance of low impact devices are involved in the design process.
This is critical to informing the development of a practical design that will enable
*
ease of maintenance and develop ownership for ensuring the device performs as
d
it was intended;
(d) Design for maintenance. Maintenance of devices shall be considered early in the
n
design process. This will assist in the identification of features that will facilitate the
ala
ease and efficiency of ongoing operation and maintenance of devices. Elements
to consider in the design for the maintenance and operation of the systems include:
(i) Access
Ze
(ii) Vegetation
(iii) Mulch
(iv) Sediment
ew
(v) Mechanical components
(vi) Vandalism and safety.
4.3.7.3 Low impact design devices sN

The types of low impact design devices that could be considered for use include:
(a) Detention ponds;

rd
(b) Wetlands;
(c) Vegetated swales;
da
99954
118.92.13.10
(d) Rain gardens;

(e) Rainwater tanks;
an
(f) Soakage pits and soak holes;

(g) Filter strips;
St
(h) Infiltration trenches/basins;

(i) Permeable paving;
ht
(j) Green roofs;

(k) Tree pits.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
4.3.7.4 Detention ponds

Stormwater ponds are an accepted method of improving stormwater quality and reducing
py
peak downstream flow rates to replicate the pre-development hydrological regime.
Detention ponds can be of the ‘dry’ or ‘wet’ type and can be ‘on-line’ or ‘off-line’. The type
Co
of pond required should be discussed with the LA at an early stage.
Specific matters to be considered in pond design include:
(a) Side slope stability;

(b) Shallow ledges or batters for safety;
(c) Ease of access and maintenance including mowing and silt clean out;
(d) Shape and contour for amenity and habitat value;
(e) Effectiveness of inlet and outlet structures; ➤
123
NZS 4404:2010
(f) Overflow design and scour protection;

(g) Fish passage;
*
(h) Pest control (for example mosquitoes and blue-green algae);
(i) Species to be planted;
d
(j) Potential effect on downstream aquatic ecology and habitat;
n
(k) Maintenance requirements.
ala
If the TA is to be responsible for pond maintenance it shall be located on land owned by,
or to be vested in, the TA or protected by an appropriate easement.
Ze
4.3.7.5 Wetlands
Constructed wetlands can be designed to provide flood protection, flow attenuation, water
quality improvement, recreational and landscape amenity, and provision for wildlife habitat.
ew
Specific matters to be considered in wetland design include:
(a) Catchment area greater than 1 ha;

(b)
(c)
sN
Size calculated to achieve water quality volume;
Forebay to capture coarse sediments;
(d) Depth not to exceed 1 m;
rd
(e) Sufficient hydraulic capacity for flood flows;
(f) Sufficient detention time for sediment retention;
da
(g) Species to be planted.

99954
118.92.13.10
If the TA is to be responsible for wetlands maintenance it shall be located on land owned

an
by, or to be vested in, the TA or protected by an appropriate easement.

St
4.3.7.6 Vegetated swales

Vegetated swales are stormwater channels that are often located alongside roads or in
reserves. While their primary function is conveyance, filtration through the vegetation
ht
provides some water quality treatment.
Specific matters to be considered in swale design include:

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(a) Catchment area not greater than 4 ha;

(b) Longitudinal slope 1% – 5%;
py
(c) Slopes flatter than 1% may require underdrains;

(d) Slopes greater than 5% may require check dams to reduce effective gradient to
Co
less than 5%;

(e) Capacity for a 10% AEP event;
(f) Velocity not greater than 1.5 m/s in a 10% AEP event unless erosion protection is
provided;
(g) Grass length 50 mm – 100 mm;
(h) Species to be planted.
An option for swales with very flat longitudinal slopes and high water tables is a wetland
swale.
124
NZS 4404:2010
Typical details that may be used in swale design are shown in figures 3.6(A), 3.6(B), and
3.6(C).
*
4.3.7.7 Rain gardens
d
Rain gardens are engineered bioretention systems designed to use the natural ability of
flora and soils to reduce stormwater volumes, peak flows, and contamination loads. Rain
n
gardens also provide value through attractive design and planting. Specific matters to be
ala
considered in rain garden design include:
(a) System designed to manage a 10% AEP event without significant scour or erosion;
(b) Overland flow paths to accommodate flows in excess of the design storm;
Ze
(c) Entry and overflow positions to restrict short circuiting;
(d) Geotextile on side walls;
ew
(e) An underdrain with a minimum of 50 mm gravel cover;
(f) Pavement design in vicinity of device;

(g) Soil composition;
(h) A ponding area; sN
(i) Species to be planted;
(j) Access for maintenance.
rd
4.3.7.8 Rainwater tanks

da
Rainwater tanks can be designed to harvest water for non-potable uses such as toilet
99954
118.92.13.10
flushing and watering the garden. This can significantly reduce the demand on the potable
water supply from the TA. Where required by the TA rainwater tanks can be configured
an
to provide peak flow attenuation, to reduce stream channel erosion and the load on the
stormwater system, with or without reuse.
St
Specific matters to be considered in rainwater tank design include:
(a) Capacity: Typically 2,000 L – 5,000 L for domestic reuse and 6,000 L – 9,000 L for
ht
dual reuse and attenuation;

(b) Primary screening to keep out leaves and other coarse debris;
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(c) First-flush diverters to collect first 0.4 mm for slow release to ground through a small
chamber;
(d) Backflow prevention;
py
(e) Low level mains top-up valve;

(f) Overflow outlet;
Co
(g) Gravity or pumped;

(h) Tight-fitting cover;
(i) Cool location;
(j) Aesthetics and convenience.
125
NZS 4404:2010
4.3.7.9 Soakage devices

Soakage devices such as soak pits and soak holes, filter strips, infiltration trenches/
basins, permeable paving, green roofs, and tree pits can also be considered for managing
*
stormwater from roofs, parking areas, and roads.
d
Specific matters to be considered in soakage system design include:
n
(a) Capacity adequate for a 10% AEP event;
ala
(b) Rate of soakage determined through a soakage test with an appropriate reduction
factor (at least 0.5) applied to accommodate loss of performance over time;
(c) Capacity to accommodate the maximum potential impermeable area;
Ze
(d) Overland flow paths to accommodate flows in excess of the design storm;
(e) Confirmation that the soakage system will not have an adverse effect on surrounding
land and properties from land stability, seepage, or overland flow issues;
ew
(f) Soakage system to be located above static groundwater level;
(g) Pre-treatment device to minimise silt ingress may be required;

(h)
(i)
Interception of hydrocarbons;
Access for maintenance.
sN
For guidance on disposal using soakage on individual lots refer to NZBC clause E1/VM1.
rd
The TA may require a geotechnical assessment to be carried out by an appropriately
qualified geo-professional to determine the suitability of soil and groundwater characteristics
da
for any proposed soakage system.

99954
118.92.13.10
A discharge permit may be required from the regional council for discharge to soakage.
an
C4.3.7.9
St
National and international references that may be able to be used in the design and
maintenance of such systems are listed in Referenced Documents and Related
Documents.
ht
4.3.8 Natural and constructed waterways

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Where waterways are to be incorporated in the stormwater system, they shall be located
within a reserve of sufficient width to contain the full design storm flow with a minimum
freeboard of 500 mm.
py
Grass berms in reserves shall have a maximum side slope of 1 in 5 and additionally include
a vehicular access berm for maintenance purposes.
Co
Reserves should be designed to accommodate off-road pedestrian and cycle access for
recreational use. Planted riparian margins should be provided each side of the waterway
(see 7.2.4).
All channel infrastructure shall include protection against scour and erosion of the stream
banks and stream bed.
If the watercourse is to be in private property and be maintained by the TA it shall be

protected by an easement.
126
NZS 4404:2010
4.3.9 Pipelines and culverts
4.3.9.1 Location and alignment of public mains
*
The preferred location of public mains shall be within the road reserve or within other
public land.
d
n
Where required by the TA easements shall be provided for stormwater pipelines located
on private property.
ala
A straight alignment between manholes (MHs) is required unless there are special
circumstances. See 5.3.7.6 and 5.3.7.7 for further guidance on curved alignments for
stormwater pipelines.
Ze
4.3.9.2 Materials
Appendix A sets out acceptable system uses for various pipe materials. Stormwater pipe
ew
types as listed, or as amended may be used for stormwater infrastructure.
For materials for which there is no New Zealand or Australian Standard the specific
approval of the TA is required. sN
4.3.9.3 Minimum pipe sizes
Minimum pipe sizes for public mains and sump leads unless otherwise specified shall be:
rd
Single sump outlets

– 200 mm internal diameter
da
99954
118.92.13.10
Public mains
– 200 mm internal diameter where only taking house leads
– 300 mm internal diameter for all other mains and double sump
leads.
an
4.3.9.4 Minimum cover

Where the TA does not have specific requirements, the minimum covers as described in
St
AS/NZS 2566.2 (for buried flexible pipelines) or AS/NZS 3725 (for buried concrete pipes)
may be used.
ht
4.3.9.5 Minimum gradients and flow velocities

In flat areas gradients should be as steep as possible to control silt deposition. The
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
minimum velocity should be at least 0.6 m/s at a flow of half the 50% AEP design flow.
For velocities greater than 3.0 m/s see 5.3.5.6.
py
4.3.9.6 Culverts
In designing culverts the effects of inlet and tailwater controls shall be considered.
Co
Culverts under fills shall be of suitable capacity to cope with the design storm with no
surcharge at the inlet, unless the fill is part of a stormwater detention device or has been
designed to act in surcharge. All culverts shall be provided with adequate wingwalls,
headwalls, aprons, scour protection, removable debris traps or pits to prevent scouring
or blocking. Special consideration shall be given to the effects of surcharging or blocking
of culverts under fill.
Fish passage through culverts shall always be maintained.
Refer to the NZTA Bridge manual for waterway design at bridges and culverts.
127
NZS 4404:2010
4.3.9.7 Inlets and outlets

Where a pipeline discharges into a natural or constructed waterway, or vice versa,
consideration shall be given to energy dissipation or losses, erosion control, and land
*
instability. This is often achieved by an appropriately designed headwall structure.
d
For outlets the design shall ensure non-scouring velocities at the point of discharge.
n
Acceptable outlet velocities will depend on soil conditions, but should not exceed 2m/s
without specific provision for energy dissipation and velocity reduction.
ala
Where inlets or outlets are located on or near natural waterways their appearance in the
riparian landscape and likely effect on in-stream values shall be considered. Methods
Ze
could include cutting off the pipe end at an oblique angle to match soil slope, constructing
a headwall from local materials such as rock or boulders, planting close to the structure,
and locating outlets well back from the water’s edge.
ew
Direct discharge to a waterway or the sea may require a discharge consent from the
regional council unless authorised by a comprehensive consent held by the TA, or is a

permitted activity in a regional plan.
4.3.9.8 Outfall water levels

sN
Where a pipeline or waterway discharges into a much larger system the peak flows
generally do not coincide. Backwater profiles should produce satisfactory water levels
rd
when assessed as follows:
(a) Determine the time of concentration and set the design rainfall event for the smaller
da
system;
99954
118.92.13.10
(b) Determine the peak flow for the design event;

an
(c) Determine receiving waterway peak water level for the design rainfall event in (a);
(d) Starting with the level from (c) determine the smaller system profile at a flow of 75%
St
of the flow from (b);

(e) Determine the receiving waterway mean annual flood water level;
(f) Starting with the level from (e) determine the smaller system water profile at the
ht
flow from (b);

(g) Select the higher of the two profiles determined for design purposes.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Similarly, for tidal outfalls, peak flow may or may not coincide with extreme high tide levels.
A full dynamic analysis and probability assessment may be required.
py
Sea level rise shall be taken into account (see 4.3.5.3).

Co
4.3.9.9 Subsoil drains

Subsoil drains are installed to control groundwater levels. Perforated or slotted pipe used
under all areas subject to vehicular traffic loads shall comply with NZTA specification F/2
and NZTA F/2 notes. It is good practice to provide regular inspection points.
Bedding and backfill material around a subsoil drain pipe shall be more free-draining than
the in situ soil. If filter fabrics are used their susceptibility to clogging, thereby reducing
the through flow, should be considered.
Groundwater control shall always be considered when an open drain is piped.
128
NZS 4404:2010
In the absence of any other more appropriate criterion the design flow for subsoil systems
shall be based on a standard of 1 mm/h (2.78 L/s/ha).
*
Refer to manufacturer’s literature for information on pipe materials, filter fabrics, bedding,
and filter design.
d
n
4.3.9.10 Bulkheads for pipes on steep grades
ala
Bulkheads, or anti-scour blocks, shall be detailed on the design drawings and shall be in
accordance with Appendix B drawing CM – 003. Spacing of bulkheads shall be:
Table 4.4 – Spacing of bulkheads for pipes on steep grades
Ze
Grade Requirement Spacing (S)
(%) (m)
ew
15 – 35 Concrete bulkhead S = 100/Grade (%)
>35 Special design Refer to TA

NOTE – On grades flatter than above where scour is a problem, sand bags may be used to
stabilise the trench backfill.
sN
4.3.9.11 Trenchless technology
rd
See 5.3.6.8 and 5.3.6.9 for guidance on the use of trenchless technology.
4.3.10 Manholes
da
99954
118.92.13.10
4.3.10.1 Standard manholes

Access chambers or MHs shall be provided at all changes of direction, gradient and pipe
an
size, at branching lines and terminations and at a distance apart not exceeding 120 m
unless approved otherwise. They shall be easily accessible and located clear of any
boundary. All public mains shall terminate with a MH at the upstream end.
St
See 5.3.8.2 and 5.3.8.3 of this Standard for further guidance on the location of MHs.
ht
On pipelines equal to or greater than 1 m diameter, the spacing of MHs may be extended
with the approval of the TA.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Appendix B drawings CM – 004, CM – 005, and CM – 006 for manholes may be adopted
for stormwater systems.
py
4.3.10.2 Manhole materials

MHs may be manufactured in concrete, or from suitable plastics materials, including glass
Co
reinforced plastic (GRP), polyethylene, PVC or polypropylene, or from concrete/plastic

lined composites.
MH materials selected shall be suitable for the level of aggressiveness of the surrounding
groundwater.
4.3.10.3 Size of manholes

The standard internal diameter of circular MHs is 1050 mm and preferred nominal
internal diameters are 1050 mm, 1200 mm, and 1500 mm. However, for shallow systems,
DN 375/400 or 600 mm minimum diameter may be permitted (see 4.3.10.4). ➤
129
NZS 4404:2010
When considering the appropriate MH diameter, consideration shall be given by the

designer to the base layout to ensure hydraulic efficiency and adequate working space
in the chamber. Where the effective working space is reduced by internal drop pipes, a
*
larger diameter may be required. Where there are several inlets, consultation with the
d
TA on the layout of the chamber is recommended.
n
The base layout of MHs shall comply with 5.3.8.4.2 of this Standard and Appendix B
drawings CM – 004 and CM – 005.
ala
4.3.10.4 Shallow manholes (or mini manholes)
For shallow systems (less than 1.2 m to invert) a DN 375/400 or 600 mm minimum diameter
Ze
MH may be permitted subject to approval by the TA. Such small diameter MHs shall be
classified as maintenance shafts (MSs) for the purposes of the spacing covered under
this Standard. See Appendix B drawing CM – 005.
ew
4.3.10.5 Hydraulic flow in manholes

In addition to the normal pipeline gradient all MHs on pipelines less than 1000 mm diameter
sN
shall have a minimum drop of 30 mm within the MH to compensate for the energy loss
due to the flow through the MH. See 5.3.8.4.4 and 5.3.8.4.5 for further guidance.
4.3.10.6 Manhole connections

rd
Open cascade is permitted into MHs over 2.0 m in depth and for pipes up to and including
300 mm diameter providing the steps are clear of any cascade. Other situations may be
da
99954
118.92.13.10
considered and require TA approval.
The bases of all MHs shall be benched and haunched to a smooth finish to accommodate
an
the inlet and outlet pipe.
New inlet pipes shall be cut back to the inside face of the MH and provided with a smooth
St
finish. All chambers are to be made watertight with mortar around all openings.
Minor pipelines connecting to a MH at or below design water level in the MH shall do so

at an angle of not greater than 90o to the main pipeline direction of inflow.
ht
Minor pipelines connecting at above design water level may do so at any angle.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
4.3.10.7 Flotation
In areas of high water table, all MHs shall be designed to provide a factor of safety against
py
flotation of 1.25.
Co
130
NZS 4404:2010
4.3.11 Connection to the public system

Where the connection of individual lots and developments are to the public system they
shall meet the following requirements:
*
(a) Connection shall be by gravity flow via laterals to public mains or waterways, or to
d
a roadside kerb, or swale, or rainwater tanks;
n
(b) All new urban lots shall be provided with individual service laterals, unless on-site
ala
disposal is approved by the TA;
(c) Each connection shall be capable of serving the whole of the lot. Where, for physical
reasons, this is not practicable a partial service to the building area only may be
acceptable (subject to approval of the TA);
Ze
(d) The minimum internal diameter of connections shall be:
(v) 100 mm for residential lots
ew
(vi) 150 mm for commercial and industrial lots and connections serving two
dwellings or residential lots

(vii) 200 mm for connections serving three or more dwellings or residential lots
(e)
sN
(unless otherwise approved by the TA);
The connection shall be of a type capable of taking the spigot end of an approved
pipe;
rd
(f) Where the stormwater pipeline is outside the lot to be served, a connection pipeline
shall be extended to the boundary of the lot and be marked by a 50 mm x 50 mm
timber stake extending to 600 mm above ground level and painted blue;
da
(g) Connection to stormwater systems such as vegetated swales, soakpits, or soakage

99954
118.92.13.10
basins is acceptable provided the system is approved by the TA;

an
(h) All connections to pipelines or MHs shall be sealed by removable caps until such
time as they are required;
(i) Connections shall be indicated accurately on as-built plans. Location relative to
St
boundaries, depth to invert and ground level shall be given as a minimum.
4.3.12 Connection of lateral pipelines to public mains

ht
Factory made fittings shall be used for all connections to public mains up to 300 mm diameter.
Connections to larger mains up to 750 mm diameter shall use properly manufactured
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
saddles. Concrete bondage to the exterior of the main pipe is required.
A hole may be made in a 900 mm diameter and larger main to effect a connection. The
py
connection shall be properly dressed and plastered from inside the main to ensure that
no protrusions exist.
Co
When the lateral being connected is larger than 300 mm in diameter it shall be connected
at a MH.
131
NZS 4404:2010
4.4 Approval of proposed infrastructure

The approval process for land development and subdivision design and construction and
*
documents and supporting information on stormwater drainage infrastructure to be provided
at each stage of the process shall be in accordance with section 1 of this Standard.
d
n
4.4.1 Approval process
Stormwater infrastructure requires approval from the TA and unless the TA holds a
ala
comprehensive, or network consent for the catchment, consents from the regional council
to discharge, divert, or dam water may also be required.
Ze
In these circumstances it is good practice:
(a) To consult with LAs prior to consent application;

(b) To lodge applications with LAs at the same time so that land use and water-related
ew
resource consents can, if required, be dealt with at a joint hearing under s. 102 of
the RMA.
4.4.2 Information to be provided

sN
Specific information to be provided on any concept plans or scheme plans for development
or subdivision incorporating stormwater infrastructure shall include:
rd
(a) The location of any natural waterways or wetlands within the site or in close proximity
to a boundary. The location in plan and level of the water’s edge and shoulder of
the banks shall be indicated;
da
99954
(b) Typical pre-existing and post development cross sections through any natural
118.92.13.10
waterways or wetlands;
an
(c) The proposed proximity of buildings to the water’s edge or the shoulder of the banks,
or both;
St
(d) Clear identification of the extent of any river, stream, or coastal floodplains on, or in
close proximity to the site and overland flow paths within the site; and
(e) The level datum.
ht
TAs may require some of the information following, particularly (h) and (i), in order to
assess possible effects of a proposed development.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Applications for design approval shall include the information outlined in 1.8 of this Standard.
In addition the following information shall be provided:
py
(f) A plan showing the proposed location of existing and proposed stormwater infrastructure
and flow paths;
Co
(g) Detailed long sections showing the levels and grades of proposed stormwater
infrastructure in terms of datum;
(h) Details and calculations prepared which demonstrate that agreed levels of service will
be maintained. All applications to develop within a flood plain shall be supported by
detailed calculations and plans to determine the floodplain boundaries and building
floor levels to meet the freeboard requirements in 4.3.5.2;
132
NZS 4404:2010
(i) Details and calculations prepared which clearly indicate any impact on adjacent area
or catchment that the proposed infrastructure may have; and
(j) Operations and maintenance guidelines for any water quantity and or quality control
*
structures shall be submitted to the TA for design approval along with other documents.
d
The guidelines should describe the design objectives of the structure, describe all
major features, explain operations such as recommended means of sediment removal
n
and disposal, identify key design criteria, and identify on-going management and
ala
maintenance requirements such as plant establishment, vegetation control, and
nuisance control.
Ze
4.5 Construction
4.5.1 Pipeline construction
ew
The construction of pipelines shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of
AS/NZS 2032 (PVC), AS/NZS 2033 (PE), AS/NZS 2566 Parts 1 and 2 (all buried flexible
pipelines), or AS/NZS 3725 (concrete pipes).
4.5.2 Trenching sN
Guidance is provided in Appendix B drawings CM – 001 and CM – 002.
Where a pipeline is to be constructed through areas with unsuitable foundations such

rd
material shall be removed and replaced with other approved material or alternatively,
other methods of construction shall be carried out to the approval of the TA to provide an
da
99954
118.92.13.10
adequate foundation, and side support if required, for the pipeline.
4.5.3 Reinstatement
an
Areas where construction has taken place shall be reinstated to the condition required
by the TA.
St
4.5.4 Inspection and acceptance

Pipe systems of 1200 mm diameter or less shall be inspected using closed circuit television
ht
(CCTV) prior to acceptance by the TA.
CCTV inspections and deliverables shall be in accordance with New Zealand pipe inspection
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
manual and the requirements of the TA.
The TA may, at its discretion, also require a water test to be carried out. Testing shall be
py
carried out as specified in Appendix C.

Co
133
NZS 4404:2010
5 WASTEWATER
5.1 Scope
*
This section sets out requirements for the design and construction of wastewater systems
d
for land development and subdivision. Section 5 primarily addresses reticulated systems,
n
but reference is also made to on-site wastewater systems where applicable.
ala
If the scope of the development is sufficiently large to include its own pumping station,
then reference should be made to WSA 04.
Ze
5.2 General
5.2.1 Objectives
ew
The objectives of the design are to ensure that the wastewater system is functional and
complies with the requirements of the TA’s wastewater systems.
In principle the wastewater system shall provide:
(a)
sN
A single gravity connection for each property;
(b) A level of service to the TA’s customers in accordance with the authority’s policies;
rd
(c) Minimal adverse environmental and community impact;
(d) Compliance with environmental requirements;
da
99954
118.92.13.10
(e) Compliance with statutory OSH requirements;
(f) Adequate hydraulic capacity to service the full catchment;
an
(g) Long service life with minimal maintenance and least life-cycle cost;
(h) Zero level of pipeline infiltration on commissioning of pipes;
(i) Low level of pipeline infiltration/exfiltration over the life of the system;
St
(j) Resistance to entry of tree roots;

(k) Resistance to internal and external corrosion and chemical degradation;
ht
(l) Structural strength to resist applied loads; and

(m) ‘Whole of life’ costs that are acceptable to the TA.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
5.2.2 Referenced documents and relevant guidelines

Wastewater designs shall incorporate all the special requirements of the TA and shall
py
be in accordance with the most appropriate Standards, codes, and guidelines including
those set out in Referenced Documents. Related Documents lists additional material
Co
that may be useful.
134
NZS 4404:2010
5.3 Design
5.3.1 Design life
*
All wastewater systems shall be designed and constructed for an asset life of at least
d
100 years. Some components such as pumps, valves, and control equipment may require
earlier renovation or replacement. Refer to WSA 02 for the classification of life expectancy
n
for various components in conventional gravity systems.
ala
5.3.2 Structure plan
The TA may provide a structure plan setting out certain information to be used in design, such
Ze
as flows, sizing, upstream controls, recommended pipe layout, or particular requirements of
the TA. Where a structure plan is not provided, the designer shall determine this information
by investigation using this Standard and engineering principles.
ew
Where further subdivision, upstream of the one under consideration, is provided for in the
district or regional plan, the TA may require wastewater infrastructure to be constructed to
sN
the upper limits of the subdivision to provide for the needs of this development.
Additionally, the TA may require additional capacity to be provided in the wastewater system
to cater for existing or future development upstream. Peak flows and cleansing velocities
rd
should be taken into account when designing for additional latent capacity.
All infrastructure proposed to service future development will require the approval of the TA.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
5.3.4 System design

an
5.3.4.1 Catchment design

Pipes within any project area shall be designed to be consistent with the optimum design for
the entire catchment area and any future extension of the system shall be accommodated.
St
This may affect the pipe location, diameter, depth, and maintenance structure location and
layout. Designers shall adopt best practice to ensure a system with lowest life-cycle cost.
ht
Pipes shall be designed with sufficient depth and capacity to cater for all existing and
possible development of the catchment. Where future extension of the pipe is possible,
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
it may be necessary to carry out preliminary designs for large areas of subdivided and
unsubdivided land. This design shall use safety factors defined by the TA for hypothetical
subdivision and service for layouts to determine the necessary depth and diameter for
py
an extension.
5.3.4.2 Extent of infrastructure

Co
Where pipes are to be extended in the future, the ends of pipes shall extend past the far
boundary of the development by a distance equivalent to the depth to invert and be capped
off, unless otherwise agreed to by the TA. This ensures that a future extension of the pipe
does not require unnecessary excavation within lots or streetscapes already developed.
5.3.4.3 Topographical considerations

In steep terrain the location of pipes is governed by topography. Gravity pipelines operating
against natural fall create a need for deep installations which may require trenchless
installation. The pipe layout shall conform to natural fall as far as possible.
135
NZS 4404:2010
5.3.4.4 Geotechnical investigations

The designer shall take into account any geotechnical requirements determined under
section 2 of this Standard.
*
d
n
5.3.5.1 Design flow
ala
The design flow comprises domestic wastewater, industrial wastewater, infiltration, and
direct ingress of stormwater.
The design flow shall be calculated by the method nominated by the TA. In the absence
Ze
of information from the TA the following design parameters are recommended:
(a) Residential flows

(i) Average dry weather flow of 180 to 250 litres per day per person
ew
(ii) Dry weather diurnal PF of 2.5
(iii) Dilution/infiltration factor of 2 for wet weather

(iv)
sN
Number of people per dwelling 2.5 to 3.5;
C5.3.5.1(a)
For small contributing catchments, PFs can be significantly higher but, due to the
rd
requirement for a minimum pipe size of DN 150, such flows will not govern the design.
da
(b) Commercial and industrial flows

99954
118.92.13.10
Where flows from a particular industry or commercial development are known they should
an
be used as the basis of design. Where there is no specific flow information available and
the TA has no design guide, table 5.1 is recommended as a design basis. These flows
include both sanitary wastewater and trade wastes and include peaking factors.
St
5.3.5.2 Hydraulic design of pipelines

The hydraulic design of wastewater pipes should be based on either the Colebrook-White
ht
formula or the Manning formula. The coefficients to be applied to the various materials
are shown in table 5.2.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16

Irrespective of other requirements, the minimum sizes of property connection and reticulation
py
pipes shall be not less than those shown in table 5.3.

Co
C5.3.5.3
For infill situations, particularly where upgrading of existing DN 100 connections in

sound condition and at reasonable grades would be impractical, it is common practice
for up to six dwelling units to use the existing connection. However, such connections
would not normally be taken over as public pipes by the TA.
136
NZS 4404:2010
Table 5.1 – Commercial and industrial flows
Industry type Design flow
*
(Water usage) (Litre/second/hectare)
Light 0.4
d
Medium 0.7
n
Heavy 1.3
ala
Table 5.2 – Guide to roughness coefficients for gravity sewer lines
Ze
Material Colebrook-White Manning roughness
coefficient coefficient
k (mm) (n)
ew
VC 1.0 0.012
PVC 0.6 0.011
PE 0.6 0.009 – 0.011
GRP
sN 0.6 0.011
Concrete machine made to

AS/NZS 4058 1.5 0.012
rd
PE or epoxy lining 0.6 0.011
PP 0.6 0.009 – 0.011

da
NOTE –
99954
118.92.13.10
(1) These values take into account possible effects of rubber ring joints, slime, and debris.
(2) The n and k values apply for pipes up to DN 300.
an
(3) For further guidance refer to WSA 02:1999 table 2.4; AS 2200 table 2; Plastics pipes for water
supply and sewage disposal (Janson), Metrication: Hydraulic data and formulae (Lamont),
or the Handbook of PVC pipe (Uni-Bell).
St
Table 5.3 – Minimum pipe sizes for wastewater reticulation and property
connections
ht
Pipe Minimum size

DN (mm)
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Connection servicing 1 dwelling unit 100
Connection servicing more than 1 dwelling unit 150

py
Connection servicing commercial and industrial lots 150
Reticulation servicing residential lots 150

Co
NOTE – In practical terms, in a catchment not exceeding 250 dwelling units, and where no
pumping station is involved, DN 150 pipes laid within the limits of table 5.4 and table 5.5 will
be adequate without specific hydraulic design.
5.3.5.4 Limitation on pipe size reduction

In no circumstances shall the pipe size be reduced on any downstream section.
137
NZS 4404:2010
5.3.5.5 Minimum grades for self-cleaning

Self-cleaning of grit and debris shall be achieved by providing minimum grades specified
in tables 5.4 and 5.5.
*
d
Table 5.4 – Minimum grades for wastewater pipes
n
Pipe size Absolute minimum grade
(%)
ala
DN
150 0.55
200 0.33
300 0.25
Ze
Table 5.5 – Minimum grades for property connections and permanent ends
ew
Situation Minimum grade
(%)
DN 100 property connections 1.65

DN 150 property connections
sN
Permanent upstream ends of DN 150, 200, and 300 pipes in
1.20
1.00
residential areas with population ≤20 persons
rd
5.3.5.6 Maximum velocity

da
99954
The preferred maximum velocity for peak wet weather flow is 3.0 m/s. Where a steep
grade that will cause a velocity greater than 3.0 m/s is unavoidable refer to WSA 02 for
118.92.13.10
precautions and design procedures.

an
5.3.5.7 Gravity wastewater applications

See Appendix A for appropriate gravity pipe Standards for wastewater.
St
The pipe shall be designed to:
(a) Have adequate capacity, grades, and diameters;

ht
(b) Have adequate grade for self-cleaning;

rig
3
09
(c) Be deep enough to provide gravity service to all lots;

29
80
80
00
16
(d) Comply with minimum depth requirements to ensure mechanical protection and
safety from excavation;
py
(e) Avoid all underground services, while maintaining all the necessary clearances; and
(f) Allow for various drops and losses through MHs.
Co
5.3.5.8 Pressure and vacuum wastewater applications

The introduction of pressure or vacuum systems into a network requires approval from the
TA. See Appendix A for appropriate pressure pipe and fittings Standards for wastewater.
See also 5.3.12.
138
NZS 4404:2010
Design of pressure and vacuum wastewater applications shall consider the following:
(a) Selection of pipe material and PN class shall take account of design for dynamic
*
operation stresses (fatigue), and water temperature. Refer to Plastics Industry Pipe
Association of Australia Ltd (PIPA) guidelines for PVC and PE pipes (http://www.
d
pipa.com.au), or WSA-07;
n
(b) Sump and pump design;
ala
(c) Maintenance requirements;
(d) Access for servicing and maintenance.
Ze
5.3.6 Structural design
5.3.6.1 General
The design shall be in accordance with AS/NZS 2566.1, or AS/NZS 3725, including the
ew
structural design commentary AS/NZS 2566.1 Supplement 1. Details of the final design
requirements shall be shown on the drawings.
5.3.6.2 Seismic design

sN
All pipes and structures shall be designed with adequate flexibility and special provisions
to minimise risk of damage during earthquake. Historical experience in New Zealand
earthquake events suggests that suitable pipe options, in seismically active areas, may
rd
include rubber ring joint PVC or PE pipes. Specially designed flexible joints shall be
provided at all junctions between pipes and rigid structures.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
5.3.6.3 Structural consideration

Pipelines shall be designed to withstand all the forces and load combinations to which they
an
may be exposed including internal forces, external forces, temperature effects, settlement,
and combined stresses.
St
5.3.6.4 Internal forces

Pipelines shall be designed for the range of expected pressures, including transient
ht
conditions (surge and fatigue) and maximum static head conditions. In the case of
transient conditions, the amplitude and frequency shall be estimated. Mains subject to
negative pressure shall be designed to withstand a transient pressure of at least 50 kPa
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
below atmospheric pressure.

py
5.3.6.5 External forces

The external forces to be taken into account shall include:
(a) Trench fill loadings (vertical and horizontal forces due to earth loadings);
Co
(b) Surcharge;
(c) Groundwater;
(d) Dead weight of the pipe and the contained water;
(e) Other forces arising during installation;
(f) Traffic loads;
(g) Temperature (expansion/contraction).
The consequences of external forces on local supports of pipelines shall also be considered.
139
NZS 4404:2010

The designer should take into account any geotechnical requirements determined under
section 2 of this Standard. Where required, standard special foundation conditions shall
*
be referenced on the drawings.
d
n
5.3.6.7 Pipe selection for special conditions
Pipeline materials and jointing systems shall be selected and specified to ensure:
ala
(a) Structural adequacy for the ground conditions and water temperature;
(b) Water quality considering the lining material;
Ze
(c) Compatibility with aggressive or contaminated ground;
(d) Suitability for the geotechnical conditions;
(e) Compliance with the TA’s requirements.
ew

Trenchless technology may be preferable or required by the TA as appropriate for alignments
passing through or under:
(a) Environmentally sensitive areas;

sN
(b) Built-up or congested areas to minimise disruption and reinstatement;
rd
(c) Railway and major road crossings;
(d) Significant vegetation;
da
(e) Vehicle crossings.

99954
118.92.13.10
Wastewater pipes used for trenchless installation shall have suitable mechanically restrained
an
joints, specifically designed for trenchless application, which may include integral restraint,
seal systems, or heat fusion welded joints.
St
Trenchless installation methods may include:
For new pipes:

ht
(f) Horizontal directional drilling (HDD) (PVC with restraint joint/fusion welded PE)
(g) Uncased auger boring/pilot bore microtunnelling/guided boring (PVC with restraint
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
joint/fusion welded PE)

(h) Pipe jacking (GRP/vitrified clay (VC)/ reinforced concrete)
py
For pipe rehabilitation/renovation:
(i) Slip lining/grouting (PVC with restraint joint/fusion welded PE)

Co
(j) Closefit slip lining (PVC with restraint joint/fusion welded PE)
(k) Static pipe bursting (PVC with restraint joint/fusion welded PE)
(l) Reaming/pipe eating/inline removal (PVC with restraint joint/fusion welded PE)
(m) Soil displacement/impact moling (fusion welded PE)
(n) Cured in place pipe (thermoset resin with fabric tube)
Any trenchless technology and installation methodology shall be chosen to be compatible

with achieving the required gravity pipe gradient – refer to manufacturer’s and installer’s
recommendations.
140
NZS 4404:2010
The following details including location of access pits and exit points shall be submitted
to the TA for approval:
*
(o) Clearances from services and obstructions;
(p) The depth at which the pipeline is to be laid to ensure minimum cover is maintained;
d
(q) The pipe support and ground compaction;
n
(r) How pipes will be protected from damage during construction;
ala
(s) Any assessed risk to abutting surface and underground structures.
C5.3.6.8
Ze
Further information on trenchless technologies may be found in ‘Trenchless technology
for installation of cables and pipelines’ (Stein), ‘Trenchless technology – Pipeline
and utility design, construction, and renewal’ (Najafi), and ‘Guidelines for horizontal
ew
directional drilling, pipe bursting, microtunnelling and pipe jacking’ (Australasian Society
for Trenchless Technology).
5.3.6.9 Marking tape or pipe detection tape sN

Appropriate marking tape or detection tape shall be installed at the top of the embedment
zone, or tied to the pipe during HDD, to aid future location of the pipe. Refer to AS/NZS 2032
rd
section 5.3.15 and figure 5.1.
5.3.7 System layout

da
99954
118.92.13.10
5.3.7.1 Pipe location

The preferred layout/location of pipes within roads, public reserves, and private property
an
may vary and shall be to the requirements of each TA.
Pipes should be positioned as follows:

St
(a) Within the street according to the locally applicable utilities allocation code. In the
absence of a code, a location clear of carriageways is preferred;
ht
(b) Within public land with the permission of the controlling authority;
(c) Within reserves outside the 1 in 100-year flood area;
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(d) Within private property parallel to front, rear, or side boundaries.
5.3.7.2 Materials
py
Appendix A sets out various acceptable pipe and fittings materials for wastewater system
uses.
Co
5.3.7.3 Pipes in reserves and public open space

Pipes in reserves and public open space shall be located in accordance with the TA’s
requirements.
Crossings of roads, railway lines, waterways, and underground services shall, as far as
practicable, be at right angles.
141
NZS 4404:2010
5.3.7.4 Pipes in private property

Where pipes are designed to traverse any vacant or occupied public or private properties,
the design shall as far as practicable allow for possible future building plans, preclude
*
maintenance structures and specify physical protection of the pipe within or adjacent to
d
the normal building areas and all engineering features (existing or likely) on the site, such
as retaining walls.
n
The design shall allow access for all equipment required for construction and future
ala
maintenance. Except where obstructions or topography dictate otherwise, pipes shall
run parallel to boundaries at minimum offsets of 1.0 m.
Ze
Where pipes are designed to traverse properties containing existing structures such as
retaining walls, buildings, and swimming pools, the current and future stability of the structure
shall be considered. Pipes adjacent to existing buildings and structures shall be located
clear of the ‘zone of influence’ of the foundations. If this is not possible, protection of the
ew
pipe and associated structures shall be specified for evaluation and approval by the TA.
Where pipes to be vested to the TA are designed to traverse private properties, they should
sN
be protected by legal easements when required by the TA.
5.3.7.5 Minimum cover

Pipelines shall have minimum cover in accordance with the TA or utility owner’s requirements.
rd
AS/NZS 2566.2 may be used.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
5.3.7.6 Horizontal curves

an
Horizontal curves shall only be used where authorised by the TA.
The term ‘curved pipes’ is used to describe either cold bending of flexible pipe during
installation or small deflections at joints for rubber ring jointed flexible and rigid pipes. The
St
radius of curvature and pipe deflection shall meet manufacturer’s specifications. Curved
alignments are used in curved streets to conform with other services and to negotiate
obstructions, particularly in easements. The use of curves in locations other than curved
ht
street alignments shall be justified by significant savings in life-cycle cost. The straight
line pipe is usually preferred as it is easier and cheaper to set out, construct, locate, and
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
maintain in the future.
5.3.7.7 Vertical curves

py
Vertical curves may be specified where circumstances provide a significant saving or where
maintenance structures would be unsuitable or inconvenient. The curvature limitations for
Co
vertical curves are the same as those for horizontal curves in 5.3.7.6.
5.3.7.8 Underground services

The location of underground services affecting the proposed pipe alignment shall be
determined. Where pipes will cross other services, the depth of those services shall be
investigated, and exposed where necessary. Services upstream of the project area may
affect the design. A future extension of the pipe that will cross existing and proposed
upstream services may determine the level for the current project infrastructure.
142
NZS 4404:2010
5.3.7.9 Clearance from underground services

Where a pipe is designed to be located in a road which contains other services, the
clearance between the pipe and the other services shall comply with SNZ HB 2002, unless
*
the TA has its own specific requirements.
d
For normal trenching and trenchless technology installation, clearance from other service
n
utility assets shall not be less than the minimum vertical and horizontal clearances shown in
table 5.6. Written agreement on reduced clearances and clearances for shared trenching
ala
shall be obtained from the TA and the relevant service owner.
Table 5.6 – Clearances between wastewater pipes and other underground
Ze
services
Utility Minimum horizontal clearance Minimum vertical

(Existing service) for new pipe size ≤DN 300 clearance(1)
ew
(mm) (mm)
Gas mains 300(2) 150
Telecommunication conduits
and cables sN
300(2) 150
Electricity conduits and cables 500 225
Drains 300(2) 150

rd
Water mains 1000(3)/600 500
NOTE –
da
(1) Vertical clearances apply when wastewater pipes and other underground services cross
99954
118.92.13.10
one another, except in the case of water mains when a vertical separation shall always
be maintained, even when the wastewater pipe and water main are parallel. The wastewater
an
pipe should always be located below the water main to minimise the possibility of backflow
contamination in the event of a main break.
(2) Clearances can be further reduced to 150 mm for distances up to 2 m when passing
St
installations such as poles, pits, and small structures, providing the structure is not
destabilised in the process.
(3) When the wastewater pipe is at the minimum vertical clearance below the water main (500 mm)
maintain a minimum horizontal clearance of 1000 mm. This minimum horizontal clearance can
ht
be progressively reduced to 600 mm as the vertical clearance increases to 750 mm.

rig
3
09
29
80
5.3.7.10 Clearance from structures

80
00
16
Pipes adjacent to existing buildings and structures shall be located clear of the ‘zone of
influence’ of the building foundations. If this is not possible, a specific design shall be
py
undertaken to cover the following:
(a) Protection of the pipeline;

Co
(b) Long term maintenance access for the pipeline; and

(c) Protection of the existing structure or building.
The protection shall be specified by the designer for evaluation and acceptance by the TA.
5.3.7.11 Bulkheads for pipes on steep grades

For bulkheads, or anti-scour blocks, see 4.3.9.10 and Appendix B drawing CM – 003.
143
NZS 4404:2010
5.3.8 Maintenance structures
5.3.8.1 General
*
This describes the requirements for structures which permit access to the wastewater
system for maintenance.
d
n
Maintenance structures include:
ala
(a) Manholes (or maintenance holes) (MHs);
(b) Maintenance shafts (MSs); and
(c) Terminal maintenance shafts (TMSs).
Ze
5.3.8.2 Location of maintenance structures
The selection of a suitable location for maintenance structures may influence the pipe
ew
alignment. Generally, a minimum clearance of 1.0 m should be provided around maintenance
structures clear of the opening to facilitate maintenance and rescue. The TA may determine
other specific requirements subject to the individual site characteristics.
(a)
sN
The design shall include maintenance structures at the following locations:
Intersection of pipes except for junctions between mains and property connections;
(b) Changes of pipe size;
rd
(c) Changes of pipe direction, except where horizontal curves are used;
(d) Changes of pipe grade, except where vertical curves are used;
da
99954
118.92.13.10
(e) Combined changes of pipe direction and grade, except where compound curves
are used;
an
(f) Changes of pipe invert level;

(g) Changes of pipe material, except for repair/maintenance locations;
St
(h) Permanent or temporary ends of a pipe;

(i) Discharge of a pressure main into a gravity pipe.
ht
Table 5.7 summarises maintenance structure options for wastewater reticulation.

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
144
NZS 4404:2010
Table 5.7 – Acceptable MH, MS, and TMS options for wastewater reticulation
Application Acceptable options(1)
*
MH MS TMS
d
Intersection of pipes(2) YES NO NO
Change of pipe grade YES YES for DN 150 pipe only NO
n
at same level and using vertical bend
ala
Change of grade at YES NO NO
different level MH with internal/
external drops
Ze
Change in pipe size YES NO NO
MH is the only
option
Change in horizontal YES YES YES for DN
ew
direction within MS prefabricated units or 150 pipe only
permissible MS used with horizontal
deflection at MH bends of max 33o

deflection
Change of pipe
material
YES sN
NO NO
Permanent end of a YES YES YES

pipe(3)
rd
Pressure main YES NO NO
discharge point MH is the only
da
99954
option and shall
include a vent
118.92.13.10
NOTE –
an
(1) Where person entry is required down to the level of the pipe, a MH is the only option.
(2) This table refers to reticulation mains. DN 100 connections can be made to any maintenance
structure or, using a proprietary junction, at any point along the main.
St
(3) Some TAs permit the use of London Junction or Rodding Eye at the end of the pipe, but it is
recommended that TMSs are used.
5.3.8.3 Maintenance structure spacing

ht
For reticulation pipes, the maximum distance between any two consecutive maintenance
structures shall be 120 m.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
At the permanent end of a wastewater main, the distance from the end maintenance
structure to the nearest downstream MH shall not exceed 240 m (see figure 5.1).
py
Where a combination of MHs and MSs is used along the same pipe, the maximum spacing
between any two consecutive MHs shall not exceed 400 m irrespective of how many MSs
Co
are used between the two MHs (see figure 5.2).
5.3.8.4 Manholes
5.3.8.4.1 Manhole materials

MHs may be manufactured in concrete, or from suitable plastics materials, including GRP,
polyethylene, PVC or polypropylene, or from concrete/plastic lined composites.
MH materials selected shall be suitable for the level of aggressiveness of the wastewater
and surrounding groundwater.
145
NZS 4404:2010
5.3.8.4.2 Base layout

Each MH base shall have:
*
(a) One minimum standing area of 350 mm x 350 mm or of 350 mm diameter (where
the ladder or step irons are located), and a second minimum width standing area of
d
250 mm x 250 mm or of 250 mm in diameter, as shown in Appendix B drawing CM – 004;
n
(b) A minimum working space of 750 mm clear of drop pipes, ladders, and step irons; and
ala
(c) Channels with a minimum inside channel wall radius of 300 mm (in plan).
MH MS MS TMS or MH
Ze
Flow
ew
Up to 120 m Up to 120 m Up to 120 m
240 m maximum spacing sN

Figure 5.1 – Multiple MSs between MH and ‘last’ MH/TMS
rd
MS
da
MH 99954
118.92.13.10 MS MS MS MH
an
Flow
Up to 120 m Up to 120 m Up to 120 m Up to 120 m Up to 120 m

St
400 m maximum between MH

ht
Figure 5.2 – Multiple MSs between consecutive MHs

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
5.3.8.4.3 Allowable deflection through MHs

A maximum allowable deflection through a MH shall comply with table 5.8.
py
5.3.8.4.4 Internal falls through MHs

The minimum internal fall through a MH shall comply with table 5.9.
Co
Where the outlet diameter at a MH is greater than the inlet diameter, the minimum fall
through the MH shall be not less than the difference in diameter of the two pipes, in which
case the pipes shall be aligned soffit to soffit.
On pipes where the internal fall across the base of the MH is not achievable due to a large
difference between the levels of incoming and outgoing pipes (see Appendix B drawing
CM – 005), then internal or external drops shall be provided.
146
NZS 4404:2010
Table 5.8 – Maximum allowable deflections through MHs
Pipe size Maximum deflection
*
DN Degrees (°)
150 – 300 Up to 120° for internal fall along MH channel – see table 5.9
d
150 – 300 Up to 150° where there is a large fall at MH using an internal or
n
external drop structure
ala
Table 5.9 – Minimum internal fall through MH joining pipes of same diameter
Deflection angle at MH Minimum internal fall
Ze
Degrees (°) (mm)
0 to 30 30
>30 to 60 50
ew
>60 to 120 80
5.3.8.4.5 Effect of steep grades on MHs

sN
Where a pipe of grade >7% drains to a MH, the following precautions shall be taken if the
topography and the connection pipes allow for:
(a) No change of grade is permitted at inlet to a MH;

rd
(b) Steep grades are to be continuous through the MH at the same grade;
da
99954
118.92.13.10
(c) Depth of MH is to exceed 1.5 m to invert for DN 150, DN 200, and DN 225 pipes;
(d) Depth of MH is to exceed 2.0 m deep for DN 300 pipes;
(e) Change of direction at the MH is not to exceed 45o;
an
(f) No drop junctions or verticals are to be incorporated in the MH;

(g) Inside radius of channel inside the MH is to be greater than 6 times the pipe diameter;
St
and
(h) Benching is to be taken 150 mm above the top of the inlet pipe.
ht
To avoid excessively deep channels within MHs, steep grades (>7%) shall be ‘graded-out’
at the design phase where practicable.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Grading the channel of the MH shall be limited to falls through MHs of up to 0.15 m. Where
the depth of the channel within the MH would be greater than 2 x pipe diameter, then an
py
internal or external drop structure shall be provided.
C5.3.8.4.5
Co
For further guidance on handling steep grades, refer to WSA 02.
5.3.8.4.6 Flotation
In areas of high water table, all MHs shall be designed to provide a factor of safety against
flotation of 1.25.
147
NZS 4404:2010
5.3.8.4.7 Covers
Watertight MH covers with a minimum clear opening of 600 mm in diameter, complying
with AS 3996, shall be used, unless the TA has an alternative standard. AS 3996 gives
*
direction for the class of cover for particular locations and applications. (See Appendix B
d
drawing CM – 004.)
n
5.3.8.4.8 Bolt-down covers
ala
Where required by the TA, bolt-down metal access covers (watertight type) shall be
specified on MHs:
(a) In systems where the possibility of surcharge exists; and
Ze
(b) Along creeks subject to flooding above the level of the cover, in tidal areas, or in any
location where surface waters could inundate the top of a MH.
ew
Sealed entry holes with restricted access should be used in geothermal conditions and
for deep manholes.
MHs should, where practicable, be located on ground that is at least 300 mm above the
sN
1 in 100-year flood level. Where this is not practicable, bolt-down access covers may be
specified by the TA. It will also be necessary to specify the tying together of MH components
where bolt-down covers are specified and precast components are used.
rd
5.3.8.5 Maintenance shafts
Where maintenance shafts (MSs) have been approved by the TA, and where it is expected
da
that human access below ground will not be required, MSs can be used on DN 150, DN 200,
99954
118.92.13.10
and DN 225 pipes as an alternative to MHs, providing 5.3.8.5.1 and 5.3.8.5.2 are satisfied.
an
See Appendix B drawings WW – 001, WW – 003, and WW – 004.
Typical MS configurations are:

St
(a) Straight through MSs; and

(b) Angled MSs – see 5.3.8.5.2(a).
ht
MSs can also be used in conjunction with a TMS (see 5.3.8.6).

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
5.3.8.5.1 Limiting conditions

The following conditions apply to the use of MSs:
(a) MSs shall only be used on DN 150, DN 200, and DN 225 pipes;
py
(b) MSs shall not be used instead of MHs at junctions;

(c) Depth of MSs shall:
Co
(i) Be within the allowable depth limit for the particular pipeline system
(ii) Not exceed the MS manufacturer’s stated allowable depth limit, and
(iii) Be within the depth limit imposed by the TA;
(d) MSs shall be restricted to pipeline gradients and depths where the deviation from
vertical of the MS riser shaft (that is, projected centre line of base to centre line at
surface) is a maximum of 0.3 m measured at the surface;
(e) MSs shall not be used at discharge points of pumping mains.
148
NZS 4404:2010
5.3.8.5.2 Design parameters

MSs shall only be used at the design locations detailed in figures 5.1 and 5.2. The following
requirements shall apply:
*
(a) Directional and gradient changes at MSs shall be achieved by using either:
d
(i) Close-coupled horizontal or vertical manufactured bends immediately adjacent
n
to the MS (maximum horizontal deviation of 33o), or
ala
(ii) MS units specially manufactured with internal horizontal or vertical angles to
suit design requirements (maximum horizontal deviation of 90o);
(b) MSs at changes of grade shall be located on the pipe with the lesser of the two
Ze
gradients to minimise the deviation from the vertical of the riser shaft;
(c) Straight through type and angled MSs can incorporate up to two higher level property
connections discharging directly into the riser shaft.
ew
For construction details see Appendix B drawings WW – 003 and WW – 004.
5.3.8.6 Terminal maintenance shafts

sN
Where terminal maintenance shafts (TMSs) have been authorised by the TA and where
it is expected that human access below ground will not be required, TMSs may be used
on DN 150, DN 200, and DN 225 pipes as an alternative to MHs, providing the conditions
detailed in this Standard are satisfied.
rd
For construction details see Appendix B drawing WW – 005.

da
99954
118.92.13.10
5.3.8.6.1 Design parameters

A TMS may only be used as a terminating structure under the following conditions:
an
(a) At the permanent end of a wastewater pipe;

(b) On DN 150, DN 200, and DN 225 pipes;
St
(c) After the last MH (with no intermediate MS) provided it is spaced no further than
120 m from that MH, as shown in figure 5.1;
ht
(d) After an intermediate MS, as shown in figure 5.2;

(e) Subject to the limiting conditions detailed in 5.3.8.5.1.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
5.3.8.6.2 Property connections into a permanent end

TMSs may incorporate a maximum of two higher level property connection branches
py
discharging directly into the riser shaft. Where a property connection is required directly
ahead of the permanent end of the pipe (for example, a connection at the end of a no-exit
road), a MS may be used instead of a TMS to accommodate the straight through connection.
Co
In such a case, a DN 100 connection will require a reducer immediately adjacent to the MS.
5.3.8.6.3 Dead ends

Pipes need not terminate at a MH, MS, or TMS if the pipe is to be extended in the future.
149
NZS 4404:2010
5.3.9 Venting
In urban developments, pipes will normally be adequately ventilated within private property.
However, there are some situations where vent shafts will be required such as:
*
(a) At pumping stations;
d
(b) At MHs where pumping stations discharge to a gravity pipe; and
n
(c) At entrances and exits to inverted siphons.
ala
In such situations vent shafts shall be installed as per the requirements of WSA 02 and
WSA 04.
Ze
5.3.10 Connections
Connections link private systems to the public system or other approved outlet point. Private
systems extend through to the public system, except where the TA accepts responsibility
ew
for that part of the pipe outside private property.
5.3.10.1 General considerations

sN
The property connection should be designed to suit the existing situation and any future
development. Each connection shall be capable of serving the entire building area of the
property (unless specific approval is obtained from the TA).
rd
5.3.10.2 Requirements of design
The design shall specify the requirements for the property connections including:
da
99954
(a) Plan location and lot contours;

118.92.13.10
(b) Invert level at property boundary or junction with the main as applicable.
an
5.3.10.3 Number of connections

St
It is normal practice to provide one connection per lot. Provision of additional connections
shall be subject to justification by the developer and approval by the TA.
For multiple occupancies (unit title, cross lease, or company lease), service of the whole
ht
property is normally achieved by providing a single point of connection to a TA system.

Connection of the individual units is by joint service pipes owned and maintained by the
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
body corporate, tenants in common or the company as the case may require. In this
instance the whole of the multiple occupancy shall be regarded as a single lot.
py
Alternatively, if authorised by the TA, developers have the option of providing wastewater
facilities to the individual titles or tenements in new developments by:
(a) Constructing individual connections which shall be owned and maintained by the
Co
body corporate, tenants in common or the company; or

(b) Extending the public line into the lot and providing a separate connection to each unit.
150
NZS 4404:2010
5.3.10.4 Location of connection

The connection shall be located to service the lowest practical point on the property and
where possible:
*
(a) Be clear of obstructions, such as trees, tree roots, paved areas;
d
(b) Be easily accessible for future maintenance;
n
(c) Be clear of any known future developments, such as swimming pools or driveways;
ala
(d) Avoid unnecessarily deep excavation >1.5 m where practicable;
(e) Be within or on the property boundary.
Ze
5.3.10.5 Connection depth
Connection depths shall be set to drain the whole serviced area recognising the following
factors:
ew
(a) Surface level at plumbing fixtures of buildings (existing or proposed);
(b) Depth to invert of pipe at plumbing fixture or intermediate points;

(c)
(d)
sN
Minimum depth of cover over connection for mechanical protection;
Invert of public main at junction point;
(e) Allowance for crossing other services (for clearances see table 5.6);
rd
(f) Provision for basements;
(g) Allowance for head loss in traps and fittings;
da
99954
118.92.13.10
(h) Allowance for any soffit depth set by the TA.
The designed invert level at the end of the connection shall be not higher than the lowest
an
calculated level consistent with these factors.
5.3.11 Pumping stations and pressure mains

St
Pumping stations and pressure mains shall be designed and installed in accordance
with the standards of the TA. If the TA has no applicable standards, then they shall be
designed in accordance with WSA 04.
ht
Surge analysis and protection against surge pressures will be also required for wastewater
rig
3
09
29
80
80
pump/ pumping main system.

00
16
5.3.12 Pressure sewers and vacuum sewers

py
Pressure sewers shall be designed and installed in accordance with the standards of
the TA, with consideration in the design for cyclic dynamic stresses. Refer to the PIPA
design guidelines (http://www.pipa.com.au). If the TA has no applicable standards, then
Co
they shall be designed in accordance with WSA 02 and WSA 07.
Vacuum sewers shall be designed and installed in accordance with the standards of the
TA. If the TA has no applicable standards, then they shall be designed in accordance
with WSA 06.
5.3.13 On-site wastewater treatment and disposal

On-site wastewater treatment and disposal shall be designed and installed in accordance
with the standards of the TA. If the TA has no applicable standards, then they shall be
designed in accordance with AS/NZS 1546.1 and AS/NZS 1547.
151
NZS 4404:2010
*
Wastewater infrastructure requires approval from the TA.
d
n
Applications for design approval shall include the information outlined in 1.8 of this Standard.
ala
In addition the following information shall be provided:
(a) A plan showing the proposed location of existing and proposed wastewater infrastructure;
(b) Detailed long sections showing the levels and grades of proposed wastewater
Ze
pipelines in terms of datum;
(c) Long sections shall include full details of pipe and manhole materials and sizes;
(d) Details and calculations prepared which demonstrate that agreed levels of service
ew
will be maintained;
(e) Details and calculations prepared which clearly indicate any impact on adjacent area
or catchment that the proposed infrastructure may have; and
(f)
sN
Appropriate operating manuals, pump information, and instructions for pump stations
and pressure systems if proposed.
rd
5.5 Construction
da
99954
118.92.13.10
5.5.1 Pipeline construction
The construction of pipelines shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of
AS/NZS 2032 (PVC), AS/NZS 2033 (PE), AS/NZS 2566 Part 1 and 2 (all buried flexible
an
pipelines), AS/NZS 3725 (concrete pipes), or AS 1741 or BS EN 295 (VC).

St
5.5.2 Trenching
See Appendix B drawings CM – 001 and CM – 002 for guidance.
Where a pipeline is to be constructed through areas with unsuitable foundations such

ht
material shall be removed and replaced with other approved material or alternatively,
other methods of construction shall be carried out to the approval of the TA to provide an
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
adequate foundation and side support if required for the pipeline.
5.5.3 Reinstatement
py
Areas where construction has taken place shall be reinstated to a condition as required
by the TA.
Co
152
NZS 4404:2010
5.5.4 Inspection and acceptance

Pipeline inspection and recording by closed circuit television (CCTV) shall be carried out
prior to acceptance by the TA.
*
CCTV inspections and deliverables shall be in accordance with New Zealand pipe inspection
d
manual and the requirements of the TA.
n
ala
5.5.5 Leakage testing of gravity pipelines
Before a new pipeline is connected to the existing system, a successful field test shall be
completed. The test shall be carried out as specified in Appendix C.
Ze
5.5.6 Leakage testing of pressurised sewers
Requirements for field testing of pressurised sewers are given in Appendix C.
ew
sN
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
153
NZS 4404:2010
6 WATER SUPPLY
6.1 Scope
*
This section sets out requirements for the design and construction of drinking water supply
d
systems for land development and subdivision. It covers the design of both the localised
n
reticulation system and the larger distribution network.
ala
Water reticulation design is generally described in ‘performance based’ terms combined
with ‘deemed to comply’ solutions. Individual TAs may specify additional or varying
requirements. The designer is responsible for all aspects of the water system design,
Ze
excepting those aspects nominated and provided to the designer by the TA.
If the scope of the development is large and includes its own water source, treatment or
reservoirs, reference should be made to WSA 03.
ew
Detailed plans and design calculations (where appropriate) shall be submitted to the TA.
In addition the requirements outlined in section 1 of this Standard shall be met.
6.2 General requirements

sN
6.2.1 Objectives
rd
The objectives are to ensure that the water reticulation system is functional, the required
quality and quantity of water is supplied to all customers within the TA’s designated water
da
99954
118.92.13.10 supply area, and the TA’s requirements are satisfied.
The design shall ensure an acceptable water supply for each property including fire flows,
an
depending on TA policies by providing either:
(a) A water main allowing an appropriate point of supply to each property; or

St
(b) A service connection from the main for each property.
The designer shall consider:

ht
(c) The TA’s policies, customer charters, and contracts;

(d) The hydraulic adequacy of the system;
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(e) The ability of the water system to maintain acceptable water quality;
(f) The structural strength of water system components to resist applied loads;
py
(g) The requirements of SNZ PAS 4509;

(h) Environmental requirements;
(i) The environmental and community impact of the works;
Co
(j) The ‘fit-for-purpose’ service life for the system;

(k) Optimising the ‘whole-of-life’ cost; and
(l) Each component’s resistance to internal and external corrosion or degradation.
154
NZS 4404:2010
6.2.2 Referenced documents and relevant guidelines

Relevant legislation is listed in the Referenced Documents section of this Standard.
*
Water designs shall incorporate all the special requirements of the TA and shall be in
accordance with the most appropriate Standards, codes, and guidelines including those
d
set out in Referenced Documents, the Civil Defence Emergency Management Act 2002,
n
and Drinking-water standards for New Zealand 2005 (Revised 2008). Related Documents
ala
lists additional material that may be useful.
6.3 Design
Ze
6.3.1 Design life
All water supply systems shall be designed and constructed for an asset life of at least 100
years. Some components such as pumps, metering, control valves, and control equipment
ew
may require earlier renovation or replacement. Refer to WSA 03 for the classification of
life expectancy for various components of water supply systems.
6.3.2 Structure plan sN

The TA may provide a structure plan setting out certain information to be used in design, such
as flows, sizing, upstream controls, recommended pipe layout, or particular requirements of
the TA. Where a structure plan is not provided, the designer shall determine this information
rd
by investigation using this Standard and engineering principles.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
Where further subdivision, adjacent to the one under consideration, is provided for in the
district or regional plan, the TA may require water supply infrastructure to cater for future
an
development.
St
6.3.4 System design

Water mains shall be designed with sufficient capacity to cater for all existing and predicted
development within the area to be served and to meet the requirements of SNZ PAS 4509.
ht
The water demand allowance in the subdivision design shall include provision for:
rig
(a) Population targets;

3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(b) The area to be serviced; or

(c) Individual properties proposed by the developer.
py
Adjustment may be required to cater for the known performance (demand-based flows)
of the existing parts of the water system.
Co
155
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.5.1 Hydraulic design
*
The diameter, material type(s), and class of the water main shall be selected to ensure that:
d
(a) The main has sufficient capacity to meet peak demands while maintaining minimum
pressure;
n
(b) All consumers connected to the main receive at all times an adequate water supply
ala
and pressure; and
(c) The appropriate firefighting flows and pressures can be achieved.
Ze
6.3.5.2 Network analysis
Where required by the TA, a network analysis of the system shall be undertaken. The
system shall be analysed using a mathematical model of the network to ensure adequate
ew
water supply is available to all consumers connected to the system for all defined modes
of operation. The analysis shall include all elements within the system and shall address
all demand periods including peak demand, low demand flows, and fire flows.
6.3.5.3 Peak flows

sN
Water demands vary on a regional basis depending on a variety of climatic conditions
and consumer use patterns. The TA should be able to provide historically-based demand
rd
information appropriate for design. Where peak demands are required for the design of
a distribution system, the value shall be calculated from the following formulae:
da
Peak Day Demand (over a 12-month period) = Average Day Demand x PF

99954
118.92.13.10
Unless specified otherwise by the TA:

an
(a) PF = 1.5 for populations over 10,000;

(b) PF = 2 for populations below 2,000.
St
Peak Hourly Demand = Average Hourly Demand (on peak day) x PF

(over a 24-hour period)
Unless specified otherwise by the TA:
ht
(a) PF = 2 for populations over 10,000;

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(b) PF = 5 for populations below 2,000.
6.3.5.4 Head losses

py
The head loss through pipe and fittings at the design flow rate shall be less than:
(a) 5 m/km for DN ≤150;

Co
(b) 3 m/km for DN ≥200.
Head loss can be calculated using one of a number of standard hydraulic formulae. Some
TAs have a preferred procedure and, where appropriate, this procedure should be used.
156
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.5.4.1 Hydraulic roughness values

The hydraulic roughness values considered in the analysis shall take account of the pipe
material proposed, all fittings and other secondary head losses, and the expected increase
*
in roughness over the life of the pipe. The designer should check with the TA to ascertain
d
if it has any requirements to use a specific formula and or roughness coefficients. If there
are no specific requirements then it is recommended that the Colebrook-White formula is
n
used (see table 6.1). If the designer uses the Manning formula the coefficients in table 6.1
ala
are recommended.
Table 6.1 – Hydraulic roughness values
Ze
Material Colebrook-White Manning roughness
coefficient coefficient
k (mm) (n)
ew
PVC 0.003 – 0.015 0.008 – 0.009
PE 0.003 – 0.015 0.008 – 0.009
Ductile iron cement mortar lined
Mild steel cement mortar lined

sN
0.01 – 0.06
0.01 – 0.06
0.006 – 0.011
0.006 – 0.011
GRP 0.003 – 0.015 0.008 – 0.009

rd
NOTE –
The values show a range of roughness coefficients. The lower value in the range represents the
expected value for clean, new pipes laid straight. The higher value in the range represents the typical
da
99954
118.92.13.10
maximum expected for the product. It cannot be an absolute maximum, as the factors detailed in
AS 2200 can lead to even higher roughness values in some circumstances. Recommendations on
the appropriate roughness coefficient for a particular fluid may be obtained from the pipe supplier.
an
Refer also to AS 2200 table 2 and notes.
6.3.5.5 Minimum flows

St
The minimum flow shall be the greater of:
(a) 25 L/min for normal residential sites;

ht
(b) Fire flows as specified in SNZ PAS 4509.

rig
3
09
6.3.5.6 Minimum water demand

29
80
80
00
16
The minimum peak domestic demand shall be specified by the TA, or:
(a) Daily consumption of 250 L/p/day;

py
(b) Peaking factor of up to 5;

(c) Firefighting demands as specified in SNZ PAS 4509;
Co
(d) The network should be designed to maintain appropriate nominated pressures for
both peak demand (average daily demand in L/s x peaking factor) and firefighting
demand scenarios. These figures should be applied to mains of 100 mm diameter
or greater. Mains less than 100 mm in diameter can be sized using the multiple
dwellings provisions of AS/NZS 3500.1 table 3.2.
6.3.5.7 Sizing of mains

Tables 6.2 and 6.3 may be used as a guide for sizing mains.
157
NZS 4404:2010
Table 6.2 – Empirical guide for principal main sizing
Nominal Capacity of main (single direction feed only)

diameter
*
Residential Rural General/light High usage
of main
(lots) residential industrial industrial
d
DN
(lots) (ha) (ha)
n
100 40 10 – –
ala
150 160 125 23 –
200 400 290 52 10
225 550 370 66 18
Ze
250 650 470 84 24
300 1000 670 120 35
375 1600 1070 195 55
ew
Table 6.3 – Empirical guide for sizing rider mains
DN 50 Rider mains
Pressure
sN
Maximum number of dwelling units
One end supply Two end supply

rd
High > 600 kPa 20 40
Medium 400 – 600 kPa 15 30

da
99954
118.92.13.10
Low < 400 kPa 7 15

an
6.3.5.8 Pressure zones

TAs may have maximum acceptable pressure requirements in any pressure zone. In some
cases, a ‘PRV zone’ may be used to control the pressure delivered to an area. In these
St
cases the designer shall consult with the TA to confirm pressure requirements.
6.3.5.9 Maximum pressure requirements

ht
An output of the hydraulic design of a pipeline is the specification of the maximum pressure
that may be imposed on the pipeline during operation.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Inputs to the design process include:
(a) Static head of supply;

py
(b) The range of pressure and flows required to provide an acceptable level of service to
the end-user (minimum pressure) and to avoid water leakage (maximum pressure).
The outputs of water main hydraulic design shall include:
Co
(c) Size of mains;

(d) Maximum and minimum design pressure;
(e) The pressure class/rating of pipeline system components;
(f) Surge analysis results;
(g) Hydraulic loss functions;
(h) Specification of the maximum allowable operating pressure;
(i) Flow and pressure compliance with peak demand and firefighting demand scenarios.
158
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.5.10 Design pressure

The design pressures are the limiting pressures for operation of a pipeline system including
any allowance for variation of usage in the future.
*
The minimum design pressure is either the minimum pressure defined by the TA or some
d
higher pressure selected to control (minimise) the range of pressures experienced over
n
the normal diurnal variation in the system.
ala
Unless otherwise specified by the TA design pressure shall be between 250 kPa and
800 kPa (25 m to 80 m).
Ze
A minimum pressure rating of each pipeline component is to be provided to the TA with
the as-built details.
C6.3.5.10
ew
A design pressure of 250 kPa to 800 kPa is set as this provides for approximately
200 kPa for two-storey dwellings at the upper floor and less than excessive pressures
for dwellings constructed on lots below the position of the main. Specific additional
sN
consideration to these pressures may be needed in areas of significant contour.
6.3.5.10.1 Operating pressure/working pressure

rd
The operating pressure shall not exceed the rerated pressure class/rating or the operating
pressure limit of the pipeline components at that location.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
6.3.6 Water quality

A number of factors in a network can adversely affect the quality of the water in the system.
an
The network design shall ensure that the water quality at each property complies with
the Drinking-water standards for New Zealand 2005 (Revised 2008). The requirement to
protect water supplies from the risk of backflow is stated in the Health (Drinking Water)
St
Amendment Act s. 69ZZZ and this shall be adhered to.

ht
6.3.6.1 Materials
All parts of the water supply system in contact with drinking water shall be designed using
components and materials that comply with AS/NZS 4020.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
6.3.6.2 Prevention of backflow

py
Drinking water supply systems shall be designed and equipped to prevent backflow. The
location and operation of hydrants, air valves, and scours shall ensure no external water
enters the system through negative pressure from normal operation.
Co
NOTE – Some TAs require appropriate backflow prevention at the point of supply for all connections.
6.3.6.3 Water age

Drinking water supply systems shall be designed to minimise water age to ensure no
unacceptable deterioration of water quality. This shall include:
(a) Mains with dead ends should be avoided by the provision of linked mains or looped
mains. Particular care shall be taken at the boundaries between supply zones where
dead ends shall be minimised;
159
NZS 4404:2010
(b) Mains for short runs shall be reduced in size or looped, for example no-exit roads
(see figure 6.5);
(c) Provision of large diameter mains capacity shall be staged by the initial provision of
*
a smaller main, followed by additional mains as the demand increases. Discussions
d
should be held with the TA on staging, as multiple mains may not be desirable and
larger mains with a scouring programme may be preferred instead.
n
ala
6.3.7 Flow velocities
In practice it is desirable to avoid unduly high or low flow velocities. Pipelines shall be
designed for flow velocities within the range of 0.5 to 2.0 m/s. In special circumstances,
Ze
velocities of up to 3.0 m/s may be acceptable.
For pumping mains an economic appraisal may be required to determine the most
economical diameter of pumping main to minimise the combined capital and discounted
ew
pumping cost. The resulting velocity will normally lie in the range 0.8 m/s to 3.0 m/s.
The following factors shall be considered in determining flow velocity:
(a)
(b)
Stagnation; sN
Turbidity (large fluctuations in flow rates can dislodge the biological slime or stir up
settled solids in pipelines);
rd
(c) Pressure;
(d) Surge;
da
99954
118.92.13.10 (e) Pumping facilities;
(f) Pressure reducing devices;
an
(g) Pipe lining materials.
6.3.7.1 Surge analysis

St
A surge analysis shall be undertaken for any pipeline within a pumped system or system
containing automated valves. The source of any significant pressure surges or high-
pressure areas shall be identified and remedial measures to minimise pressure surges
ht
designed and specified.

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
6.3.8 System layout
6.3.8.1 General
py
Water mains are usually located in the road. The location shall be specified by the TA,
within the road or space allocation nominated by the road controlling authority. Where
approved by the TA water mains may be located in private property or public reserve, and
Co
in this case easements shall be required.
Water mains should:
(a) Be aligned parallel to property boundaries;

(b) Should not traverse steep gradients; and
(c) Should be located to maintain adequate clearance from structures and other
infrastructure.
160
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.8.2 Reticulation layout

A principal water main of not less than nominal internal diameter (DN) 100, fitted with fire
hydrants, shall be laid on one side of all public roads and no-exit roads in every residential
*
development. A DN 50 rider main shall be laid along the road frontage of all lots not fronted
d
by the principal main. A DN 50 rider main shall also be provided for service connections
where the principal main is DN 250 or larger. The principal mains serving commercial and
n
industrial areas shall be at least DN 150 laid on both sides of the road. This requirement
ala
may be relaxed in short no-exit roads as long as adequate firefighting coverage is available.
6.3.8.3 Mains layout
Ze
In determining the general layout of mains, the following factors shall be considered:
(a) Main location to allow easy access for repairs and maintenance;
(b) Whether system security, maintenance of water quality, and ability to clean mains
ew
meet operational requirements;
(c) Location of valves for shut-off areas and zone boundaries (see 6.3.14);
(d) Avoidance of dead ends by use of looped mains or rider mains;
(e)
sN
Provision of dual or alternate feeds to minimise service risk.
6.3.8.4 Water mains in private property

rd
Water mains located within private property will require an appropriately sized and registered
easement in accordance with the TA’s requirements.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
C6.3.8.4
an
For some TAs, an easement over private property is not the preferred option and
may only be used as a temporary solution for landlocked subdivisions pending future
permanent supply within a road. A typical situation where the TA may approve water
St
mains in easements is a fire main in a right of way.
6.3.8.5 Types of system configuration

ht
Network layouts shall be established in accordance with TA practice. Interconnected ring

systems should be provided when feasible. Refer to WSA 03 for further information.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
6.3.8.6 Water mains near trees

py
Locating water mains within the root zone of trees should be avoided if possible. Where
this is not practicable, careful attention to pipe material selection is necessary to minimise
risk of pipe failure due to root growth.
Co
161
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.8.7 Shared trenching

Where shared trenching is approved by the TA and utility service owners, a detailed design
shall be submitted for approval by those parties and shall include:
*
(a) Relative location of services (horizontal and vertical) in the trench;
d
(b) Clearances from other services;
n
(c) Pipe support and trenchfill material specifications;
ala
(d) Embedment and trenchfill compactions;
(e) Trench markings;
(f) Services’ location from property boundaries;
Ze
(g) Any limitations on future maintenance; and
(h) Special anchoring requirements, such as for bends and tees.
ew
Where approved by the TA and utility service owners, shared trenching may also be used
for property service connections.
6.3.8.8 Rider mains and duplicate mains sN

A rider main shall be laid along the road frontage of all lots not fronted by a principal main.
Duplicate mains are required to provide adequate fire protection in the following cases:
rd
(a) Arterial roads or roads with a central dividing island;

da
99954
118.92.13.10
(b) Roads with split elevation;
(c) Roads with rail or tram lines;
(d) Urban centres;
an
(e) Parallel to large distribution mains that are not available for service connections;
(f) Commercial and industrial areas nominated by the TA;
St
(g) Where required by SNZ PAS 4509.

ht
6.3.8.9 Crossings
Water main crossings of roads, railway lines, and underground services shall, as far
as practicable, be at right angles. Mains should be located and designed to minimise
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
maintenance and crossing restoration. The TA may require extra mechanical protection
for the pipes or different pipe materials to minimise the need for future maintenance.
py
6.3.8.10 Crossings of waterways or reserves

All crossings of waterways or reserves shall be specific designs to suit the TA’s requirement.
Co
Crossings shall, as far as practicable, be at right angles to the waterway or reserve.

Reference should be made to the TA to establish whether it prefers elevated crossings or
below waterway invert crossings. When the pipeline is placed under the invert level of a
waterway it may require mechanical protection by concrete encasement or steel or other
acceptable pipe duct. Different pipeline materials may need to be used for the crossing.
162
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.8.11 Location marking of valves and hydrants

The location marking of stop valves, service valves, and fire hydrants shall be to
SNZ PAS 4509 and Appendix B drawing WS – 006.
*
d
6.3.9 Clearances
n
6.3.9.1 Clearance from underground services
ala
Where a pipe is designed in a road the location of the pipe from other services shall comply
with the Code as defined in 8.2.2, unless the TA has its own requirements.
For normal trenching and trenchless technology installation, clearance from other service
Ze
utility assets shall not be less than the minimum vertical and horizontal clearances shown in
table 6.4. Written agreement on reduced clearances and clearances for shared trenching
shall be obtained from the TA and the relevant service owner prior to the commencement
of construction.
ew
Table 6.4 – Clearances between water mains and underground services
Utility
Minimum horizontal clearance
(mm)
sN Minimum vertical
clearance(1)
(mm)
(Existing service) New main size
rd
DN ≤200 DN >200
Water mains
da
600 600 500

DN >375 99954
118.92.13.10
Water mains
300(2) 600 150
DN ≤375
an
Gas mains 300(2) 600 150
Telecommunications conduits
St
300(2) 600 150

and cables
Electricity conduits and cables 500 1000 225
Public mains 300(2) 150(3)

ht
600
Wastewater pipes 1000/600(4) 1000/600(4) 500(3)

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Kerbs 150 600(5) 150 (where possible)

NOTE –
(1) Vertical clearances apply when water mains cross another utility service, except in the case of wastewater
py
when a vertical separation shall always be maintained, even when the main and wastewater pipe are
parallel. The main should always be located above the wastewater pipe to minimise the possibility of
backflow contamination in the event of a main break.
Co
(2) Clearances can be further reduced to 150 mm for distances up to 2 m when passing installations such as
poles, pits, and small structures, providing the structure is not destabilised in the process.
(3) Water mains should always cross over wastewater and stormwater drains.
(4) When the wastewater pipe is at the minimum vertical clearance below the water main (500 mm), maintain a
minimum horizontal clearance of 1000 mm. This minimum horizontal clearance can be progressively reduced
to 600 mm as the vertical clearance is increased to 750 mm.
(5) Clearance from kerb and channel shall be measured from the nearest edge of the concrete. For water mains
≤375 clearances can be progressively reduced until the minimum of 150 mm is reached for mains DN ≤200.
(6) Where a main crosses other services, it shall cross at an angle as near as possible to 90o.
163
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.9.2 Clearance from structures

Pipes adjacent to existing buildings and structures shall be located clear of the ‘zone of
influence’ of the building foundations. If this is not possible, a specific design shall be
*
undertaken to cover the following:
d
(a) Protection of the pipeline;
n
(b) Long term maintenance access for the pipeline; and
ala
(c) Protection of the existing structure or building.
The protection shall be specified by the designer for evaluation and acceptance by the TA.
Ze
Sufficient clearance for laying and access for maintenance is also required. Table 6.5 may
be used as a guide for minimum clearances for mains laid in public streets.
ew
Table 6.5 – Minimum clearance from structures
Pipe diameter Clearance to wall or building

DN (mm)
<100
100 – 150
sN
600
1000
200 – 300 1500

rd
375 2000
NOTE – These clearances should be increased for mains in private property (even with easements)
da
99954
118.92.13.10 as access is often more difficult and damage risk greater.
6.3.9.3 Clearance from high voltage transmission facilities

an
Water mains constructed from metallic materials shall generally not be located close to
high voltage transmission lines and other facilities. Special design shall be undertaken
St
if it is necessary to locate such mains close to such facilities.
6.3.9.4 Deviation of mains around structures

ht
Deviation of a pipeline around an obstruction can be achieved by deflection of the pipeline

at joints, to the angular deflection limits stated by the pipe joint manufacturer and with
rig
3
09
suitably restrained fitting bends. Permitted angular deflection varies with pipe material,
29
80
80
00
16
pipe wall thickness, pipe PN class, joint type, design and geometry. Some joint types are
specifically designed to accommodate angular deflection. PVC and PE pipes may also be
py
curved along the pipe barrel, between joints, to a minimum radius of curvature not less
than that stated by the pipe manufacturer.
Co
6.3.10 Pipe selection

The selection of the appropriate pipe material, sizes, and classes shall be based on
system demands.
164
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.10.1 Standard pipe sizes

The principal main shall be standardised as DN 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 375, 450, 525,
575, or 600 mm nominal diameter only. When larger pipes are required the exact diameter
*
will be determined by the TA.
d
n
Minimum pipe diameters shall be as follows, where DN is the nominal pipe diameter:
ala
(a) DN 50 for rider mains in residential zones;
(b) DN 100 for residential zones;
Ze
(c) DN 150 for industrial or commercial zones.
The TA may also specify minimum pipe diameters for other identified areas such as CBDs.
ew
6.3.10.3 Pipe PN class (pressure rating)
Pipe PN class is selected on the basis of the design pressure (head) calculated for the
various sections of the reticulation network. This may be varied by specific operational
requirements specified by the TA. sN
6.3.10.3.1 Design pressure
rd
The design pressure (head) for the mains to be installed shall be based on the following:
Design pressure, (m) = Maximum Supply Pressure, (m above the level datum used
da
99954
118.92.13.10
for the ground level)
+ Surge Allowance, (m) (see 6.3.7.1)
– Lowest Ground Level (GL) of the proposed main, (m above
an
datum).
The design pressure (m head) shall be used for:

St
(a) Selection of pipe materials and classes;

(b) Selection of pipe fitting types and classes.
ht
6.3.10.3.2 Minimum pipe PN

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
The minimum pipe and fittings PN to be used for water reticulation mains shall be PN 9
(see Appendix A for list of pressure pipe and fittings Standards). Designers shall verify
the TA’s minimum requirement before specifying the required pipe PN.
py
6.3.10.3.3 Nominated pipe PN

Some TAs may nominate a pipe PN (such as PN 12) for pressure pipes and fittings to
Co
standardise on a limited number of pipe PNs, or to allow future operational flexibility within
their system. Where this is the case, the design pressure used as the basis for system
design, anchorage, and pressure testing shall not exceed the TA’s specified operating
pressure limit associated with the pipe PN.
165
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.10.3.4 Pumped mains

For water mains in pumped systems, a detailed surge analysis shall be conducted unless
otherwise directed by the TA to ensure:
*
(a) The appropriate surge pressure is included in the calculated design head;
d
(b) Surge control devices are included in the system design, where identified by the
n
detailed analysis, to protect the network or control pressure fluctuations in the supply
to customers, or both.
ala
NOTE – Surge can also be managed by soft starts on pump motors, variable speed drives, and
speed controls on valve closures, for example.
Ze
6.3.10.4 Pipe materials
For acceptable pipe materials and Standards see Appendix A.
ew
6.3.11 Fire flow
The water reticulation system shall be designed to comply with SNZ PAS 4509.
6.3.11.1 Fire protection services sN

Many commercial and industrial developments require installation of special fire protection
services. While it is the responsibility of the site owner to provide these fire services, the
rd
developer shall design the water reticulation system to meet the required demands, where
these are known in advance.
da
6.3.12 Structural design

99954
118.92.13.10
6.3.12.1 General
an
For installation conditions beyond those shown on the drawings, the pipeline installation shall
be specifically designed to resist structural failure. The design shall be in accordance with
AS/NZS 2566.1 including the structural design commentary AS/NZS 2566.1 Supplement 1.
St
Details of the final design requirements shall be shown on the drawings.

ht
6.3.12.2 Seismic design

All pipes and structures shall be designed with adequate flexibility and special provisions
to minimise risk of damage during earthquake. Historical experience in New Zealand
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
earthquake events suggests that suitable pipe options, in seismically active areas, may
include rubber ring joint PVC pipes, or PE pipes. Specially designed flexible joints shall
be provided at all junctions between pipes and rigid structures (such as reservoirs, pump
py
stations, bridges, and buildings) in natural or made ground.

Co
6.3.12.3 Structural consideration

Pipelines shall be designed to withstand all the forces and load combinations to which they
may be exposed including internal forces, external forces, temperature effects, settlement,
and combined stresses. The water main design shall include the selection of the pipeline
material, the pipe class, and selection of appropriate bedding material to suit site conditions.
166
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.12.4 Internal forces

Pipelines shall be designed for the range of expected pressures, including transient
conditions (surge and fatigue) and maximum static head conditions. In the case of transient
*
conditions the amplitude and frequency shall be estimated. The allowance for surge
d
included in the maximum design pressure shall not be less than 200 kPa. Transfer and
distribution mains subject to negative pressure shall be designed to withstand a transient
n
pressure of at least 80 kPa below atmospheric pressure. A surge safety factor of 2 may
ala
be applied to the normal operating pressure to estimate the surge pressure in lieu of a
detailed surge analysis.
Ze
6.3.12.5 External forces
The external forces to be taken into account shall include:
(a) Trench fill loadings (vertical and horizontal forces due to earth loadings);
ew
(b) Surcharge;
(c) Groundwater;
(d) Dead weight of the pipe and the contained water;
(e) Other forces arising during installation;
sN
(f) Traffic loads;
rd
(g) Temperature (expansion/contraction).
The consequences of external forces on local supports of pipelines shall also be considered.
da
99954
118.92.13.10

The designer should take into account any geotechnical requirements determined under
an
section 2 of this Standard.
Where required, standard special foundation conditions shall be referenced on the drawings.
St
6.3.12.7 Pipe selection for special conditions

ht
Pipeline materials and jointing systems shall be selected and specified to ensure:
(a) Structural adequacy considering ground conditions and water temperature;

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(b) Water quality considering lining material;

(c) Compatibility with aggressive or contaminated ground;
(d) Suitability for the geotechnical conditions;
py
(e) Compliance with the TA’s requirements.

Co
6.3.12.8 Above-ground water mains

The design of above-ground water mains shall include the design of pipeline supports,
maintenance and access requirements, control of unbalanced thrusts, and shall address
exposure conditions, such as corrosion protection, UV protection, freezing of water mains,
and temperature derating.
In such situations the pipe materials, support, and restraint for the pipes and fittings shall
be detailed on the drawings.
167
NZS 4404:2010

Trenchless technology may be used as appropriate for alignments passing through or under:
*
(a) Environmentally sensitive areas;
(b) Built-up or congested areas to minimise disruption and reinstatement;
d
(c) Railway and major road crossings;
n
(d) Significant vegetation;
ala
(e) Vehicle crossings.
Pressure pipes used for trenchless installation shall have suitable mechanically restrained
Ze
joints, specifically designed for trenchless application, which may include integral restraint
seal systems, or heat fusion welded joints.
For information on trenchless installation methods see 5.3.6.8.
ew
C6.3.12.9
Further information on trenchless technologies may be found in ‘Trenchless technology

sN
for installation of cables and pipelines’ (Stein), ‘Trenchless technology – Pipeline
and utility design, construction, and renewal’ (Najafi), and ‘Guidelines for horizontal
directional drilling, pipe bursting, microtunnelling and pipe jacking’ (Australasian Society
for Trenchless Technology).
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
6.3.12.10 Embedment
6.3.12.10.1 Minimum pipe cover

an
Pipelines shall have minimum cover in accordance with the TA or utility owner’s requirements.
AS/NZS 2566.2 may be used.
St
6.3.12.10.2 Minimum trench width

Pipe trench width design considerations shall be based on the minimum side clearances
ht
detailed in Appendix B drawing CM – 001.

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
6.3.12.11 Pipeline restraint

Anchorage shall be provided at bends, tees, reducers, valves, and dead ends where
necessary.
py
C6.3.12.11
Co
In-line valves, especially those DN 100 or larger, should be anchored to ensure stability
under operational conditions. See Appendix B drawings WS – 001, WS – 002, WS – 003,
WS – 004, and WS – 005.
168
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.12.11.1 Thrust blocks

The design of thrust blocks shall be based on the maximum test pressure.
*
Thrust blocks shall be designed to resist the total unbalanced thrust and transmit all load to
the adjacent ground. Calculation of the unbalanced thrust shall be based on the maximum
d
design pressure, or as otherwise specified by the TA.
n
Restraint joint systems, specifically designed to resist the total unbalanced thrust, and
ala
support all thrust load, may be used, instead of thrust blocks. These may include mechanical
restraint coupling joints, or integral restraint seal systems.
Ze
Typical contact areas for selected soil conditions and pipe sizes are shown in Appendix B
drawings WS – 004 and WS – 005.
Thrust blocks for temporary infrastructure shall be designed to the requirements for
ew
permanent thrust blocks.
6.3.12.11.2 Anchor blocks
sN
Anchor blocks are designed to prevent movement of pipe bends in a vertical direction.
They consist of sufficient mass concrete to prevent pipe movement (see Appendix B
drawing WS – 005).
rd
6.3.12.11.3 Restrained joint water mains
Commercially available mechanically restrained jointing systems may be used to avoid
da
99954
118.92.13.10
the need for thrust and anchor blocks subject to the approval of the TA. However many
TAs will still require the use of thrust and anchor blocks.
an
6.3.13 Reservoirs and pumping stations

Where reservoirs or pumping stations are required, reference shall be made to the TA for
St
its specific requirements.
WSA 03 contains design criteria for pumping stations and reservoirs.

ht
6.3.14 Valves
rig
3
09
29
80
80
6.3.14.1 General
00
16
Valves are used to:
(a) Isolate reticulation mains from distribution mains;

py
(b) Isolate smaller reticulation mains from larger reticulation mains;

(c) Isolate planning zone boundaries, for example, industrial, residential, or commercial.
Co
Valves shall be provided:
(d) Each side of freeways, arterial roads, and railway and tram crossings;
(e) Adjacent to street intersections (for ease of location);
(f) In the footway, clear of roadway, where possible.
Subject to these considerations, valve numbers shall be minimised.
The TA should be consulted to establish the local requirement for connection type (flange
or socket), as well as any other issues such as valve anchoring requirements.
169
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.14.2 Siting of valves

The siting of valves shall take a holistic view of the existing infrastructure and proposed
additions. General principles to be considered shall include:
*
(a) Valves shall be sited to provide the control (such as flow, pressure, isolation, and
d
diversion) required by the TA;
n
(b) Ready access to valves to enable their safe operation. Account shall be taken of
traffic and other site peculiarities;
ala
(c) Minimisation of inconvenience to the public by avoiding clustering of surface fittings
in the footpath at intersections;
Ze
(d) Optimisation of the number and location of valves to meet the TA’s operation and
maintenance requirements, safe working, and to minimise the effect of a shutdown
on the TA’s customers.
ew
6.3.14.3 Gate valves
Valves shall have anti-clockwise rotation of the input spindle for closure, unless otherwise
specified by the TA. Gate valves DN ≤50 (commonly called peet valves) shall be clockwise
closing unless otherwise specified by the TA. sN
Buried gate valves shall be operated from above ground and shall be designed to facilitate
the use of a standard key and bar. An extension spindle shall be incorporated as necessary
rd
to ensure the top of the spindle is 350 mm below the FSL.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
Valves DN ≥80 shall be gate valves. In-line valves shall be the same diameter as the
reticulation main.
an
6.3.14.3.1 Gate valve spacing criteria

The number of property service connections in a shut-off area shall be in accordance with
table 6.6. When assessing property service numbers, unit title and strata title properties
St
such as apartment buildings and multi-unit developments shall be counted as multiple

connections. All connections having an alternative supply may be excluded when assessing
property service numbers. The overriding maximum spacing between in-line valves shall
ht
be in accordance with table 6.6.

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Table 6.6 – Valve spacing criteria
Water main size Number of property service Maximum spacing

connections (nominal)
py
DN (m)
≤150 40 300*
Co
200-300 100 750
375 150 1000

* In rural areas, the maximum spacing is 500 m.
170
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.14.3.2 Branch mains

Stop valves shall be located on branch mains adjacent to the through water main. The type
of joint to be used (Soc-Soc, FI-Soc or FI-FI) shall be based on the required security of
*
the water mains. For transfer mains or reticulation mains (≥ DN 300, a tee with a flanged
d
branch, and a flanged valve shall be used (see figure 6.1 and Appendix B drawings
WS – 001 and WS – 002).
n
Where a road crossing is necessary immediately after the tee branch and there is no
ala
space available adjacent to the tee, a stop valve shall be installed on the opposite side of
the road (see figure 6.1 and Appendix B drawings WS – 001 and WS – 002).
Ze
6.3.14.3.3 Pressure zone dividing valves
Pressure zone dividing valves and hydrants shall be installed in one of the following
arrangements (see figure 6.2):
ew
(a) Valves in a paired configuration with a standard fire hydrant located between them.
Installation in this manner permits the valves to be checked for leakage. The valve on
the low pressure side of the pair will normally be closed in order for the fire hydrant
(b)
sN
to be used for firefighting purposes with the supply from the higher pressure zone;
A valve with a standard fire hydrant on each side.
rd
6.3.14.3. 4 Secure service connections
Additional stop valves may be provided at a service connection to a customer requiring a
da
99954
118.92.13.10
greater security of supply such as hospitals and large industrial or commercial developments.
Figure 6.3 illustrates typical arrangements to facilitate partial isolation of the main while
maintaining supply to the customer.
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
Figure 6.1 – Branch valve adjacent to main
171
NZS 4404:2010
*
d
n
ala
Figure 6.2 – Valve and hydrant combinations for pressure zone dividing valves
Ze
ew
sN
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
Figure 6.3 – Secure connection

an
NOTE –
(1) Example A – feed from two directions off a large diameter water main. The arrangement
St
is more complicated than Example B, but is justified by the cost of an additional large
diameter stop valve which would be required if using Example B.
(2) Example B – feed from two directions off a smaller diameter main. This is a simpler
ht
arrangement than Example A, but requires two valves on the main.
(3) Example C – feed from two separate mains.

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
6.3.14.4 Butterfly valves

Butterfly valves shall only be used with the approval of the TA.
py
C6.3.14.4
Co
Butterfly valves are not normally used in reticulation mains as they hinder swabbing
operations, and the quick closing action can induce high surge pressures.
6.3.14.5 Pressure reducing valves

Pressure reducing valves (PRV) are outside the scope of this Standard. Refer to WSA 03.
172
NZS 4404:2010
C6.3.14.5
A PRV is used to reduce the pressure upstream of the PRV to a desired lower downstream
*
pressure. The PRV works automatically to maintain the desired downstream pressure.
Refer to WSA 03 for design criteria.
d
n
6.3.14.6 Air valves
ala
6.3.14.6.1 Installation design criteria
Investigation into the need for air valves (AVs) shall be made for all high points on mains,
Ze
particularly at points more than 2 m higher than the lower end of the section of water main
and particularly if the main has a steep downward slope on the downstream side.
Where the hydraulic head is less than 10 m, special consideration shall be given to the
ew
type of AV to prevent water leakage from the valve. AVs shall be installed with an isolating
valve to permit servicing or replacement without having to shutdown the main.
Combination AVs, that is (dual) AVs incorporating an AV (large orifice) and an air release
sN
valve (small orifice) in a single unit, are generally the preferred type for distribution and
transfer mains, and where required on reticulation mains.
The nominal size of the large orifice of air valves shall be DN 80 for installation on mains.
rd
This size has an exhaust capacity of approximately 0.3 m3/s.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
C6.3.14.6.1
Water mains with only a few service connections or a configuration that leads to air
an
accumulation may require combination air valves to automatically remove accumulated

air that may otherwise cause operational problems in the water system.
The configuration of the distribution network for both the change in elevation and the
St
slope of the water main governs the number and location of air valves required.
ht
6.3.14.6.2 Air valves location

Air valves shall not be located in major roadways or in areas subject to flooding. When
rig
3
09
29
80
required, air valves shall be located:

80
00
16
(a) At summits (high points);

(b) At intervals of not more than 800 m on long horizontal, ascending, and descending
py
sectors;
(c) At every increase in downward slope;
Co
(d) At every reduction in upward slope;

(e) On the downstream side of PRVs;
(f) On the downhill side of major isolating valves;
(g) At blank ends.
Where the air valve is in a valve chamber, the design shall ensure adequate venting for
effective operation and drainage to prevent backflow contamination. ➤
173
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.14.7 Scours and pump-out branches

Scours and pump-out branches are provided in the distribution network for maintenance
purposes. They are designed to allow draining of water from the mains by gravity or use
*
of a mobile pump.
d
Hydrants may be used for flushing and draining on water mains DN <300.
n
ala
C6.3.14.7
On mains DN ≥300, scours are more effective in draining and provide greater flushing
velocities than hydrants.
Ze
Scours and pump-out branches shall incorporate appropriate measures to prevent back
siphonage into the water supply system.
ew
There shall be adequate drainage facilities to receive the flow resulting from flushing and
draining operations.
Scours shall:
(a)
sN
Drain the water main by gravity or have provision for pump-out within a period of
1 hour, or both;
rd
(b) Have a diffuser fitted at the discharge point if there is a likelihood of environmental
or asset damage; and
da
99954
118.92.13.10
(c) Not be subject to inundation.
6.3.14.7.1 Scour sizes

an
Scours shall be sized in accordance with table 6.7.
Table 6.7 – Minimum scour size

St
Main size Scour size

DN DN
ht
DN ≤200 80
DN >200 – DN ≤300 100

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
DN >300 – DN ≤375 150

py
6.3.14.7.2 Scour locations

Scours shall be located at:
(a) Low points at the ends of water mains; and

Co
(b) Low points between in-line stop valves.
Scours shall drain to a point where the discharge is readily visible to prevent the scour
valve inadvertently being left open.
Typical discharge locations include:
(c) An approved pit that is to be pumped out each time the scour is operated (called a
pump scour);
174
NZS 4404:2010
(d) A kerb and channel;

(e) An open-grated street drainage sump;
*
(f) A natural water course (with energy dissipater).
d
Scours shall not:
n
(g) Cause damage when operated;
ala
(h) Discharge to closed stormwater structures;
(i) Discharge across roadways;
(j) Discharge directly to waterways, unless in compliance with the appropriate consent
Ze
requirements.
6.3.14.8 Flushing points
ew
Flushing points shall be installed at the end of DN 50 rider mains (see Appendix B drawing
WS – 002).
6.3.15 Hydrants
6.3.15.1 General
sN
Hydrants are installed on reticulation mains for firefighting or operational purposes.
rd
Operational purposes include mains flushing, chlorination, to allow the escape of air during
charging, and the release of water during dewatering of the water main, where air valves
and scours are not installed.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
6.3.15.2 Hydrants for firefighting

an
The spacing of hydrants for firefighting shall be in accordance with SNZ PAS 4509.
6.3.15.3 Hydrant installation

St
Fire hydrants shall not be fitted to reticulation mains DN <100 or to distribution or transfer
mains without the prior written approval of the TA.
ht
6.3.15.4 Hydrants for reticulation system operational requirements

Additional to firefighting requirements, hydrants shall be provided at:
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(a) High points on reticulation mains to release air during charging, to allow air to enter
the main when dewatering, and for manual release of any build up of air, as required,
where automatic combination AVs are not installed;
py
(b) Localised low points on water mains to drain the water main where scours are not
installed.
Co
Adequate drainage facilities shall be provided to receive the hydrant flows from dewatering
and flushing operations.
C6.3.15.4
AVs are not normally required on reticulation mains in residential areas where the
configuration of mains and service connections will usually eliminate small amounts of
air accumulated during operation; hydrants should be placed as close as possible to
stop valves to facilitate maintenance activities such as cleaning of water mains.
175
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.15.5 Hydrants at ends of mains

If a scour is not provided, a hydrant shall be installed as close as possible to the end of
every main DN ≥100.
*
d
C6.3.15.5
n
Apart from the firefighting function, a hydrant also allows the section of dead end
main to be flushed regularly to ensure acceptable on-going water quality. This is
ala
particularly important in new subdivisions where only a small number of properties
may be connected initially and where the main has been laid in a larger than required
size with the expectation that it will be extended at a future date.
Ze
6.3.16 Connections
ew
6.3.16.1 Connection of new mains to existing mains
In specifying connection detail the designer shall consider:
(a) Pipe materials, especially potential for corrosion;

(b)
(c)
Relative depth of mains;
Standard fittings;
sN
(d) Pipe restraint and anchorage;
rd
(e) Limitations on shutting down major mains to enable connections; and
(f) Existing cathodic protection systems.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
Connections from the end of an existing main shall be designed to address any differing
requirements for the pipes being connected, particularly restraint, spigot/socket joint
an
limitations, and corrosion protection. The designer shall consider the potential for insufficiently
restrained/ anchored stop valves near the connection.
St
All connections to the existing reticulation shall be made by a contractor approved the TA.
6.3.16.2 Property service connections

ht
Property service connections shall conform with the sizes permitted by the TA.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
The method of connection (including tapping) is dependent on both the reticulation main
and service connection pipe materials. The method adopted shall conform to:
(a) Appendix B drawing WS – 003;

py
(b) The requirements of the TA.
The position of the property connection toby valve, meter, and backflow device shall
Co
conform with the requirements of the TA.
6.3.17 Termination points

Termination points or dead ends should be avoided to prevent poor water quality. Alternative
configurations such as a continuous network, link mains, looped mains, and the use of
reticulation mains smaller than DN 100, particularly in no-exit roads, should be considered
(see figures 6.4 and 6.5).
176
NZS 4404:2010
*
d
n
ala
Ze
ew
NOTE – Rider mains are not shown.
Figure 6.4 – Elimination of termination points sN

rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
NOTE – Rider mains are not shown.
Figure 6.5 – Looped and link principal mains
6.3.17.1 Permanent ends of water mains

Rider mains, DN <100, may be used to supply the furthest properties beyond the water
main. The DN 100 main shall be laid to a point where all properties are provided with the
fire protection required by SNZ PAS 4509.
A method of flushing shall be provided at the end of the rider main and water main, which
shall be suitably anchored (see Appendix B drawing WS – 002).
177
NZS 4404:2010
6.3.17.2 Temporary ends of water mains

Water mains shall be laid to within 1 m of the boundary of a subdivision where the main
is to be extended in the future.
*
Temporary dead-end mains shall terminate with a hydrant followed by a gate valve. The
d
valve and hydrant shall be suitably anchored so that the future extension can be carried
n
out without the need to disrupt services to existing customers.
ala
Where a development is staged mains shall be constructed to terminate approximately
2 m beyond the finished road construction to ensure that future construction does not
cause disruption to finished installations.
Ze
ew
Water supply infrastructure requires approval from the TA.

sN
Design drawings compatible with the TA’s concept plan and the design parameters
included in this Standard shall be provided to the TA for approval. Designers shall ensure
the following aspects have been considered and where appropriate included in the design:
rd
(a) The size (or sizes) of pipework throughout the proposed reticulation system;
(b) Selection of appropriate pipeline material type/s and class;
da
99954
118.92.13.10
(c) Mains layouts and alignments including:

(i) Route selection
an
(ii) Topographical and environmental aspects

(iii) Easements
St
(iv) Foundation and geotechnical aspects

(v) Clearances, shared trenching requirements
(vi) Provision for future extensions;
ht
(d) Hydraulic adequacy including:

rig
3
09
(i) Compliance with the required maximum and minimum operating (working)
29
80
80
00
16
pressure
(ii) Acceptable flow velocities, and
py
(iii) Compliance with the estimated water demand, including firefighting;

(e) Property service connection locations and sizes;
Co
(f) Types and locations of appurtenances, including:

(i) Stop valves
(ii) Pressure reducing valves (PRVs)
(iii) Hydrants and fire services
(iv) Scours and pump-out branches and
(v) Termination details;
178
NZS 4404:2010
(g) Locations and details of thrust blocks and anchors, see Appendix B drawings
WS – 004 and WS – 005;
(h) Preparation of final design drawings, plans (and specifications if applicable).
*
d
6.5 Construction
n
6.5.1 Excavation
ala
Excavation of existing carriageways shall conform to the TA’s road opening procedures
where these exist. Excavation in existing carriageways shall be carried out in a safe
manner with the minimum disruption to traffic and pedestrians.
Ze
6.5.2 Embedment
Pipes and fitting shall be surrounded with a suitable bedding material in accordance with
ew
Appendix B drawings CM – 001 and CM – 002.
6.5.3 Backfilling and reinstatement
6.5.3.1 Carriageways sN
Backfilling shall be in accordance with the requirements of the TA.
Pipe trenches within a carriageway shall be backfilled using an approved hardfill placed
rd
immediately above the pipe embedment and compacted in layers not exceeding 200 mm
in loose depth, as per Appendix B drawing CM – 002.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
In existing sealed roads, the top section of the trench shall be backfilled as specified by
3.4.2.3. The depth of base course and type of finishing coat seal shall conform to the
an
standard of the existing road construction.
6.5.3.2 Berms
St
Pipe trenches under grass berms and footpaths shall be backfilled in accordance with the
requirements of Appendix B drawing CM – 002.
ht
6.5.3.3 Detector tape

Open trenching – backfill shall be placed to 100 mm below existing ground level. At this
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
point, where required by the TA, the contractor shall provide and lay metallic ‘detector’
tape coloured blue, stipulating ‘Danger – Water Main Below’ (or similar). See Appendix B
drawing CM – 001.
py
Co
179
NZS 4404:2010
6.5.3.4 Tracer wire

Tracer wire in the form of a continuous 4 mm2 multi strand (minimum 4) polythene sleeved
copper cable, shall be installed with all non-metallic pipes to allow detection. The wire
*
shall be strapped to the pipe wall by means of a minimum of two complete wraps of heavy
d
duty adhesive tape, at a maximum of 3.0 m intervals. The wire shall have some slack to
allow for bends in laying and for future installation of tapping saddles.
n
The tracer wire shall run continuously between valves and hydrants. At each valve or
ala
hydrant the wire shall be ducted to surface level through a length of polyethylene pipe
ending immediately below the lid, The tracer wire shall be long enough to extend 600 mm
minimum above ground level when uncoiled. The excess length shall be neatly coiled in
Ze
the valve or hydrant box.
The tracer wire shall be tested for continuity between surface boxes using an electronically
generated tone and detector probe or alternative approved method.
ew
6.5.4 Pressure testing of water mains

Before a new water main is connected to the existing reticulation, a successful pressure test
sN
shall be completed. The system test pressure is applied to test the integrity of construction
of the pipeline system. The system test pressure generally exceeds the actual design
pressure of the system (maximum 1.25 times the maximum rated operating pressure of
rd
the lowest rated component in the system). See Appendix C for the appropriate testing
procedure.
da
6.5.5 Disinfection of water mains

99954
118.92.13.10
Disinfection of the water mains shall be carried out following successful pressure testing
an
and backfilling as specified in Appendix D. The disinfection solution shall be collected and
disposed of in an appropriate manner.
St
6.5.6 Discharge of testing water

Discharge of testing or chlorinated water from pipelines may require a resource consent
from the regional council.
ht
6.5.7 Water sampling

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
The TA may require water samples to be taken for water quality compliance purposes.
16
py
Co
180
NZS 4404:2010
7 LANDSCAPE
7.1 Scope
*
This section sets out requirements for the design and construction of landscape and
d
planting for land development and subdivision. Section 7 applies to all landscape areas
n
requiring planting and revegetation whether in road reserves, swales, rain gardens, ponds/
wetlands, recreation reserves, or other public reserves, and private land.
ala
7.2 General
Ze
7.2.1 Approval
Consultation with the TA on landscape design and construction at an early stage of the
design development is recommended. Each TA may have specific landscape guidelines
ew
which will be detailed in district plans or codes of practice and some areas may be subject
to special landscape requirements which will need assessment through a resource consent
process. These may be subject to specific design consideration and approval by the TA.
sN
Stormwater systems including secondary flow paths shall be considered when landscape
designs are determined, so as to avoid conflict or failure of these systems.
7.2.2 Environmentally-responsive design

rd
Landscape design has application throughout the subdivision and development process.
Landscape design should be considered in the early stages of a development and at this initial
da
99954
118.92.13.10 concept stage it is important to establish objectives for overall landscape design involving
the appropriate professionals to assess the natural systems, vegetation, and landscape
features. This includes consideration of protecting, maintaining, and restoring existing
an
natural ecosystems, vegetation, and landscape features; responding to the surrounding

landscape character and context; and cultural and heritage elements; and contributing
to ecological and habitat biodiversity. Provision of amenity open space and access is
St
required to make open space connections, access to and location of watercourses, and
provision of reserves and streetscape to provide a framework of coherence and amenity.
ht
7.2.3 Reserves and land protection covenants

Layout plans and location of reserves and land protection covenants should be discussed
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
with the TA prior to the lodgement of finalised plans. Development plans for all future
reserves shall be submitted with application for engineering approval, and no work is to
be carried out on site before the TA approval is issued.
py
All reserve development shall be completed in accordance with the plans acceptable
to the TA. ‘As-built’ plans shall be provided for all reserves. Development may include
Co
earthworks, drainage, planting, paths, structures (such as seating, tables, litter bins,
fencing, barriers, signs, and play equipment) and facilities (such as toilets and changing
sheds) as specified by the TA.
181
NZS 4404:2010
7.2.4 Ecological, functional, and aesthetic opportunities

Planting provides a range of ecological, functional, and aesthetic opportunities for
environmental enhancement:
*
(a) Ecological:
d
(i) Provides, protects, and maintains terrestrial biodiversity and habitat
n
(ii) Reduces the amount of sediment and pollutants entering waterways
ala
(iii) Maintains and enhances water quality and habitat
(iv) Reduces surface water flooding
(v) Increases stability and contributes to erosion control
Ze
(vi) Supports carbon sequestration
(vii) Supports ecosystem functioning including nutrient recycling, water retention,
purification, and sediment control
ew
(viii) Provides wildlife habitat value;
(b) Functional:
(i) Defines space
(ii) Provides shade, shelter, and privacy
sN
(iii) Screens unsightly outlooks and provides visual barriers
(iv) Ameliorates sound and reduces pollution
rd
(v) Assists driver recognition of road link and place context
(vi) Reduces glare and reflection and provides urban cooling
da
(vii) Assists in the control of erosion

99954
118.92.13.10
(viii) Creates physical barriers

an
(ix) Provides recreation and amenity value

(x) Provides edible species
St
(xi) Provides opportunities for enhancing health, and should not be detrimental to it;
(c) Aesthetic:
(i) Frames views
ht
(ii) Emphasises landform and landscape features

(iii) Provides visual unity in the environment
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(iv) Reduces the visual impact of the roadway

(v) Softens hard surfaces and bleak areas
py
(vi) Provides colour, form, and texture

(vii) Provides visual lineage within and between regions
(viii) Provides identity and environment.
Co
7.2.5 Landscape and planting opportunities

Opportunities for landscaping are diverse, ranging from specimen tree planting to planting
associated with existing indigenous vegetation, traffic management devices, riparian
margins, wetlands, swales, rain gardens, ponds, reserves, and specific landscape features
in the development.
182
NZS 4404:2010
7.3 Design
7.3.1 Location
*
Landscaping and planting should be designed to respond to the overall environmental
d
context such as vegetation and water bodies, cultural and heritage elements, local road
geometry, stormwater and reserve design, and utilities placement. Planting may include
n
specimen trees, edible gardens, rain gardens, swales, and other amenity garden features.
ala
TAs may have their own requirements and standards that need to be met.
Infrastructural services should be planned at the same time as the landscape design so
that tree and garden planting location does not compromise the integrity and efficient
Ze
operation of services. If particular landscape conditions or objectives are required for a
subdivision or development then these will need to be taken into account prior to undertaking
detailed engineering design.
ew
7.3.2 Reserve location and layout

Reserve location and layout design shall take into account adjoining land uses and
sN
areas to ensure there is an appropriate provision of recreation assets and landscaping in
accordance with TA’s plans and policies. The design of access routes into and through
a reserve should ensure linkages with existing networks, consider future developments
both of the reserve and adjoining areas, take into account topography, and shall follow
rd
CPTED principles.
7.3.3 Existing vegetation and trees

da
99954
All existing vegetation and trees to be retained shall be cordoned off to protect the root
118.92.13.10
zone and vegetation, prior to the commencement of construction and the cordon shall
an
remain in place until completion of construction.
Existing trees to be retained are to be protected by temporary fencing in a circle with

St
a radius equal to the maximum crown extension (drip line). A qualified person shall
be used to determine the protected area and supervise construction. At no time shall
anything be deposited in the root zones of protected vegetation and trees. If installation
ht
is required under existing vegetation trenchless technology should be considered, if this

is not practicable advice from a suitably qualified person should be sought to minimise
damage to the vegetation.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
A tree or vegetation plan and construction methodology shall be supplied to the TA including:
(a) Position and design of temporary protective fencing or other methods of protection;
py
(b) Arboricultural maintenance required;

(c) Methods of protection of the tree and root zone where construction is to occur near
Co
the root zone and tree canopy;

(d) Maintenance required for long term health and stability of the tree or vegetation.
183
NZS 4404:2010
7.3.4 New trees and road geometry

Separation and sight distances should be considered when planting on roads. Alternative
location and design proposals shall also be considered, such as provision of trees in a
*
dedicated area or ‘non-services’ berm in the road reserve. Tree planting in groups can
d
help accentuate road perception (see 3.3.5). Strategically placed, grouped plantings of
trees are often of greater benefit and impact than individual trees placed linearly in a
n
roadside berm.
ala
7.3.5 Planted grass areas, berms, swales, or rain gardens
Berms, swales, or rain gardens shall be of sufficient width to allow for adequate growth of
Ze
the plants and ease of maintenance. Narrow grass strips should be avoided. It is important
to provide adequate means for tree growth and ongoing tree health at the same time as
allowing for infiltration of water.
ew
7.3.6 Species selection
In selecting species for planting, take into account the overall composition, low maintenance,
and longevity, as well as the need to comply with the TA’s planting policies. The TA should
sN
maintain a register of suitable species for local conditions.
The spacing of trees and plants should ensure a coherent design. The following matters
shall be considered:
rd
(a) Suitability of eco-sourced native plants for revegetation planting of the ecological
region to protect the local biodiversity;
da
(b) Suitability to environmental conditions, for example climate, ground moisture, wind,
99954
118.92.13.10
and shade;
an
(c) Tolerance to high foot traffic use where appropriate;

(d) Pest and disease resistance, invasive or recognised as a pest plant under the National
Pest Plant Accord (refer to http://www.biosecurity.govt.nz/nppa);
St
(e) Non-suckering habit;

(f) Final height, form, and longevity;
ht
(g) Maintenance requirements;

(h) Safety such as toxicity of leaves, flowers, seeds, and bark in areas likely to be used
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
by young children, and impairments to pedestrians;
Plant species on the road should be selected to avoid interfering with sight lines inconsistent
py
with the target operating speed. The mature size of any tree or garden planting is to be
assessed for each planting location and relative to the surrounding street environment.
Co
7.3.7 Quality control

All plants shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and free of any defects which may be detrimental
to plant growth and development. In addition plants should have vigorous root and branch
systems and plants supplied in pots should not be root bound. To ensure that plants adapt
and thrive once planted they should be ‘hardened off’ prior to planting. Only species
adapted to the site conditions shall be planted.
184
NZS 4404:2010
7.3.8 Landscaping structures
7.3.8.1
*
Landscaping structures include (but are not limited to) sculptures, walls, fences, screens,
bollards, tree cages, entranceways, and posts. The materials should be robust to suit
d
their purpose and ideally reflect the local character. The design of the landscape structure
n
shall be considered as an integral part of the development and surroundings to fulfil both
functional and aesthetic requirements. Durability and maintenance requirements shall be
ala
considered. Structures shall not:
(a) Inappropriately limit safe sight lines;
Ze
(b) Be a hazard to pedestrians, people with disabilities, cyclists, or vehicle traffic.
7.3.8.2
ew
Entranceway wall structures shall be located fully on private land unless TA approval is
obtained. Any other immovable landscape structure (for example boulders) shall be located
to prevent obstructing access to underground services.
7.3.8.3
sN
Structures shall be designed to safely withstand appropriate loadings. Structures not
exempt under the Building Act shall only be constructed on receipt of a building consent.
rd
Playground equipment shall comply with NZS 5828 and SNZ HB 5828.1.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
All retaining walls including those not requiring a building consent should be constructed to
resist lateral earth pressures and those from any surcharge loading that may be present.
an
7.3.9 Fencing of reserves

The permanent fencing of common boundaries of any reserve including esplanade, reserve
St
accessways, and road boundaries, may be required. Standards and requirements shall
be in accordance with the TA’s fencing policy at the time. The TA may specify that one or
both of the following options apply:
ht
(a) A fencing covenant is registered on all titles of properties with a common boundary
to reserve land, indemnifying the TA against all costs of erection and maintenance
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
of fences on common boundaries;

(b) There is a specific fencing design for the reserve or boundary type.
py
7.3.10 Planting period and irrigation

Planting programmes where possible shall occur in the season that optimises growing
conditions for plants and trees and maximises plant establishment.
Co
The TA may require provision for permanent or temporary irrigation of specimen trees,
gardens, or plantings. Irrigation of trees shall be required during the first two summer
seasons following planting. Provision for watering during the establishment of plants may
be required for gardens that are not otherwise irrigated.
185
NZS 4404:2010
7.4 Construction and maintenance
7.4.1 Introduction
*
There are minimum construction and maintenance standards and recommended procedures
d
to be followed to ensure that all landscaping is to an acceptable standard prior to final
inspection and release of the bond, if a bond is required.
n
It is the developer’s responsibility to ensure that the landscaping meets the required
ala
standards at the termination of the maintenance period. The developer is responsible (and
may be bonded) for the routine maintenance and replacement of the planting including
dead wooding, weed control, mulching, replacing dead trees, shrubs, and plants, and
Ze
watering for a defined period from the time of acceptance of as-built landscape plans by
the TA or issue of a s. 224 completion certificate under the Resource Management Act.
ew
7.4.2 Soil and fertility
The developer shall be responsible for the supply and spreading of soil. Topsoil should be
correctly stored and handled when stripped and respread. A soil test shall be undertaken to
sN
determine the composition and type of fertiliser to be applied to the area being developed.
A proprietary fertiliser or soil ameliorant suited to the species shall be applied where the
existing soil is deficient in minerals and nutrients, plants are showing signs of lack of fertility,
or to ensure maximum health and vigour.
rd
Application rates and type of fertiliser or soil ameliorant should be selected according to
species and soil fertility.
da
99954
118.92.13.10
7.4.3 Weeds and litter control

At the end of the maintenance period there shall generally be no weeds within 2 m of any
an
tree planting or in garden beds. Weeds should be controlled in an appropriate manner.

When hoeing/pulling weeds care shall be taken to avoid damage to plants and their roots.
St
The soil shall not be mixed with mulch when removing weeds. Any spraying should be kept
to a minimum near swales, rain gardens, ponds, riparian margins, and adjacent properties.
All areas once established shall be kept free of litter and debris, including paper, plastic,
ht
stones, bricks, bottles, glass, cans, and other forms of inorganic matter.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
7.4.4 Planting grass areas
7.4.4.1
py
Grass areas and berms shall be formed after all other construction has been completed.
The grass areas and berms shall incorporate not less than 100 mm compacted thickness of
friable weed and stone free topsoil (generally made up of a compositions of approximately
Co
1 – 5% sand, 7 – 16% humus or organic material, and no more that 30% weight in clay)
placed over a base material capable of allowing root penetration and sustaining growth.
The maximum slope for grass areas intended to be mown is 1:5.
186
NZS 4404:2010
7.4.4.2
Heavily compacted soils shall be ripped to a depth of 300 mm with rip lines 1 m apart, and
rolled, before any laying of topsoil. The ground profile shall be smooth and free of ruts and
*
depressions prior to grassing. Ripping to decompact soils should not be undertaken within
d
the dripline of trees to be retained. Grass areas and berms shall be graded to edges (for
example, pavement or footpath) allowing for approximately 15 mm of settlement.
n
ala
7.4.4.3
Rural berms shall be topsoiled to the same standards as urban berms unless they make
use of already grassed undisturbed ground.
Ze
7.4.4.4
The area for grass seeding shall be free of all weed species. Grass seed mixes shall
ew
be either an approved dwarf cultivar rye grass or an approved turf species blend. Other
special purpose grass seed and plant species may be used in special areas such as
swales and rain gardens.
7.4.4.5
sN
A sward coverage of not less than 90% shall be achieved within 1 month of sowing, and
before completion documentation shall be provided for processing by the TA. All established
rd
grass shall be mown to a range specified by the TA. A common mowing height range is
a minimum height of 50 mm and maximum height of 100 mm. All grass edges shall be
da
99954
118.92.13.10
maintained in a neat and tidy manner.
7.4.5 Mulch
an
7.4.5.1
Mulch shall be applied to tree and garden areas to conserve moisture and reduce weed
St
growth, except in riparian margins. Typically mulch will be cambium grade bark mulch,
clean, free of sawdust and dirt, and with individual pieces no larger than 100 mm; mulched
trees/branches that have no viable seeds; or stone mulches. Mulch for planting beds
ht
shall be a uniform 100 mm in final depth. Edges shall be formed to hold the mulch without
spillage on to adjacent surfaces. Before mulching soil should be damp to a depth of
300 mm. Mulching should be carried out on an ongoing basis to all garden beds and
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
juvenile trees to maintain specified depth at end of maintenance period.

py
7.4.5.2
Mulch shall only be spread after the soil surface is levelled off to remove bumps and hollows.
Weeds and grass are to be removed prior to mulching. Plants shall not be damaged or
Co
buried during the mulching process. Where it is known that bark mulch affects certain
species or will be lost due to wind, slope of the land, or for some other reason, alternative
mulches shall be considered and used.
187
NZS 4404:2010
7.4.6 Specimen tree planting
7.4.6.1
*
Specimen trees are defined as trees with a trunk diameter of 25 mm to 100 mm when
measured at 1400 mm above ground level. Larger trees can be used with the approval
d
of the TA.
n
Those contractors involved in specimen tree planting and maintenance should be competent
ala
horticultural/ arboricultural practitioners and therefore follow accepted industry standard
procedures for tree planting. Establishment and initial maintenance are critical to the
long-term viability of the specimen tree.
Ze
7.4.6.2
Specimen trees shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and free of any defects (relative to the
ew
species). Specimen trees are to be a minimum of PB 95 (planter bag of 95 pint capacity
approximately 54 L) grade when planted. A recommended minimum height for specimen
trees is 2.5 m at the time of planting to aid early establishment unless the local conditions
of a site require consideration of alternatives, for example, an exposed site may require
sN
small, well-hardened trees. Specimen trees between 1.5 – 2.5 m may be allowed with
the approval of the TA.
rd
7.4.6.3
Given the generally modified nature of soil in subdivisions it is essential that a suitable
da
99954
118.92.13.10
tree planting pit be prepared. The approach shall be to have:
(a) Ground free from debris and rubbish;

(b) Ground cultivated to a depth of 1 m and a width of 1 m to break up any compaction,
an
fracture subsoil, and afford drainage to hard rock areas;

(c) Sides of planting holes crumbled and not smooth;
St
(d) Topsoil incorporated into the upper level of planting holes;

(e) Each tree fertilised with an appropriate amount of slow release fertiliser, as per the
ht
manufacturer’s recommendations;
(f) Final planted depth consistent with finished ground level;
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(g) Each tree adequately staked to withstand movement in natural wind conditions and
to meet TA standards;
(h) Trees secured with expandable ties at approximately 1/3 of their height or as high
py
as required to support the tree (to be checked every 6 months) or anchored below
ground with a root ball anchor;
Co
(i) Soil firmed sufficiently to force any air pockets from planting holes;
(j) Trees watered immediately following planting;
(k) Trees radially mulched to a distance of 500 mm or to drip line, whichever is the
greater area and a depth of 100 mm; and
(l) Staking uniformly low and visually consistent throughout the subdivision stage.
Ground-treated timber stakes should only be used if the stakes are to be removed
once the trees are stable, that is at the end of a maintenance period.
188
NZS 4404:2010
7.4.6.4
The onus is on the developer to ensure that trees are protected during the further development
of the subdivision (that is, the construction of dwellings/buildings) and during the defined
*
maintenance period.
d
7.4.7 General amenity planting
n
Before topsoil is added all stripped and graded ground intended for planting should be
ala
cultivated to a depth appropriate to the plant species including a sufficient depth to break
up any compaction. There should be friable topsoil for shrubs and ground cover appropriate
to the depth of the root ball.
Ze
7.4.8 Revegetation planting and existing vegetation
Revegetation planting shall be a minimum grade of PB3 (planter bag) or root trainers and
shall be planted at a density and size of plant that achieves a coverage ratio specified by
ew
the TA or appropriate to form the desired canopy density. Plants shall be spaced unevenly
in the planting layout to encourage a natural appearance and setting.
sN
Assisted natural revegetation is a technique using native seedling establishment
complemented with weeding, thinning, and mulching and is an option that may be considered.
Edges of existing vegetation, to be retained where appropriate, shall be planted to

rd
mitigate the effects of wind funnelling. Mulches can be used in these areas to minimise
the establishment of weed species.
da
7.4.9 Swales, rain gardens, wetlands, and riparian margins planting

99954
118.92.13.10
Swales, rain gardens, wetlands, and riparian margins should have site specific planting
an
plans prepared by a suitably qualified person and submitted to the TA for approval of
designs. Access shall be provided if future removal and maintenance is required.
St
7.4.10 Pruning
7.4.10.1
ht
Trees should be selected and located to minimise ongoing pruning costs and requirements.
All pruning of street trees shall be undertaken by a suitably qualified arborist. All pruning
shall be undertaken to recognised arboricultural practices.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Pruning should be carried out on shrubs to maintain a high standard of presentation,

display, and plant vigour. Paths, roads, and all other accessways should be kept clear of
py
excess growth. Pruning may also be necessary to ensure signs are not obscured. Where
appropriate pruning should allow for adequate sight visibility to ensure the safety of road
users. However there are situations where planting should be used to restrict visibility
Co
and slow traffic or frame views.
189
NZS 4404:2010
7.4.10.2
All weak, dead, diseased, and damaged growth should be removed, and pruning carried
out to maintain the desired shape and size. Pruning should not be carried out during
*
leaf burst or leaf fall. The following pruning techniques (for shrubs) should be employed
d
where appropriate:
n
(a) Tips to be pinched or purged as appropriate for species to give desired shape and size;
(b) Form pruning of young plants to ensure compact form and shape;
ala
(c) Undercutting of groundcovers at edges generally;
(d) Plants are to be pruned so that they do not smother neighbouring plants.
Ze
7.4.11 Maintenance
7.4.11.1
ew
Landscape plans shall ensure that future maintenance requirements have been considered
so that ongoing costs are minimised. The maintenance period will vary depending on the
nature type of planting and should be covered in specifications and as required by the TA.
The developer shall:

sN
(a) Remove from the area all temporary services, machinery, and surplus materials that
have been used for the construction, and leave the site in a tidy condition;
rd
(b) Clean all paths and surrounding areas;
(c) Remove all plant labels;
da
99954
118.92.13.10
(d) Clear and weed all channels;

(e) Ensure that all damaged, vandalised, stolen, or dead plants are replaced to maintain
an
numbers and unity of display;

(f) Ensure that amenity planting beds are cleaned to remove prunings, dead or damaged
St
leaves, and any other object or material, including retail attachments such as labels.
The edges of the beds shall be left evenly shaped and sloped.
Land to be vested for reserves purposes shall as a minimum meet the following general
ht
requirements:
(g) The land is to be free of noxious weeds, tree stumps (above ground) and other
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
specified vegetation;
(h) All previous fences, farm utilities, building remains, and rubbish are to be removed
py
or disposed of to the satisfaction of the TA;

(i) Land to be mown shall be accessible to suitable mowing equipment, and is to have
an established turf type seed grass cover;
Co
(j) Drainage reserves, ponds, lakes, channels, and streams requiring maintenance shall
have suitable access for machinery;
(k) All boundaries are to be surveyed and clearly pegged;
(l) Any rights of way or easements are to be formalised at no cost to the TA;
(m) Any proposed landscape planting or furniture/structures shall be completed.
190
NZS 4404:2010
8 NETWORK UTILITY SERVICES
8.1 Scope
*
This section sets out requirements for the provision of stormwater, wastewater, and water
d
supply systems, power, telecommunications and gas, and their locations in the road. The
n
scope of these provisions applies to both future and existing roads and applies equally
to all network utility services.
ala
Note – Network utility services in roads are subject to the Utilities Access Act 2010 and the
Infrastructure (Amendments Relating to Utilities Access) Act 2010.
Ze
8.2 General
8.2.1 Legislation
ew
Referenced legislation and documents are listed in the Referenced Documents section
of this Standard.
8.2.2 Definitions sN
For the purpose of section 8 the following definitions shall apply:
Code Means the national code of practice approved in accordance

rd
with the Utilities Access Act 2010
Corridor manager Has the same meaning given to it by the Utilities Access
da
99954
118.92.13.10
Act 2010
8.2.3 Context
an
The developer is required to make all arrangements with the appropriate network utility
operators for the supply and installation of stormwater, wastewater, water supply, and
St
electric power and to the extent applicable for the provision of telecommunication and
gas reticulation.
The developer shall provide satisfactory evidence to the TA corridor manager that the
ht
network utility operators are prepared to reticulate the subdivision and that agreement
on the financial arrangements for the installation of each supply has been reached. The
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
following applies to each utility:
(a) Stormwater, wastewater, and water supply. Where water supply and wastewater
pipes, and stormwater systems are in the road reserve, they shall be installed at
py
the time of road construction to the requirements of the TA corridor manager and
the water supply authority for water pipes, or the TA for wastewater pipes and
Co
stormwater systems;
(b) Electric power. The supply of electric power will generally be by means of an
underground system. Ducts shall be installed at the time of road construction to the
requirements of the electrical supply authority and the TA corridor manager. Where
the developer is intending to provide electric power other than by underground system, ➤
the developer shall provide alternative supply arrangements for approval of the TA;
191
NZS 4404:2010
(c) Telecommunications. Arrangements shall be made with the telecommunication

supplier for the reticulation of telecommunication facilities. Where only part of this
reticulation is being supplied initially the arrangements shall include the requisite
*
space being maintained for the installation of the remainder of the reticulation at a
d
later date. Ducts will be supplied to the subdividing developer at the time of road
construction for installation in the carriageway formation to the requirements of the
n
telecommunications supplier and the TA corridor manager;
ala
(d) Gas. Where an existing gas supply is available or likely to be available to serve a
subdivision, the developer may make appropriate arrangements with the gas supply
authority and the TA corridor manager, and at the time of road construction, install
Ze
such ducts/pipes as may be required.
The developer shall follow the requirements of the Code to the extent that they apply to
the utility installation for the development.
ew
8.3 Design
8.3.1 Plans sN
Copies of the plans of the development/subdivision shall be forwarded by the developer
to all of the affected network utility operators at an early date to facilitate the design of
the reticulation.
rd
C8.3.1
da
It is important that all of the affected network utility operators are advised by the
99954
118.92.13.10
developer of any amendments to the development plan. Information when available

an
on the type of dwellings and likelihood of more than one dwelling on any lot, will be
valuable for design purposes.
St
8.3.1.1
In preparing the engineering plans consideration shall be given to the requirements of the
ht
network utility operators and the TA corridor manager for:
(a) Minimum cover to cables and pipes;

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(b) The network utility operator’s desired position for the cable and piping within the road
berm as agreed with the TA corridor manager;
(c) The minimum separation distances between power or telecommunication cables,
py
and gas or water mains;

(d) The width of berm which shall be clear of other services and obstructions to enable
Co
efficient cable-laying operations.
C8.3.1.1
Reference should be made to each network utility operator and the TA corridor manager
for their specific requirements. Refer to the Code for further information.
192
NZS 4404:2010
8.3.2 Utilities above ground

Utilities should preferably be sited within the road berm or on land which will legally
become part of the road but which is set back outside the normal road line. Alternatively
*
separate lots (public utility reserves) or easements over private property may be used.
d
If there are any concerns raised about the safety of above ground structures, the risk
should be assessed in accordance with the requirements of the Code and any significant
n
risks mitigated.
ala
8.4 Construction
Ze
8.4.1 Underground cabling
Underground cable laying shall be achieved by the most appropriate method considering
the nature of subsoil and potential damage to infrastructures and shall be to the approval
ew
of the TA corridor manager.
C8.4.1
sN
The trenchless method is preferred in existing urban areas for underground cabling.
Refer to the Code for further information.
rd
8.4.2 Materials
Materials and sizes of ducts and pipes shall comply with the requirements of the network
da
99954
utility operators and the colours should be in accordance with the Department of Labour’s
Guide for safety with underground services.
118.92.13.10
an
8.4.3 Conversion to underground on existing roads

Where a proposed subdivision fronts on to an existing road, the conversion of overhead
reticulation to underground will in some instances be desirable. Agreement on the feasibility
St
and benefit shall first be agreed between the network utility operator and the TA.
8.4.4 Commercial and industrial subdivisions

ht
The servicing requirements for commercial and industrial areas are often indeterminate.
Close liaison between the developer and the network utility operator is advisable, particularly
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
immediately before cabling is installed so that changes can be incorporated to accommodate

extra sites or the requirements of a particular industry.
py
8.4.5 Location of services
8.4.5.1 Position in the road

Co
Position and depth shall be agreed with the appropriate network utility operator and the
TA corridor manager in accordance with the provisions of the Code.
193
NZS 4404:2010
8.4.5.2 Recording of underground services

TAs shall maintain a procedure for recording the location of their underground services
on plans which are readily available to the public at the TA office. It is unlikely that the
*
TA will be able to provide a service for utility services other than those for which it is
d
immediately responsible. These will usually be stormwater, wastewater, and water supply.
Other authorities or network utility operators are required to maintain similar records of
n
the existence and detailed location of their services for ready reference.
ala
8.4.5.3 Accuracy and tolerance
It is essential that all services be laid to predictable lines if there is to be a reasonable
Ze
opportunity of laying new services in existing systems. In addition to specifying the
location of any service in the road berm, there should also be a tolerance which shall
on no account be exceeded without proper measurement and recording on the detailed
record plan. Tolerance of ±300 mm in the horizontal and ±100 mm in the vertical is a
ew
practicable requirement.
8.4.6 Trenches
8.4.6.1
sN
When new subdivision construction is undertaken the backfilling and compaction of
trenches to a state of stability consistent with the future of the surface shall be carried out
rd
in accordance with the Code and to the satisfaction of the TA corridor manager.
da
99954
118.92.13.10 8.4.6.2
Where underground services are laid after the initial construction of the subdivision or
where they are extended from an existing area into a new one, special attention shall be
an
given to the opening and reinstatement of trenches in accordance with the Code and to
the satisfaction of the TA corridor manager.
St
C8.4.6
TAs are recommended to prepare standard specifications for the opening of trenches
ht
and the restoration of surfaces. Network utility operators are in turn recommended to
comply with the requirements of such specifications.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Refer to the Code for further guidance.

py
Co
194
NZS 4404:2010
APPENDIX A – ACCEPTABLE PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS

(Informative)
*
Table A1 and table A2 give information on acceptable pipe and fitting materials. The
information is sourced with permission from the Water Services Association of Australia.
d
Refer also to WSA 02 (Sewerage Code of Australia) and WSA 03 (Water Supply Code of
n
Australia) for further information.
ala
Ze
ew
sN
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
195
Table A1 – Acceptable pipe materials and Standards
196
NOTE – Refer also to WSA 02 (Sewerage Code of Australia) and WSA 03 (Water Supply Code of Australia)
Pipe Standard Stormwater Wastewater Wastewater Water Notes

materials applicable (Gravity) (Pressure (Gravity) supply
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
sewer/ rising (Pressure)

main)
Co
PVC-U AS/NZS 1260 � – � – Gravity applications only.
Well established methods of repair.
py
(Class SN 4, Suitable for aggressive groundwater, anaerobic conditions and tidal
8, or 16 as zones.
rig
required by Can be used for trenchless installation with suitable end load
TA) resistant joints.
ht
PVC-U AS/NZS 1254 � – St – – Gravity stormwater applications only.
(Class SN
4, or 8, as
an
required by
16
00
80
80
TA)
29
09
3
da
PVC-O AS/NZS 4441 – � – � Improved fracture toughness compared with PVC-U.
Improved fatigue resistance compared with PVC-U and PVC-M.
(Series 1 or
rd
NOTE – Use only DI fittings in pumped mains to achieve full fatigue
Series 2, as resistance. Has increased hydraulic capacity compared with PVC-U and
required by PVC-M. Suitable for aggressive groundwater, anaerobic conditions, and
sN
the TA) tidal zones. Specific design for dynamic stresses (fatigue) required for
pressure sewer applications.
ew
PVC-U AS/NZS 1477 – � – � Well established methods of repair.
Alternative installation techniques possible, for example slip lining.
(Series 1 or Suitable for aggressive groundwater, anaerobic conditions, and
Series 2, as tidal zones.
Ze
required by Can be used for trenchless installation with suitable end load
the TA) resistant joints.
Specific design for dynamic stresses (fatigue) required for pressure
ala
sewer applications. n d
*
Table A1 – Acceptable pipe materials and Standards (continued)

118.92.13.10
main)
99954
PVC-M AS/NZS 4765 – � – � Improved fracture toughness compared with PVC-U.
Co
Has increased hydraulic capacity compared with PVC-U.
(Series 1 or Inferior fatigue resistance compared with PVC-U and PVC-O.
py
Series 2, as Suitable for aggressive groundwater, anaerobic conditions and tidal
required by zones.
the TA) Specific design for dynamic stresses (fatigue) required for pressure
rig
sewer applications.
PE AS/NZS 4130 – � – � Generally for pressure applications.

ht
(PE 80B or Can be easily curved to eliminate the need for bends.
PE 100 as Alternative installation techniques possible, for example pipe
required by
St cracking, direction drilling, and slip lining.
the TA) Can be welded to form an end load resistant system.
an Compression couplings and end load resistant fittings are available
in smaller diameters.
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
Pipe longitudinal flexibility accommodates large differential ground
da
settlement.
Fusion jointing requires skilled installers and special equipment.
rd Retrospective installation of fittings/repair complicated.
Specific design for dynamic stresses (fatigue) required for pressure
sewer applications.
sN
≤ DN 125 available in long coiled lengths for fewer joints.
Suitable for aggressive groundwater, anaerobic conditions or tidal
zones.
ew
Suitable for ground with high subsidence potential, for example fill
or mining areas. Ze
ala
n d
*
197
NZS 4404:2010
198
main)
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
PE AS/NZS 5065 � – � – Only for gravity applications.

Co
(Stiffness Can be easily curved.
Class SN 4, 8, Alternative installation techniques possible, for example pipe
py
10, or 16 as cracking and slip lining.
required by Can be welded to form an end load resistant system.
the TA) Fusion jointing requires skilled installers and special equipment.
rig
Retrospective installation of fittings/repair complicated.
Smaller diameters available in long coiled lengths for fewer joints.
Suitable for aggressive groundwater, anaerobic conditions, or tidal
ht
zones.
PP AS/NZS 5065 � – � – Only for gravity applications.

St
(Stiffness
Class SN 4, 8,
an
10, or 16 as
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
required by
da
the TA)
GRP AS 3571.1 � � �
rd
– Alternative installation techniques possible, for example slip lining.
UV resistant (special product).
Custom made fittings can be manufactured.
Suitable for use without additional corrosion protection in areas
sN
where stray electrical currents occur.
Low impact resistance and ease of damage to thermosetting resin,
ew
makes GRP susceptible to damage during transportation, and
installation, in above ground installations, from vandalism, or when
damaged as a consequence of nearby excavation.
Suitable for aggressive groundwater, anaerobic conditions or tidal
Ze
zones. ala
n d
*

118.92.13.10
99954
main)
GRP AS 3571.2 – – – � Alternative installation techniques possible, for example slip lining.
Co
UV resistant (special product).
Custom made fittings can be manufactured.
py
Suitable for use without additional corrosion protection in areas
where stray electrical currents occur.
Low impact resistance and ease of damage to thermosetting resin,
rig
makes GRP susceptible to damage during transportation, and
installation, in above ground installations, from vandalism, or when
ht
damaged as a consequence of nearby excavation.
Suitable for aggressive groundwater, anaerobic conditions, or tidal
zones.
St
VC BS EN 295 � – � – Gravity applications only.
an Has benefits for particularly aggressive industrial wastes.
Not recommended for active seismic (earthquake) zones, or
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
unstable ground.
da
RRRC AS/NZS 4058 � – � – Requires protection from hydrogen sulphide attack in sewer
(rubber
rd applications, by plastic lining or selection of appropriate cement
ring joint additives.
reinforced
sN
concrete)
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
199
NZS 4404:2010
200
main)
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
CLS (SCL) NZS 4442 – � – � Cement mortar lined, PE coating below ground or heavy duty
Co
(concrete AS 1579 coating above ground
lined welded High mechanical strength and toughness.
py
steel) Available in long lengths.
RRJ and welded joints available.
Custom made, specially configured steel fittings can be made to
rig
order.
Can be welded to form a system that will resist end load and joint
ht permeation.
UV resistant/vandal proof/impact resistant (where PE coated).
Cathodic protection (CP) can be applied to electrically continuous
St
pipelines to provide enhanced corrosion protection.
PE lined and coated – RRJ
an
As above for CLS (SCL).
16
00
80
Suitable for conveying soft water.
80
29
09
3
Corrosion resistant under all conditions.
da
General notes
Standard Portland cement mortar not resistant to H2S attack, at any
rd
high points or discharge points in the main. High alumina cement
has improved resistance.
Welded joints require skilled installers and special equipment.
sN
Welded joints require reinstatement of protection systems on site.
Special design required for welded installations parallel, and
ew
adjacent to high voltage (> 66 kV) transmission lines.
Cathodic protection requires regular monitoring and maintenance.
Seal coating may be required over cement mortar linings, when
conveying soft water, or in low flow extremities of reticulation mains,
Ze
to prevent potentially high PH.
Suitable for high load applications such as railway crossings and
major roads.
ala
Large diameters are available.n
Suitable for aerial or suspended pipeline applications.
d
*

118.92.13.10
99954
main)
DI AS/NZS 2280 – � – � Fatigue analysis not normally required (pressure sewer

Co
(ductile iron AS 3681 applications).
pipe) High mechanical strength and toughness.
py
Ease of jointing.
UV resistant/vandal proof/impact resistant.
Well established methods of repair.
rig
Suitable for high pressure and above ground pipelines.
Restrained joint systems available.
ht
Sufficient ring stiffness to not rely on side support, for structural
adequacy for the usual water supply installation depths.
Elevated PH may occur when conveying soft water, or in low flow
St
extremities of reticulation mains.
PE sleeving is required, and must be carefully applied and repaired
an
when damaged.
16
00
80
80
Standard Portland cement mortar not resistant to H2S attack, at
29
09
3
any high points or discharge points in the main. (Wastewater
da
applications. High alumina cement has improved resistance.)
Not suitable for aggressive groundwater, anaerobic conditions, or
rd
tidal zones.
Corrugated AS/NZS 2041 � – – – Generally of short length (for culverts and so on). Joints need
sN
aluminium consideration in fine soils with high water tables. Invert may need
pipe lining to extend life.
ew
Corrugated AS/NZS 2041 � – – – Generally only for short length (culverts and so on). Joints need
steel pipe NZS 4405 consideration in fine soils and high water tables. Invert may need
NZS 4406 lining to extend life.
Ze
ABS AS/NZS 3518 – � – � Specific design for dynamic stresses (fatigue required for pressure
AS/NZS 3690 sewer applications).
AS/NZS 3879
ala
PVC-U AS/NZS 1260 � – � – Gravity applications only. n d
PVC-U AS/NZS 1254 � – – – Gravity stormwater applications only.
*
201
NZS 4404:2010
Table A2 – Acceptable fitting materials and Standards
202
Fittings Standard Stormwater Wastewater Wastewater Water supply Notes
Materials applicable (Gravity) (Pressure (Gravity) (Pressure)
sewer/
118.92.13.10
99954
rising main
NZS 4404:2010
Co
PVC-U AS/NZS 1254 Gravity stormwater applications only.
py � – – –
PE PE pressure fittings, including mechanical compression, butt

AS/NZS 4129 � � � �
rig fusion or electrofusion, as approved by the TA.
Access covers
AS 3996 � – � –
and grates ht
Ductile iron Generally for pressure applications. Shall be coated with a
AS/NZS 2280 – � – �
polymeric coating, applied in accordance with AS/NZS 4158.
Ductile iron Generally for pressure applications.

St
unrestrained Shall be coated with a polymeric coating, applied in
AS/NZS 4998 – � – �
mechanical
an accordance with AS/NZS 4158.
couplings
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
Plastic or
da Generally for pressure applications. Tapping bands used on
metallic flexible pipes shall be AS/NZS 4793 Type F – that is, ‘full circle
tapping bands AS/NZS 4793 – � – � design’.
rd
Ductile iron tapping bands shall be coated with a polymeric
coating, applied in accordance with AS/NZS 4158.
sN
Fire hydrants NZS/BS 750 – � – � Generally pressure applications.
Resilient Generally pressure applications.

ew
seated gate AS 2638.2 – � – �
valves
PE Gravity applications only.

Ze
(Stiffness Class
SN 4, 8, 10 or 16 AS/NZS 5065 � – � –
as required by
ala
the TA)
PP
n
Gravity applications only. d
(Stiffness Class
SN 4, 8, 10 or 16 AS/NZS 5065 � – � – *
as required by
the TA)
NZS 4404:2010
APPENDIX B – STANDARD CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS

(Informative)
*
The following drawings are sourced with permission from the Water Services Association
d
of Australia and modified for New Zealand conditions.
n
COMMON DETAILS
ala
CM – 001 Embedment and trenchfill – Typical arrangement
CM – 002 Standard embedment – Flexible and rigid pipes
CM – 003 Bulkheads and trenchstop – Standard details
CM – 004 Manhole – Standard details
Ze
CM – 005 Manholes – Mini and drop manhole details
CM – 006 Manholes – Stormwater or wastewater DN 375 to DN 750
ew
WATER SUPPLY
WS – 001 Typical mains construction – Reticulation main arrangements

WS – 002 Typical mains construction – Distribution and transfer mains
WS – 003
WS – 004
sN
Property services – Connection to main
Thrust blocks – Concrete block details
WS – 005 Thrust and anchor blocks – Gate valves and vertical bends
WS – 006 Valve and hydrant identification – Identification markers and marker posts
rd
WASTE WATER
da
99954
118.92.13.10
WW – 001 Pipelaying – Typical arrangements
WW – 002 Property connections – Buried interface method
WW – 003 Maintenance shafts – Typical installation
an
WW – 004 Maintenance shafts – MS and variable bend installations

WW – 005 Maintenance shafts – TMS and connection installations
WW – 006 Maintenance shafts – Typical MS cover arrangements
St
These drawings will be available in standard CAD and .pdf formats as free downloads
from the Standards New Zealand webshop (www.standards.co.nz). Purchasers of this
ht
Standard will be able to adapt the CAD drawings for incorporation into their specific design
without breaching copyright.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise stated.

py
Co
203
204
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
CM – 001 Embedment and trenchfill – Typical arrangement
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
205
NZS 4404:2010
CM – 002 Standard embedment – Flexible and rigid pipes

206
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
CM – 003 Bulkheads and trenchstop – Standard details
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
207
NZS 4404:2010
CM – 004 Manhole – Standard details

208
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
CM – 005 Manholes – Mini and drop manhole details
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
209
NZS 4404:2010
CM – 006 Manholes – Stormwater or wastewater DN 375 to DN 750

210
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
WS – 001 Typical mains construction – Reticulation main arrangements
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
211
NZS 4404:2010
WS – 002 Typical mains construction – Distribution and transfer mains

212
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
WS – 003 Property services – Connection to main
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
213
NZS 4404:2010
WS – 004 Thrust blocks – Concrete block details

214
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
WS – 005 Thrust and anchor blocks – Gate valves and vertical bends
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
215
NZS 4404:2010
WS – 006 Valve and hydrant identification – Identification markers and marker posts
216
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
WW – 001 Pipelaying – Typical arrangements
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
217
NZS 4404:2010
WW – 002 Property connections – Buried interface method

218
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
WW – 003 Maintenance shafts – Typical installation
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
219
NZS 4404:2010
WW – 004 Maintenance shafts – MS and variable bend installations

220
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
WW – 005 Maintenance shafts – TMS and connection installations
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
221
NZS 4404:2010
WW – 006 Maintenance shafts – Typical MS cover arrangements

118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
NOTES
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
NZS 4404:2010
APPENDIX C – FIELD TESTING OF PIPELINES

(Normative)
*
C1 Scope
d
Appendix C is based on some of the test methods in AS/NZS 2566.2, section 6, and
n
associated appendices. This appendix specifies suggested methods of test and their
ala
application to field testing of pipelines for the purpose of determining pipeline acceptability.
Field testing includes leak or hydrostatic pressure testing, as appropriate, for pressure
and non-pressure pipelines. Testing may also be carried out in accordance with the
material-specific and application-specific test methods of AS/NZS 2032, AS/NZS 2033,
Ze
and AS/NZS 2566.2.
C1.1 Purpose of field testing
ew
The purpose of field testing is to:
(a) Reveal the occurrence of faults in the laying procedure, for example, joints incorrectly
installed or pipes damaged;
(b)
sN
Reveal the occurrence of faults in the assembly procedure of pipeline components,
for example, tapping bands, maintenance structures, frames, and covers;
(c) In the case of pressure pipelines, determine that the pipeline will sustain a pressure
rd
greater than its design pressure without leakage;
(d) In the case of non-pressure pipelines, determine that the pipeline satisfies the
da
99954
118.92.13.10
requirements for infiltration and exfiltration; and

(e) Test the installed structural integrity of the pipeline.
an
Field testing is not intended to supplement or replace the test requirements of product
standards.
St
C2 Non-pressure pipelines – Field leakage testing

Leakage testing is used to reveal locations of potential infiltration and exfiltration due to
ht
the inclusion of damaged pipes, seals, or incorrectly made joints in the pipeline at the
completion of installation.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Leakage testing for acceptance of non-pressure pipelines shall be carried out by at least
one of the following methods:
py
(a) Low pressure air testing;

(b) Hydrostatic testing
Co
NOTE – Air tests provide qualitative data only, as air pressure losses cannot be related directly
to water leakage rates.
For pipeline test sections installed below the water table, and for submarine pipelines,
the test pressure used for the hydrostatic test, and for the air test, shall be increased to
maintain the required differential between internal and external pressure.
A pipeline failing to meet the requirements of the air tests may be retested using the
hydrostatic test method.
NOTE – Failure is still probable.
223
NZS 4404:2010
C2.1 Low pressure air test

The test length shall be acceptable where the gauged pressure exceeds 18 kPa (or not
more than 7 kPa less than the pressure at the start of the test) for the time interval shown
*
in table C1 after the shut-off of the air supply.
d
Table C1 is based on an air test pressure of 25 kPa (in excess of any external hydrostatic
n
pressure due to groundwater) and, on this basis, air volume losses shall not exceed the
ala
greater of:
(a) A rate of 0.0009 m3/(min x m2) of pipe wall area; and

(b) A rate of 0.056 m3/min, which is regarded as the lowest detectable individual air leak.
Ze
Column 2 and column 3 of table C1 give the times and lengths up to which (b) prevails
over (a).
ew
NOTE – For safety reasons air test pressures in excess of 50 kPa should not be applied.
sN
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
224
NZS 4404:2010
Table C1 – Low pressure air and vacuum tests –

Minimum time intervals for 7 kPa pressure change in pipeline
*
DN Minimum Maximum Test length (metres)
time length for
d
(minutes) minimum time 50 100 150 200 250
to apply (metres)
n
Minimum test duration (minutes)
ala
80 1.5 231 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.6
100 2 185 2 2 2 2 3
150 3 123 3 3 3 5 6
Ze
225 4 82 4 5 8 10 13
300 6 62 6 9 14 18 23
375 7 49 7 14 22 29 36
ew
450 9 41 10 21 31 41 52
525 10 35 14 28 42 56 70
600 11 31 18 37 55 73 92
675 13 27 23
sN
46 70 93 116
750 14 25 29 57 86 115 143
900 17 21 41 83 124 165 207
rd
1000 19 19 51 102 153 204 255

da
1050 2099954
118.92.13.10
18.8 56 112 169 225 281
1200 23 15 73 147 220 294 367
1500 28 12 115 230 344 459 574
an
NOTE –
The time interval may be reduced for a proportionate reduction in the allowable pressure drop. Where there is no detectable
change in pressure after 1 hour of testing, the section under test shall be deemed acceptable.
St
This table is based on the following equation:

T = 1.02D ikLq
where
T = time for a 7 kPa pressure drop, in seconds
ht
D i = pipeline internal diameter, in metres

q = allowable volume loss in cubic metre/minute/square metre taken as 0.0009 m3/min.m2
k = 0.054DL but not less than 1
rig
L = length of test section, in metres.

09
29
80
80
00
16
Columns 2 and 3 have been calculated with k = 1.0.

The appropriate air or vacuum test/pressure method for pipes larger than DN 750 should be established by reference to the
specifier.
py
C2.1.1 Low pressure air test procedure

The procedure shall be as follows:
Co
(a) Pump in air slowly until a pressure of 25 +5,−0 kPa is reached. Where the pipeline
is below the water table this pressure shall be increased to achieve a differential
pressure of 25 kPa. In no circumstances should the actual pressure exceed 50 kPa;
NOTE – Rapid pressurisation may cause significant air temperature changes, which will
affect the testing accuracy.
(b) Maintain the pressure for at least 3.0 minutes;

(c) Where no leaks are detected, shut off the air supply; ➤
225
NZS 4404:2010
(d) Where the pipeline fails the test, repressurise to 25 +5,−0 kPa and check for leaks
by pouring a concentrated solution of soft soap and water over accessible joints
and fittings;
*
(e) Repair any defects, then repeat steps (a) to (c);
d
(f) With the air supply shut off, monitor the pressure for the time intervals given in table C1.
n
The test length shall be acceptable where the pressure drops by 7 kPa, or less, over the
ala
required (tabulated) test period.
NOTE –
(1) The test length of pipeline should be restricted to pipeline sections between maintenance
Ze
holes (the most convenient places for inserting test plugs or fixing temporary bulkheads).
The method should not be used for test lengths in excess of 250 m and for pipe diameters
larger than 1500 mm.
ew
(2) The procedure for low pressure air testing of large diameter pipelines is potentially
hazardous because of the very large forces to be resisted by temporary plugs or bulkheads
and the serious consequences of accidental bulkhead blow-out. A relief valve, with a 50
kPa maximum setting, should be installed on all pressurising equipment.
C2.2 Hydrostatic test

sN
The test length shall be acceptable where the specified allowable make up water is not
rd
exceeded. Where not specified, the allowable make up water shall be 0.5 L/hour per
metre length per metre diameter.
da
C2.2.1 Hydrostatic test procedure

99954
118.92.13.10

an
(a) The test pressure shall be not less than 20 kPa, or 20 kPa above the groundwater
pressure at the pipe soffit at its highest point, whichever is the greater, and not
exceed 60 kPa at the lowest point of the section;
St
(b) Steeply graded pipelines shall be tested in stages where the maximum pressure, as
stated above, will be exceeded if the whole section is tested in one length;
ht
(c) The pressure shall be maintained for at least 2 hours by adding measured volumes
of water where necessary;
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(d) Any visible leaks detected shall be repaired and the pipeline shall be retested.
py
Co
226
NZS 4404:2010
C3 Pressure pipelines – Field hydrostatic pressure testing

The hydrostatic pressure test method shall be as specified.
*
Hydrostatic pressure testing requires selecting an appropriate configuration of method,
d
pressure, and length of test section.
n
Test parameters and details shall be determined with due consideration to the following:
ala
(a) Pipe material;
(b) Pipe diameter;
(c) Length of test section;
Ze
(d) Duration of the test;
(e) Magnitude of test pressure and rate of pressurisation;
ew
(f) Presence of air in the pipeline;
(g) Time required for saturation of porous liners;

(h) Potential movement of pipeline thrust restraints;
(i) Design pressure for thrust and anchor supports;sN
(j) Accuracy of test equipment;
(k) Ambient temperature changes during testing;
rd
(l) Presence of leaks in equipment used for testing or equipment attachment points
(such as sealing plugs);
da
99954
(m) Potential for leaks in the pipeline.

118.92.13.10
NOTE – It is advisable to begin testing early in the pipeline installation to confirm adequacy
an
of laying procedures and, where appropriate, to increase the length tested progressively
as experience is gained.
St
C3.1 Selection of test pressure

The hydrostatic test pressure at any point in the pipeline shall be:
(a) Not less than the design pressure; and

ht
(b) Not more than 25% above the rated pressure of any pipeline component.
rig
3
09
29
80
NOTE – The design pressure is the maximum system pressure at a point in the pipeline,
80
00
16
considering future developments, static pressure, dynamic pressure, and an allowance for
short-term surge pressure (water hammer), as determined by analysis.
py
Compressed air testing shall not be permitted for pressure pipe.
C3.2 Selecting test lengths

Co
The pipeline length tested shall be either the whole, or a section (capable of being isolated),
of the pipeline depending on the length and diameter, the availability of water, and the
spacing between sectioning valves or blank ends. ➤
227
NZS 4404:2010
The pipeline shall be divided into test sections such that:
(a) The hydrostatic test pressure at any point in the pipeline is:
*
(i) Not less than the design pressure; and
(ii) Not more than 25% above the rated pressure of any pipeline component; and
d
(b) Water is available for the test together with facilities for its disposal, in accordance
n
with regulatory requirements, after the test.
ala
NOTE –
(1) Pipelines longer than 1000 m may need to be tested in several sections. Where long lengths
are to be tested, radio or other electronic means of communication between test operatives,
Ze
to coordinate test procedures and thus minimise the test duration, is desirable.
(2) Long test sections may incorporate a large number of mechanical (that is, flanged) joints,
which should be checked for leakage. The longer the test section the harder it is to locate
a leak, or discriminate between a leak and the other effects, such as the absorption of air
ew
into solution under pressure.
C3.3 Pre-test procedures

The pre-test procedures are as follows:
(a)
sN
All required temporary and permanent thrust blocks, or other pipeline thrust-resisting
methods, including integral joint-restraint systems, shall be in place, and all concrete
shall be adequately cured (normally a minimum of 7 days);
rd
(b) Blank flanges or caps shall be installed at the beginning and end of the test section.
Testing shall not take place against closed valves unless they are fully restrained
da
and it is possible to check for leakage past the valve seat. Mechanical ends that are
99954
118.92.13.10
not end load resistant shall be temporarily strutted or anchored, to withstand the test
an
pressures without movement;

NOTE – Temporary supports should not be removed until the pipeline has been
depressurised. All test personnel should be informed of the loading limits on temporary
St
fittings and supports.
(c) Where practicable, all bolted joints shall be left exposed to allow for re-tensioning
during or after testing;
ht
(d) Compacted embedment and fill material shall be placed to leave all joints, service
connections and ball valves exposed wherever possible;
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(e) For PE pipelines, the pressurising time shall not exceed 45 minutes;
NOTE – The pressurising time affects the duration of the PE pipeline test.
py
(f) The test equipment shall be placed in position and checked for satisfactory operation;
(g) The pump shall be of adequate size to raise and maintain the test pressure;
Co
NOTE – A pump that is too small may increase the test duration or where too large it may
be difficult to control the pressure.
(h) Two calibrated test gauges shall be used to cross check gauge accuracy;
228
NZS 4404:2010
(i) Slowly fill the test length of pipeline with water, preferably from the lowest point,
ensuring air is vented at the high point valves. Allow a period, in the range of 3 hours
to 24 hours, for the temperature of the test length and the test water to stabilise and
*
for dissolved air to exit the system. The recommended rate of filling shall be based
d
on a flow velocity of 0.05 m/s, calculated from the following equation:
n
Q f ≤12.5π D 2
ala
where
Qf = filling rate, in litres per second

D = pipe diameter, in metres
Ze
NOTE – The slow rate of 0.05 m/s avoids air entrainment when the filling water is
cascading through downward gradients along the pipeline.
ew
The period of stabilisation will depend on pipe dimensions, length, material, longitudinal
profile, and air exit points. For cement-mortar lined pipe, the pipeline shall be filled at least
24 hours before the commencement of the test, to allow the lining to become saturated.
sN
NOTE – A firm foam swab may be used ahead of the fill water to assist air removal especially
where the pipeline undulates. Extract the swab at a high-point wash-out.
Typical pressure test equipment and location are shown in figures C1 and C2.
rd
C3.4 Post-test procedures
After testing, pipelines shall be depressurised slowly. All air venting facilities shall be open
da
when emptying pipelines. The test water shall be drained to an approved waterway and
99954
118.92.13.10
all connection points shall be reinstated.

an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
229
230
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
Figure C1 – Typical pressure pipeline under field hydrostatic test

ala
nd
*
NZS 4404:2010
*
d
n
ala
Ze
ew
sN
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
Figure C2 – Typical field pressure test equipment layout

an
C3.5 Constant pressure test (water loss method) – PVC, DI, GRP, and steel pipelines
This test is applicable for PVC, DI, GRP, and steel pipelines. The test length may be several
kilometres in length (see C3.2).
St
C3.5.1 Procedure
ht
(a) Close all valves apart from the test pump input and pressurise the test length to the
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
specified test pressure (STP) – (see C3.1);

(b) Apply and then maintain the test pressure by the addition of measured and recorded
quantities of make-up water at regular intervals over a period, in the range of 1 hour
py
to 12 hours;
(c) Where pressure measurements are not made at the lowest part of the test length,
Co
make an allowance for the static head, between the lowest point of the pipeline and
the point of measurement, to ensure that the test pressure is not exceeded at the
lowest point. ➤
231
NZS 4404:2010
The quantity of make-up water necessary to maintain the test pressure shall comply with
the following equation:
*
Q ≤0.14LDH
d
where
n
Q = allowable make-up water, in litres per hour
ala
L = length of the test length, in kilometres
D = nominal diameter of the test length, in metres
H = average test head over length of pipeline under test, in metres
Ze
NOTE – The make-up water is not a leakage allowance, but is an allowance to cover the
effects of the test head forcing small quantities of entrapped air into solution. Normally the
test should last for a minimum of 2 hours and be concluded within 5 to 8 hours. The make-
ew
up water requirement should reduce with time as air goes into solution. Where, after 12 hours
the make-up water still exceeds the allowable limit, testing should cease and the cause of loss
investigated.
C3.5.2 Acceptance
sN
(a) The test length shall be acceptable where there is no failure of any thrust block, pipe,
fitting, joint, or any other pipeline component;
rd
(b) There is no physical leakage;
(c) The quantity of make-up water necessary to maintain the test pressure complies
da
with C3.5.1.
99954
118.92.13.10
C3.6 Constant pressure test (water loss method) for viscoelastic pressure pipelines
an
This test is applicable to PE, PP, and ABS pressure pipelines. The test lengths may be
several kilometres in length.
St
NOTE – This method is based on VAV P78, as outlined in AS/NZS 2566.2, Appendix A.
C3.6.1 Procedure
ht
(a) Purge the air from pipeline;

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
(b) Apply the specified test pressure (STP) (see C3.1) to the test length;
(c) Shut off main and allow pressure to settle for 12 hours (pressure will drop significantly);
py
(d) Re-apply and maintain test pressure for 5 hours by successively pumping a sufficient
amount of water;
Co
(e) Measure and record water volume (V1 in litres) required to maintain this pressure
between Hour 2 and Hour 3;
(f) Measure and record water volume (V2 in litres) required to maintain this pressure
between Hour 4 and Hour 5;
(g) Calculate:
0.55V1 + Q
where Q is the allowable make-up volume obtained from C3.5.1.
232
NZS 4404:2010
C3.6.2 Acceptance
The test length shall be acceptable where:
*
(a) The test length shall be acceptable where there is no failure of any thrust block, pipe,
fitting, joint, or any other pipeline component;
d
(b) There is no physical leakage; and
n
(c) V2 ≤ 0.55 V1 + Q.
ala
C3.7 Pressure rebound method for viscoelastic pressure pipelines
This test is applicable to PE, PP, and ABS pressure pipelines up to and including DN 315,
Ze
where a short test time is required.
NOTE – This test is based on BS EN 805:2000, Appendix A (refer to AS/NZS 2566.2).
ew
C3.7.1 Pressure measurement rig
The test rig shall be a recently calibrated pressure transducer, data logger, and check
pressure gauge that has a dial of at least 100 mm diameter and a pressure range that
sN
places the specified test pressure (STP) (see C3.1) in the range 35% to 70% of the gauge’s
full scale. The transducer and the check gauge shall read within ±5% of each other. If
they do not agree within this tolerance, the equipment shall be recalibrated or replaced.
rd
C3.7.2 Procedure
The test procedure has the following three phases:
da
99954
118.92.13.10
(a) A preliminary phase in which the pipeline is —

(i) Depressurised and allowed to relax after the C3.3 pre-test procedure
an
(ii) Pressurised quickly to the test pressure and maintained at this pressure for a
period of time without further water being added
(iii) The pressure is allowed to decay by viscoelastic creep, and
St
(iv) Provided the pressure drop does not exceed a specified maximum, the
pressure test can proceed to the second phase;
ht
(b) A phase in which the volume of air remaining in the pipeline is assessed against an
allowable maximum;
rig
(c) The main test phase in which the pipeline is maintained at the test pressure for
09
29
80
80
00
16
a period of time and decay due to viscoelastic creep commenced. The creep is
interrupted by a rapid reduction of the pressure in the pipeline to a specified level.
This rapid reduction in pressure results in contraction of the pipeline with an increase
py
(rebound) in pressure. If, during the rebound period, the pressure versus time record
shows a fall in pressure, the pipeline fails the test.
Co
233
NZS 4404:2010
C3.7.3 Preliminary phase

*
(a) Reduce pressure to just above atmospheric at the highest point of the test length,
and let stand for 60 minutes. Ensure no air enters the line;
d
(b) Raise the pressure smoothly to STP in less than 10 minutes. Hold the pressure at
n
STP for 30 minutes by pumping continuously, or at short intervals as needed. Do
not exceed STP;
ala
(c) Inspect for leaks during the 30 minute period, then shut off pressure;
(d) Allow the pressure to decay for 60 minutes;
Ze
(e) Measure the pressure remaining at 60 minutes (P60);
(f) If P60 ≤ 70% of STP the test is failed. The cause shall be located and rectified. Steps
(a) to (e) shall be repeated. If P60 > 70% of STP, proceed to the air volume assessment.
ew
C3.7.4 Air volume assessment

(a)
sN
Quickly (<5 min) reduce pressure by ∆P (10%–15% of STP);
(b) Measure water volume bled out (∆V);
(c) Calculate ∆Vmax allowable as follows:
rd
∆Vmax allowable = 1.2 × V × ∆P (1/EW + D/ER)

da
where
99954
118.92.13.10
1.2 = air allowance

an
V = pipe volume, in litres

∆P = measured pressure drop, in kilopascals
St
D = pipe internal diameter, in metres

ER = pipe material modulus, in kilopascals (see table C2)
EW = bulk modulus of water, in kilopascals (see table C3);
ht
(d) If ∆V > ∆Vmax allowable the test has failed. The cause shall be located and rectified.
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
The preliminary phase shall be repeated. If ∆V ≤ ∆Vmax allowable, proceed to the

main test phase.
NOTE – ∆V and ∆P should be measured as accurately as possible, especially where

py
the test length volume is small.
C3.7.5 Main test phase

Co
Observe and record the pressure rise for 30 minutes.
In the event of failure, locate and repair leaks. If failure is marginal or doubtful, or if it is
necessary to determine leakage rate, use a reference test (see C3.6).
NOTE – Figure C3 gives an example of a full pressure test with the main test phase extended
to 90 minutes.
234
NZS 4404:2010
Table C2 – Pipe E material modulus for PE 80B and PE 100
Temp PE 80B – E Modulus (kPa×103) PE 100 – E Modulus (kPa×103)

(°C)
*
1h 2h 3h 1h 2h 3h
d
5 740 700 680 990 930 900
10 670 630 610 900 850 820
n
15 600 570 550 820 780 750
ala
20 550 520 510 750 710 680
25 510 490 470 690 650 630
30 470 450 430 640 610 600
Ze
Table C3 – Bulk modulus Ew – Water
Temperature (°C) Bulk Modulus (kPa×103)
ew
5 2080
10 2110
15
20
2140
2170
sN
25 2210
rd
30 2230
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
Figure C3 – Typical successful modified rebound test for a PE pipeline
235
NZS 4404:2010
C3.7.6 Acceptance
The test length shall be acceptable if:
*
(a) There is no failure of any thrust block, pipe, fitting, joint, or any other pipeline component;
(b) There is no physical leakage;
d
(c) The pressure rises or remains static in the 30-minute period.
n
ala
If doubt exists about the pressure recovery, the monitoring period may be increased to
90 minutes, and any pressure drop that does occur shall not exceed 20 kPa over the
90-minute period.
Ze
If the pressure drops by more than 20 kPa during the 90-minute extended period, the
test fails.
Repetition of the main test phase shall only be done by carrying out the whole test procedure,
ew
including the relaxation period of 60 minutes described in C3.7.3.
C3.8 Visual test for small pressure pipelines

sN
This test is applicable for small pipelines of all materials (less than 200 m in length), and
pipelines where pipeline joints have been left exposed for the test operation (such as
coiled pipe).
rd
C3.8.1 Procedure
da
99954
118.92.13.10
(a) The test pressure (see C3.1) shall be applied and the test section isolated by closing
the high point air release valves and the pump feed valve;
an
(b) The test section shall be visually inspected for leakage at all joints, especially bolted
joints, all fittings, service connections, and ball valves;
St
(c) Pressure gauges shall be checked to ensure that pressure has not fallen significantly
indicating an undetected leak;
(d) Any detected leak shall be repaired and the section shall be retested;
ht
(e) Where no leak is detected, high point air release valves shall be opened, the pipeline
shall be depressurised to slowly drain the line into an approved waterway and all
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
connection points shall be reinstated.
C3.8.2 Acceptance
py
The test length shall be acceptable where:
(a) There is no failure of any thrust block, pipe, fitting, joint, or any other pipeline component;
Co
(b) There is no physical leakage; and

(c) There is no pressure loss indicative of a leak.
236
NZS 4404:2010
APPENDIX D – WATER SUPPLY DISINFECTION SPECIFICATION

(Normative)
*
D1 Disinfection of pipelines and fittings
d
After flushing the main to remove all debris and air, the main shall be filled with water
n
containing a free available chlorine concentration of 15 g/m3 ± 5 g/m3 and allowed to stand
ala
for a minimum of 12 hours for all new mains. At the end of the disinfection period, the
free available chlorine (FAC) concentration shall be at least 5 g/m3. If the FAC is less than
5 g/m3 at the completion of the period, the disinfection shall be repeated until a satisfactory
result is obtained. Note that the main should not be drained after flushing unless all high
Ze
points are ‘vented’ to allow for complete removal of air.
Under no circumstances will the use of handfuls of hypochlorite powder or chlorine tablets
ew
dumped into the pipe and hydrant tees be an acceptable practice.
The sterilising solution should be fed by gravity or pumped into one end of the main and
the ‘flushing’ water in the pipe displaced out of the opposite end of the main until tests
sN
carried out show that the water being displaced contains the full FAC concentration. The
authorised officer will arrange for testing of the FAC concentration and, to this end, the
contractor shall give 24-hours notice of intention to sterilise.
rd
The contractor shall provide all temporary fittings necessary to allow for the introduction
of the sterilising solution to and its removal from the main.
da
See also D3.

99954
118.92.13.10
an
D2 Methods of introducing the sterilising solution

Methods of introducing sterilising solution will depend on the volume of solution required
St
for the particular main and the availability of appropriate equipment.
In general, wherever the pipe volume is less than 10 m3, the most practical method is
ht
to add sufficient calcium or sodium hypochlorite (powder or solution) to a potable water

tanker suitable for carrying potable water to achieve the desired 15 g/m3 FAC concentration.
(This may require two tankers full.)
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
For greater quantities, the sterilising solution may be injected into the main using a portable
gas chlorinator or a hypochlorinator. An approved backflow preventer shall be installed
py
if either of these options is used.

Co
D3 Disposal of sterilising solution

After the satisfactory completion of the sterilising process, the chlorine solution shall be
flushed into the sanitary wastewater pipe or, alternatively, retained in a temporary surface
storage pond until the TA’s authorised officer is satisfied that the FAC has reduced to a
satisfactory concentration before being allowed to flow down the stormwater drainage
system or into a natural watercourse.
237
NZS 4404:2010
D4 Acceptable method for sterilising mains

(a) Use sodium hypochlorite solution. This solution usually has 10% or 15% FAC;
*
(b) Obtain a clean water tanker, as used for potable drinking water. The tanker should
have a known water capacity;
d
(c) Measure the required amount of sodium hypochlorite solution into a beaker and
n
pour it into the empty tanker;
ala
NOTE – The final strength of the chlorine to water is to be 15 g/m3 ±5 g/m3.
(d) Fill the tanker to the appropriate volume and ensure the solution is well mixed;
(e) Charge the new main with the chlorinated water from the tanker at one end of the
Ze
main or into a new hydrant through a standpipe. All service pipes and hydrants shall
be left open and allowed to run for a couple of minutes. The services and hydrants
shall then be closed to allow the highest end of the main to fill completely;
ew
NOTE – The main should ideally be charged from the highest point. This will allow the
water to be gravity fed into the main. If this is not possible the water tanker shall have
a truck mounted pump to pump the chlorinated water in.
(f)
(g)
sN
Seal off the main and leave it charged with the chlorinated water for 24 hours;
Take samples and test for residual chlorine;
(h) After 24 hours flush the main well until the chlorine smell is gone. Once the main
rd
is connected into the reticulation system it should be flushed thoroughly before the
services are connected up.
da
99954
NOTE – For large mains, a water tanker may not have the required capacity so a dose
pump system shall be used and approved by the authorised officer.
118.92.13.10
Example:
an
A. Calculate the volume of the mains to be chlorinated, that is, 85 m of

100 mm dia. main
St
Vol. = 85 x π x 0.12 = 0.67 m3

4
ht
= 667.6 litres
Plus 110 m of 150 mm dia. main

rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Vol. = 110 x π x 0.152 = 1.944 m3

4
py
= 1.944 litres
Total volume = 1,944 + 667.6 = 2,611.6 litres

Co
238
NZS 4404:2010
B. The total volume of 2,611.6 litres is less than the volume of the water
tanker (say 5,000 litres) so calculate how many millilitres of sodium
hypochlorite is required for the 5,000 litre tanker to give a final solution
*
of 15 g/m3.
d
v = Vxc
n
s x 10
ala
v = volume of sodium hypochlorite in ml
V = volume of water tanker
c = concentration of final solution in g/m3
Ze
s = strength of concentrated hypochlorite in % FAC
v = 5000 x 15 = 500 ml
ew
15 x 10
sN
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
239
NZS 4404:2010
APPENDIX E – TYPICAL PLAN AND CROSS SECTION FIGURES FROM TABLE 3.2
(Informative)
*
The following figures are provided by Standards New Zealand. The copyright of these
figures is waived.
d
n
Figure E1 – Rural, live and play, access to lifestyle or clustered housing (1 to 6 du)
ala
Figure E3 – Rural, live and play, access to housing
Figure E4 – Rural, shop and trade, side or rear service access
Figure E5 – Rural, shop and trade, access to trade
Ze
Figure E6 – Rural, make and move, primary freight access
Figure E7 – Rural, make and move, access to office and education
Figure E8 – Rural, all other situations (where not specified elsewhere in table 3.2)
Figure E9 – Suburban, live and play, access to houses/townhouses (1 to 3 du, or 1 to 6du)
ew
Figure E10 – Suburban, live and play, side or rear service access
Figure E11 – Suburban, live and play, access to houses/townhouses (1 to 20 du)

Figure E12 – Suburban, live and play, primary access to housing (1 to 200 du)
Figure E13 –
Figure E14 –
sN
Suburban, live and play, primary access to housing (up to 800 du)
Suburban, shop and trade, work and learn, side or rear service access
Figure E15 – Suburban, shop and trade, work and learn, access to trade, office, and
education
rd
Figure E16 – Suburban, make and move, side or rear freight access
Figure E17 – Suburban, make and move, primary freight access
da
99954
118.92.13.10
Figure E18 – Suburban, shop and trade, work and learn, make and move, all roads
serving multi-purpose areas involving most or all of the indicated land
uses, not specified elsewhere in table 3.2
an
Figure E19 – Urban, live and play, access to lifestyle or clustered housing
Figure E20 – Urban, live and play, side or rear service access
Figure E21 – Urban, live and play, access to houses/townhouses
St
Figure E22 – Urban, live and play, primary access to housing

Figure E23 – Urban, live and play, all other land use activity types within this area type
not specified elsewhere in table 3.2
ht
Figure E24 – Urban, shop and trade, side or rear service access
Figure E25 – Urban, shop and trade, access to lots, or shop or trade units
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
Figure E26 – Urban, shop and trade, primary access to trade

Figure E27 – Urban, work and learn, side or rear service access
Figure E28 – Urban, work and learn, access to lots, or work or learn activities
py
Figure E29 – Urban, work and learn, primary access to office and education
Figure E30 – Urban, mixed use, multiple user access
Figure E31 – Urban, mixed use, neighbourhood centres (and all other areas serving
Co
multiple land uses not listed elsewhere in table 3.2)

Figure E32 – Centre, mixed use, side or rear service access
Figure E33 – Centre, mixed use, access to lots or mixed use activities
Figure E34 – Centre, mixed use, primary access and local movement
Figure E35 – Centre, mixed use, shared spaces, accessway, mall, and community
reserve
Figure E36 – Centre, mixed use, urban street
240
NZS 4404:2010
*
d
n
ala
Ze
ew
sN
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
241
242
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Figure E3 – Rural, live and play, access to housing
Ze
Figure E4 – Rural, shop and trade, side or rear service access

ala
nd
*
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
Figure E5 – Rural, shop and trade, access to trade
ew
Figure E6 – Rural, make and move, primary freight access

Ze
ala
nd
*
243
NZS 4404:2010
244
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Figure E7 – Rural, make and move, access to office and education Ze
ala
nd
*
Figure E8 – Rural, all other situations (where not specified elsewhere in table 3.2)
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
1 to 6 du)
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
Figure E10 – Suburban, live and play, side or rear service access
ala
nd
*
Figure E9 – Suburban, live and play, access to houses/townhouses (1 to 3 du, or
245
NZS 4404:2010
246
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
nd
Figure E12 – Suburban, live and play, primary access to housing (1 to 200 du)
*
Figure E11 – Suburban, live and play, access to houses/townhouses (1 to 20 du)
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
nd
*
Figure E13 – Suburban, live and play, primary access to housing (up to 800 du)
Figure E14 – Suburban, shop and trade, work and learn, side or rear service access
247
NZS 4404:2010
248
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
and education
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
Figure E16 – Suburban, make and move, side or rear freight access
nd
*
Figure E15 – Suburban, shop and trade, work and learn, access to trade, office,
NZS 4404:2010
*
d
n
ala
Ze
ew
sN
rd
Figure E17 – Suburban, make and move, primary freight access

da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
Figure E18 – Suburban, shop and trade, work and learn, make and move, all
roads serving multi-purpose areas involving most or all of the indicated land
uses, not specified elsewhere in table 3.2
249
250
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
Figure E20 – Urban, live and play, side or rear service access
ala
nd
Figure E19 – Urban, live and play, access to lifestyle or clustered housing
*
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
Figure E22 – Urban, live and play, primary access to housing

Figure E21 – Urban, live and play, access to houses/townhouses
ala
nd
*
251
NZS 4404:2010
NZS 4404:2010
*
d
n
ala
Ze
ew
sN
rd
Figure E23 – Urban, live and play, all other land use activity types within this area
type not specified elsewhere in table 3.2
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
Figure E24 – Urban, shop and trade, side or rear service access
252
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
Figure E26 – Urban, shop and trade, primary access to trade

ala
nd
Figure E25 – Urban, shop and trade, access to lots, or shop or trade units
253
NZS 4404:2010
254
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Figure E27 – Urban, work and learn, side or rear service access Ze
ala
nd
Figure E28 – Urban, work and learn, access to lots, or work or learn activities
*
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Figure E30 – Urban, mixed use, multiple user access

Ze
ala
nd
Figure E29 – Urban, work and learn, primary access to office and education
255
NZS 4404:2010
NZS 4404:2010
*
d
n
ala
Ze
ew
sN
rd
Figure E31 – Urban, mixed use, neighbourhood centres (and all other areas
serving multiple land uses not listed elsewhere in table 3.2)
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
Co
Figure E32 – Centre, mixed use, side or rear service access
256
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
Figure E34 – Centre, mixed use, primary access and local movement
Figure E33 – Centre, mixed use, access to lots or mixed use activities
nd
*
257
NZS 4404:2010
258
118.92.13.10
99954
NZS 4404:2010
Co
py
rig
reserve
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
rd
sN
Figure E36 – Centre, mixed use, urban street

ew
Ze
ala
nd
*
Figure E35 – Centre, mixed use, shared spaces, accessway, mall, and community
118.92.13.10
99954
Co
py
rig
ht
St
an
16
00
80
80
29
09
3
da
NOTES
rd
sN
ew
Ze
ala
n d
*
NZS 4404:2010
*
d
n
ala
Ze
ew
sN
rd
da
99954
118.92.13.10
an
St
ht
rig
3
09
29
80
80
00
16
py
© 2010 STANDARDS COUNCIL
Approved by the Standards Council on 28 June 2010 to be a New Zealand

Co
Standard pursuant to the provisions of section 10 of the Standards Act 1988.
First published: 6 July 2010

Reprinted incorporating Amendment No. 1: 29 October 2010
The following Standards New Zealand references relate to this Standard:
Project No. P 4404

Draft for comment No. DZ 4404
Typeset by: Standards New Zealand
Printed by: The Colour Guy

NZS4404 2010

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NZS4404 2010

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NZS4404 2010

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NZS 4404:2010

Incorporating Amendment No. 1

New Zealand Standard

Land Development and

Association of Consulting Engineers New Zealand Brian Kouvelis

Water New Zealand John Palmer

Cover image courtesy Justin Borgueta and Harrison Grierson.

software or document, even for internal use within your organization.

file does not contain such viruses.

Superseding NZS 4404:2004

1.5 Climate change..............................................................................32

1.7 Requirements for design and construction....................................33

1.8 Approval of design and construction.............................................33

1.8.4 Approval of design.............................................................36

1.8.7 Connecting to existing services......................................... 37

2 EARTHWORKS AND GEOTECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS.....................45

2.3.6 Compaction standards for fill material............................... 51

2.6.2 As-built drawings for earthworks and subsoil drains.........53

3.1 Scope ...........................................................................................56

3.2.4 Place and link context........................................................ 57

3.2.6 Design and access statement........................................... 61

3.3.1 Design requirements.........................................................62

3.3.3 Pavement structural design...............................................78

3.3.11 Footpaths, accessways, cycle paths, and berms..............82

3.3.16 Private ways, private roads, and other private accesses..85

3.4.5 Subgrade checking..........................................................108

3.4.13 Bitumen application rate.................................................. 110

3.4.14 Footpaths and cycle paths............................................... 110

3.4.15 Kerb and channel..............................................................111

and accessways.............................................................. 112

3.4.20 As-built and completion documentation.......................... 112

4.2.1 Objectives........................................................................ 113

4.2.3 Local authorities’ requirements........................................ 114

4.3 Design ......................................................................................... 116

4.4.1 Approval process.............................................................132

5.2.2 Referenced documents and relevant guidelines.............134

5.3.2 Structure plan..................................................................135

5.3.4 System design.................................................................135

5.3.7 System layout.................................................................. 141

6.3.1 Design life........................................................................155

6.3.11 Fire flow...........................................................................166

6.3.17 Termination points...........................................................176

6.4 Approval of proposed infrastructure.............................................178

6.4.1 Approval process.............................................................178

6.5.3 Backfilling and reinstatement..........................................179

7 LANDSCAPE ......................................................................................... 181

7.3.6 Species selection.............................................................184

7.4.5 Mulch............................................................................... 187

7.4.8 Revegetation planting and existing vegetation................189

8 NETWORK UTILITY SERVICES............................................................ 191

8.1 Scope ......................................................................................... 191

8.2.2 Definitions........................................................................ 191

8.4.3 Conversion to underground on existing roads.................193

5.2 Guide to roughness coefficients for gravity sewer lines.............. 137

5.7 Acceptable MH, MS, and TMS options for wastewater

5.8 Maximum allowable deflections through MHs............................. 147

6.1 Hydraulic roughness values......................................................... 157

3.5 Subsoil drains................................................................................. 91

3.12 An alternative sump for hillside situations.................................... 101